LIBRARY OF CONGRESS. 



efoi. ..:..::. &&&$ f a, 

SheifL./.S6 



UNITED STATES OF AMERICA. 



PEACTICAL 



INTRODUCTORY HEBREW GRAMMAR 



EDWIN CONE BISSELL 

Professor in Hartford Theological Seminary 



SECOND EDITION 



HARTFORD, CONN. 
THE HARTFORD THEOLOGICAL SEMINARY 

1892 






^ 



? 1 * & 



Copyright, 1890, 
By EDWIN" CONE BISSELL. 



Printed by J. S. Cushing & Co., Boston. 



PREFACE. 



This Grammar differs from other primary Hebrew Grammars chiefly 
in two respects : its compactness of form — attained, it is believed, without 
loss of important matter — and the facilities it offers for acquiring, during 
the study of the grammatical principles, a choice Hebrew vocabulary. All 
words used in the Hebrew Bible over fifty times, the most of those used 
between twenty-five and fifty times, and not a few of those, of connected 
roots, used less than twenty-five times are here found, and they are the only 
Hebrew words employed in the book. Seven hundred of them are made 
use of in Parts 1 and 2, and three hundred in the additional Exercises 
(pp. 123-130). It is, of course, to be expected that the student will make 
special effort to memorize these words as they occur; but the process, it 
is confidently hoped, will be greatly facilitated by the structure of the 
Grammar itself. 1. The words are arranged in the several Vocabularies 
under their respective root-forms. 2. They are very generally accompanied 
by notes and mnemonics for the purpose of calling special attention to them 
and fixing them in mind. 3. They are used in the illustrations of princi- 
ples ; in the various tables of inflected forms ; and, all of them, in the Exer- 
cises for translation. 4. Attention is repeatedly called to them by a careful 
system of cross references. 5 An alphabetical list is given (pp. 118-120) 
to serve as a test of the student's acquaintance with the Vocabularies already 
gone over, as well as for general reference. 6. The Exercises for translating 
Hebrew into English are purposely placed apart from the Vocabularies in 
order to encourage independence of them. 7. And, finally, in Ap. ii. (A) 
about six hundred of the words are associated together in the form of syno- 
nyms ; and (B) three hundred of similar form or sound are discriminated 
from one another. Among many advantages of this method, it has been 
found that, without any considerable increase of the time required to master 
the principles of the Grammar, the student, while so engaged, has also made 
a fair beginning in the much neglected departments of Hebrew etymology 
and synonomy ; and, still better, acquired a vocabulary sufficient to enable 
him to read at sight in the historical books of the Bible. The use of mne- 
monics is simply incidental to the general plan ; but, far-fetched and even 
ridiculous as some of the suggestions are acknowledged to be, they have 
proved, after an experience of some years, very effective for their purpose. 
The only other systematic attempt of the kind with which I am acquainted 
is that of Stier (Hebrciisches Vocabularium, Leipz., 1871), who, however, used 
the system to a very limited extent. 



11 , PREFACE. 

In the arrangement of material, especially of §§ 14-37, I have aimed to 
be practical rather than strictly scientific. A smaller type has often been 
made use of for subordinate matter ; but very little has been inserted in the 
body of the work for mere reference. 

In the Exercises and in the illustrations of rules, I have sought to confine 
myself to strictly Biblical expressions. Large use has been made throughout 
of the inductive principle in the form of presentation. 

In treating of the Accents, on the basis of the well-known works of Professor 
Wickes (Oxford, 1887, 1881), the subject, it is hoped, has been somewhat clari- 
fied and simplified. This section, however, might well be omitted until the 
rest of the Grammar has been learned. 

The slight changes made in the nomenclature and classification of the 
Verb are in harmony with the expressed opinions, if not with the actual 
practice of some of the best recent grammarians. 

The references by numbers, in the Exercises and Word-list, to the Vocab- 
ularies, and in the Vocabularies to the appended notes, will be readily under- 
stood. The absence of an index will, perhaps, be less keenly felt, in view of 
the unusually full Table of Contents, which, it is thought, will serve impor- 
tant practical uses both of the student and the teacher. 

A chapter, to conclude the work, on the formation of Hebrew words was 
begun, but subsequently abandoned on reading Strack's notice of the inves- 
tigations of Professor Barth of Berlin, still in progress, in this department 
(see Theol. Literaturblatt, 1890, Nr. 18). They seem likely to make nec- 
essary an entire reconstruction of what has hitherto been thought and 
written on the subject. 

It is doubtless too much to expect that other instructors in Hebrew will 
always agree with me in what has here been said or purposely left unsaid, 
especially touching points on which they fail to agree with one another. 
Those most familiar with recent Hebrew grammatical literature will readily 
discover that I have been much influenced by the grammars of Gesenius- 
Kautzsch (25th ed., Leipz., 1889), Kbnig (Leipz., 1881) and Strack (3d ed., 
Berlin, 1890), my large indebtedness to whom I gladly acknowledge. 

I wish, also, to give expression to a warm sense of gratitude to numerous 
colleagues, who, having received advanced sheets of my grammar, have 
materially aided me with friendly criticisms and valuable suggestions. 



Second Edition. — The only changes made from the first edition are the 
correction of a few typographical errors, slight alterations in §§ 6. 5, r., 44. 1, 
r. l, 48. 3, and the addition of three sections (Part III.) on the Syntax, the 
principles being mostly derived from Genesis. 

Edwin Cone Bissell. 

Hartford, Sept., 1891. 



TABLE OF CONTENTS. 



§ 1. The Alphabet: — of what it consists — final letters — B e ghadhk e phath 
letters — pronunciation of certain other letters — division of letters according to 
the organs of speech used in pronouncing them — exercise pp. 1, 2 

§ 2. The Vowels : — the three primary — their modifications in tabular form 
— use of circumflex accent — "vowel letters" and what they severally represent — 
table of class, character, name, sound, and quantity of the vowels — remark on 
the character e — on means of distinguishing Qamec from Qame§ hatuph — 
other ambiguous signs for vowels — where the vowels are written — exceptions — 
S e wa and the Hatephs — vocabulary with notes — exercises pp. 3-6 

§3. The Syllable: — number in a word — beginning — device if beginning 
with two consonants — "vocal" S e wa, what and where found — exception to 
rule for syllable — to that for S e wa — end of a syllable — a final one — an audible 
consonant and 2? at the end of a syllable not final — final Kaph or two audible 
consonants ending a word — meaning of " audible " — a shut, doubly shut and 
sharpened syllable — an open syllable — vowel of an open syllable — of a shut 
syllable — half -open syllables — how distinguished — vowel of a shut final syl- 
lable with the tone — of a shut penultimate syllable — a toneless sharpened 
syllable — the tone — how marked — Methegh what and where found — with the 
conjunction ^ — vocabulary and notes — exercise pp. 6-9 

§ 4. Other Characters used in the Hebrew text : — Daghes lene — when used 

— the dot sometimes found in final H an( i S$ — V). 1. after a disjunctive accent or 
at the beginning of a new sentence — D. forte — how distinguished from D. 1. — 
when used with the B c ghadhk e phath letters — different kinds of D. forte — 
Raphe — original and present use — Maqqeph — Q e re and K e thibh — further use 
of the circle — a perpetual Q c re — special dots (JPuncta extraordinaria) — end of 
a verse how marked — vocabulary with notes — exercise pp. 10-12 

§ 5. The gutturals and quiescent letters: — the guttural letters — of ^ — of 
f] — in what all are peculiar — D. f . implied — with what letters — when not im- 
plied changes required — class of vowels favored — i and u how changed — 
vowels short and long with a final guttural — Pathah furtive and the tone or with 
accretions — gutturals and S e wa — character of the Hateph — the vowel preced- 
ing a Hateph — peculiarity of ^ — of its losing consonantal force — final ^ fol- 
lowing a silent S e wa — the letter *1 — when *\ and i are used as consonants — 
vocabulary with notes — exercise pp. 12-14 

§6. Changes in Vowels: — causes working to produce them — how far pos- 
sible — immutable vowels — a tone long vowel in a shut or loosely shut syllable 

— in a sharpened syllable — vowels of a shut syllable if it be opened — effects of 
Pause on a short vowel — as to an original or a dropped vowel — on the tone — 
effect on vowels if the tone be moved forward one syllable — difference in nouns 



IV TABLE OF CONTENTS. 

and verbs in this respect — removal of the tone still another syllable — vocabu- 
lary with notes — exercise pp. 14-16 

§ 7. The Accents : — table of no., names, form and position of prose accents 
— derivation of names — accents where found — rule if not on tone syllable — 
on what their power depends — accents marking highest, high and low tones — 
meaning of disjunctive and conjunctive — accent closing a verse — general law 
governing accentual division — object primarily aimed at — main accents where 
placed — accents as marks of punctuation — accents used to mark the main dich- 
otomy — the minor dichotomy in the Silluq clause — in Athnah clause — order 
of the conjunctives — of an occasional double system of accentuation — form of 
Paseq and its use — poetic accents where found and their use — law governing 
them in the major dichotomy — in the minor dichotomy pp. 16-21 

§ 8. The Personal Pronoun: — table of forms — the form of HD^ — JTl^ — 
fcfln — *l3r°D — 13^ — original form of 2d pers. sing, and pi. — Daghes in nftiT 
H3H — oblique cases of pronoun how indicated — vocabulary with notes — ex- 
ercise , p. 22 

§ 9. The Article : — table of forms — for what original form accounts — Art. 
before gutturals — in the second syllable from the tone and when not lengthened 
to Qamec — original force of art. — when found with ^IH, *"|£, Q 1 ^, V*i&$ — 
before a letter having S e wa — vocabulary with notes — exercise pp. 23, 24 

§ 10. Demonstrative and Belative Pronoun: — table of dem. pronoun — that 
for the remote object — Daghes in the ^ of {"PX — other use of JTJ — J)], *)) and 
lit — 7K — the form JTpn etc. — position of dem. pronoun — as an adjective — 
with another adjective — the adjective as predicate — when qualifying — if the 
subst. be definite — the Eel. pronoun — contracted form — uses — as a sign of 
relation — a conjunction — vocabulary with notes — exercise pp. 24, 25 

§ 11. The Interrogative Pronouns and Particles: — forms — table showing 
pointing of J"] ft — use of ^ft and ["[ft respectively — the Daghes following |"[ft — 
the interrog. pronoun as Genitive : — Hft before adjectives and verbs — other uses 
of ^ft and j"]ft — the interrog. particles — pointing of J"| — when used — its rela- 
tion to QS$ — when an alternative is suggested — ^ without a pronom. suffix ; — 
with other adverbs — an interrog. pronoun or particle unnecessary to a ques- 
tion — the D. forte following J^ — Jf with £0 — vocabulary with notes — 
exercise pp. 25-27 

§ 12. The Inseparable Prepositions : — meaning of ]3, 7, ^ — their pointing — 
two S e was coming together at the beginning of a syllable — independent form of 
these prepositions and when used — pointing before nirP — vocabulary with 
notes — exercise pp. 27, 28 

§13. The Preposition Jft and Wdw Copulative: — how jft is written — in 
the case of gutturals following, or *"| — with Hand fj — before letters having 
S e wa — before \ — before HliT — now the conjunction ) is pointed — before a 
guttural — the labials or a letter having S e wa — before the tone syllable, espe- 
cially with words associated in pairs — before ^ excepting mrr 1 — vocabulary with 
notes — exercise pp. 28, 29 

§ 14. The Strong Verb : — roots of words — how verbs are classified — weak 
verbs — origin of names of weak verbs — examples — why verbs having gutturals 
are classified as strong verbs — table of Perfect of strong verb — how formed — 
origin of the several pronominal fragments — endings not taking the tone — the 
vowels a, e, in final syllable before affixes beginning with a vowel and having 
the tone — vocabulary with notes — exercise pp. 29-31 



TABLE OF CONTEXTS. V 

§ 15. The Infinitive and Imperative : — table of each — what the two Infs. 
are — vowels of each — Inf. cstr. how used — Inf. abs. — the syllable formed by 
prefixing y to Inf. cstr. — ground- form of Imp. — the endings — the Imp. how 
used — a command in the third person — with a negative — the first vowel in 
* ,l pPP — lengthened form of Imp. — vocabulary with notes — exercise . . pp. 31-33 

§ 16. The Imperfect and Participles : — table of the Impf. — why there are 
prefixes as well as affixes — origin of them — the terms Perf. and Impf. — the 
former how used — the latter — table of Parts. — whence the Part. pass. — how 
the Parts, are used — time indicated — original forms and how changed — 



§ 17. Intransitive verbs: — principal vowel of a verb — distinction between 
trans, and intrans. verbs — what the latter indicate — inflection of verbs middle 
e— not always taking a in the second syllable of Inf. cstr., Imp. and Impf. — 
inflection of verbs middle o — forms following the Perf. — the Inf. with a fern. 
ending — middle a verb taking a in second syllable of Impf. — vocabulary with 
notes — exercise pp. 35, 36 

§ 18. Lengthened form of the Imperfect and Waw Consecutive : — analogy of 
Imp. followed — formation of Cohortative — tone — where Cohortative is found 
and its force — the vowel before ah — peculiar sequence of Perf. and Impf. in 
Hebrew — how indicated — original form of this waw — how joined to the verbs 
it affects — how preceded — form of AVaw c. with Impf. and the tone — before 
^ of 1st Pers. — before \ — tone in 1st Pers. sing. — sometimes joined to Cohor- 
tative — form of Waw c. with the Perf. and the tone — uses of projection of tone 

— vocabulary with notes — exercise pp. 36-39 

§ 19. Voices of the Verb: — ground-form of verb — name Qal — form 

found in lexicons — how translated — represented as the root of the word — 
Denominatives — derived stems — ' ' conjugations ' ' or Voices — how formed — 
whence their usual names — infelicity of nomenclature and how changed — all 

verbs not found in all voices — vocabulary with notes pp. 39, 40 

§ 20. The Niqtal : — partial table of forms — the voice how formed — original 
of vowel of 1st syllable — where prefix } appears — the Inf. cstr. and related 
parts — -use of aspirate |"| — characteristic signs of the Xi. — the tone some- 
times retracted — vowel of Impf. 1. sing. — forms of Inf. Abs. on what based 

— inflection of Xi. and Qal — meaning of Xi. — vocabulary with notes — 
exercise pp. 40-41 

§ 21. The Qittel, Quttal and Hithqattel : — most characteristic mark of these 
voices — the one common to the first two — vowel of 1. syl. of Qi. — original 
vowel of 2. syl. where appearing and where become e — original vowel of Inf. 
abs. — prefix of Parts, here and in following voices — three verbs taking e in last 
syl. of Perf. — where D. forte is dropped from middle radical — further char- 
acterization of Qu. — formation of Hithq. — syncopation of J"J — change required 
if 1st radical be a sibilant — if ]"}, T t2 e ^ c - — force of Qi. voice — of Qu. — of 
Hithq. — vocabulary with notes — exercise pp. 42, 43 

§ 22. The Hiqtil and Hoqtal : — partial table of forms — characteristic mark 
of these voices — original vowels of Hi. Perf. and how changed — Inf. cstr. and 
related parts — final vowel of Inf. Abs. — the Ho. Part. — shortened forms of the 
Imp. and Impf. in the Hi. of strong verbs — same with inflectional or other addi- 
tions — use of the Jussive — analogy of form with that of waw c. — meaning of 
Hi. with and without a personal object — meaning of Ho. — vocabulary with 
notes — exercise pp. 44, 45 



VI TABLE OF CONTENTS. 

§ 23. Guttural Verbs — An Initial Guttural : — what guttural verbs are — 
former rules recalled — table of an inflected guttural verb — points of difference 
from an ordinary strong verb : as to S e wa ; a performative letter whether closely 
or loosely joined to it ; the initial guttural, if doubling be called for — the vowel 
i of the Q. Imp. — why some forms of p'pf are given — why the Qi. and Qu. are 
omitted — vocabulary with notes — exercise pp. 45-47 

§ 24. Verbs with a Medial Guttural : — table of forms — additional changes 
required — why *]* - Q is used in Qi. and derivative voices — the vowel heightened 
through omission of D. forte — the letter 'I before syllables beginning with ^ 
and having the tone — vocabulary with notes — exercise pp. 48, 49. 

§ 25. Verbs with a Final Guttural : — table of forms — characteristics of 
gutturals most widely exhibited ; Pathah furtive ; a instead of o and of e ; a 
helping vowel in Perf . s. 2. f . of all voices — no special peculiarities in the Qu. , 
Hithq. and Ho. voices — vocabulary with notes — exercise pp. 49-51 

§ 26. Nouns. — Gender and Number: — the two genders — objects regarded 
as neuter in other languages — form of masc. nouns in the sing. — endings of 
fern, nouns in sing. — how nouns of common gender are indicated — what the 
ending J"|_ often represents — the ending ]■) in nouns following a consonant — 

T 

gender of Adjectives — numbers of nouns — ending of masc. pi. — of fern. — of 
du. — how the last is used - — table of forms — how the several endings of the pi. 
are added to the noun — changes required in changeable vowels — nouns with a 
fern, ending in sing, havhig Qi_ in the pi. — origin of ending ]"VJ_ uses of pi. — 
vocabulary with notes — exercise pp. 51-53 

§ 27. Ancient case endings — The Construct State : — original forms for 
Nom. and Gen. case — form for Accus. still found — how used and name — how 
distinguished from fern, ending — when appended to words ending in H_ — Heb. 
use of prepositions instead of case endings — its mode of representing the Gen. 
relation — effect on changeable vowels of word in the construct — table of forms 
— change in terminations of pi. and du. — in H_ of the fern. — in !f_ — other 
occurrences of the construct — vocabulary with notes — exercise pp. 53-55 

§ 28. The Noun with Pronominal Suffixes : — table of suffixes for a sing., pi. 
and du. noun — change of ]■) t o ^ in 2d pers. of pronoun — the other fragmentary 
endings — nouns ending in a consonant and those ending in a vowel — the " con- 
necting" vowel — original form of cstr. in pi. and du. forms — the sing. 1. c. and 
the pi. 2. f. — the "heavy" suffixes — poetic forms of certain endings — the 
effect of Pause — table of noun with suffixes — has here an immutable vowel — 
what the suffixes denote — cstr. form of fern. — fern, of pi. nouns — other endings 
than those of table — Omission of Daghes in the 3 of 2. pers. — vocabulary with 
notes — exercise pp. 55-57 

§ 29. First Class of Nouns : — how nouns with mutable vowels are divided — 
relation to tone — table of forms — what the first class includes — to what the 
terminations are added — words beginning or ending with a guttural — f eminines 
of the form JlblTl — words of the form ^ or *y$ — vocabulary with notes — 

• T • t: 

exercise pp. 57, 58 

§ 30. Second Class of Nouns : — what it includes — law of inflection of words 
of the form of £]bi^ — tne Ni - Q u - aim Ho - Parts, so inflected — monosyllables 

T 

with a mutable a — table of forms of ^ j< — same as Q. Part. act. — law of in- 
flection — monosyllables in e — words of form JTin in cstr. and their law of 
inflection — vocabulary witb notes — exercise pp. 59, 60 



TABLE OF CONTENTS. Vll 

§ 31. Third Class of Xouns : — what it includes — table of forms of ^["Z^ — 

T T 

when a is thinned to i — words of the form |pf in cstr. — !TTC included in this 
class — peculiar form of some words when additions are taken — table of forms 
of a fern, of this class ending in f|_ — to what the endings are added and the law 

T 

of vocal changes — form of the du. — vocabulary with notes — exercise . . pp. 60-62 

§ 32. Fourth Class of Xouns : — were originally monosyllabic — their vowels 
— device for pronouncing — origin of name " Segholate " — change in Segho- 
lates of the a class — of the i and u classes — absolute form of words in first 
two classes — monosyllabic form sometimes retained — table of forms of THJ2 — 
law of inflection — the cstr. sing. — characteristic vowel of the inflected forms 
of words of the u (or o) class — exceptional pi. forms — how cstr. pi. is actually 
formed — vocabulary with notes — exercise pp. 62, 63 

§ 33. Fourth Class of Xouns (continued) : — table of words with gutturals — 
helping vowel of Segholates having a guttural for its second or third letter — 
exception to second part of rule — case of S. of the u class — those of the i class 
whose first letter is a guttural — table of feminines formed from masc. S. by the 

addition of H an( i rule of inflection — table of proper fern. S. — what they are 

and how inflected — double form of some nouns — vocabulary with notes — 
exercise pp. 64-66 

§ 34. Nouns of Peculiar Formation : — table of such nouns — explanation of 
their peculiarities : why OTItf, VmHI '■> ending of nlilS ; H in Hi HEX pi. of "73 
and ^*£ — other nouns in preceding vocabularies — vocabulary with notes — 
exercise pp. 66, 67 

§ 35. The Cardinal Numbers: — vowels of first syllable of word for one — 
the Daghes in DTlw* — numeral for one an adj. — for two — parts of speech and 
gender of those from 3 to 10 — table of various card, numbers : those from 11 to 
19 how formed — the form VTv£J;? — the two perpetual Q'res — num. for 20 — 
those from 30 to 90 — position of those from 2 to 10 as it respects the noun — 
use of fem. du. of a cardinal — the ordinals 1 to 10 — above 10 — "fourth" — 
idiomatic expressions pp. 07-69 

§ 36. The Strong Verb with Suffixes : — those of the Inf. cstr. and Part, ex- 
cepting 1st Pers. — what the "verbal" suffix always denotes — the nominal — 
the verbal suffix with the Part. — vowels of the verb how affected by suffixes — 
the Inf. with the suffixes % Q2> J2 — that of the form 7tDp — table of the Peri, 
with suffixes — two ways of expressing the Accus. after a verb — suffixes gen- 
erally those of the noun — union vowel in the Perf . — exception — in the Impf . 
and Imp. — changes in the verb before receiving suffixes — changes produced by 
suffixes — the tone — verbs ending in a vowel — contracted forms — reflexive 
action how expressed — the Hi. with suffixes — the Qi. and Hithq. — Intrans.' 
verbs how different — vocabulary with notes — exercise pp. 69-71 

§ 37. Strong Verb with Suffixes (continued) : — those of the Impf. and Imp. 
in tabular form — forms ending in a vowel — final o of Impf. before TT, Q^, ?3 — 
of the Imp. — how union vowel is changed — 3 Demonstrative : its origin 
and how it affects forms — verbs having a in last syllable of Impf. and Imp. — 
the Hi. and Qi. Impf. — vocabulary with notes — exercise pp. 72, 73 

§38. Particles with Suffixes — Adverbs: — table of forms — in some cases 
typical, in others, including all — suffixes generally those of noun, but may have 



Vill TABLE OF CONTENTS. 

2 demonstrative — include the copula — excepting ^^ have a cstr. form — other 
adverbs having some of the nominal suffixes — vocabulary with notes — ■ 
exercise pp. 73, 74 

§ 39. Particles with Suffixes — Prepositions: — such Prepositions in tabular 
form — forms of ?£p — difference between ]"^ with and J"|JK (D1&) with suffixes 
— Q^ like former — like * l 7, ^ — an idiomatic phrase — pleonastic use of 7 — 
form of ~i$, *T£, 73? m pi- aiL d why — in poetry — other Prepositions actually 
taking a pi. form — vocabulary with notes — exercise pp. 75, 76 

§ 40. Degrees of Comparison : — no special forms in Hebrew — how the Corn- 
par, degree is expressed — other uses of ?£ — various ways in which the idea of 
superlativeness is expressed — vocabulary with notes — exercise pp. 76, 77 

§41. Weak Verbs — Verbs &$"£ ■' — distinction previously noted — verbs 
having & as their first radical — table of a ^"^ verb in the Impf. — their char- 
acteristic — list of these verbs conveniently arranged for remembering — two 
other verbs occasionally following this analogy — vocabulary and notes — 
exercise pp. 78, 79 

§ 42. Verbs y^ : — the inflected forms of such verb tabulated — 3 closing a 
preform, syllable and having a S e wa — when assimilation does not take place — 
other verbs of this class having a in Q. Impf. and still others, a or o — vowel of 
the sharpened syllable of the Ho. — } in the Q. of some verbs at the beginning of 
a syllable with S e wa — further change in the Inf. cstr. — the verb fip7 — \T\1 m 
the Q. Perf.,Inf. cstr. assimilating its final } before f| or another J — the final 
vowel of Imp. and Impf. — Inf. cstr. inflected as Segholate noun of the i class — 
vocabulary with notes — exercise pp. 79-81 

§ 43. Verbs *>"£ : — table of forms — the three classes of i"£ verbs — charac- 
teristic of first class — what takes place when the first radical is dropped hi Impf. 
and related forms — when it is retained — the eight verbs regularly dropping first 
radical — the three retaining * in the Imp. — in verbs originally *\"£ how 1 is 
treated when not initial : as a consonant, as a vowel — the Qi. and Qu. voices — 
frequent form of Imp. in these verbs — the verb te T7' 1 — 7^ — the second class of 
these verbs (originally V'S) — the analogy they follow — their inflection — how 
distinguished from verbs 3"£ — third class of verbs (orig., i"£) characterized (Q. 
and Hi.) — M. and Ho. voices — number of verbs in "fhe-class — vocabulary with 
notes — exercise pp. 81-84 

§ 44. Verbs )"^ : — table of forms — main irregularity — original and present 
form of the Q. Perf. — Inf. cstr. and Imp. — Impf. — Part. act. and pass. — Perf. 
and Part, of intrans. verbs — M. Perf. and Part. — Hi. Perf. and Part. — fern. pi. 
forms of Imp. — change before the affixes beginning with f\ and } — change of 
tone effects a change of vowels in some parts of Ni. — alternative form in Hi. 
Impf. and Imp. of H13 — tone m these verbs — intrans. verbs middle o — verbs 
having o in the Inf. and related forms — peculiarity of the Jussive and waw c. 
forms in Q. and Hi. of these verbs — vocabulary with notes — exercise. . pp.84-86 

§ 45. Verbs v '^ and the Intensive Voices: — table of forms — characteristic 
change — effect on some forms — how inflected in the Q. — in the other voices — 
words of this class most used — Q. and Hi. Impf. — probability as to the original 
middle radical — ^ as second radical in the Q. Perf. — the intensive voices of 
these verbs — how the intensive effect is secured — vocabulary with notes — 
exercise pp. 86,, 87 



TABLE OF CONTENTS. IX 

§ 46. Verbs y^ : — table of forms — chief irregularity — effect on the vowels 

— why e as stem vowel in Hi. Perf. — vowels of pref ormatives in open syllables 
and the original a — use of a helping vowel (Perf. o, Impf. e) — difference from 
verbs )"^ — basis of rule for Ho. — device for showing this class of verbs when 
there is no afformative — Jussive and waw c. forms — the intensive steins — their 
names — nouns from verbs yy (i'"9) and y^ — vocabulary with notes — 
exercise pp. 88-90 

§ 47. Verbs H"7 •' — table of forms — what these verbs really are — where the 
third radical appears — uniform principles of inflection : respecting ending of 
Perf. 3. s. m. and fern. ; the original i — disappearance of H — ending of Inf. cstrs. 

— of ground- form of Imp., of Impfs. and Parts. — i before the ending J-ft — 
the Hithq. voice — the Cohortative — vocabulary with notes — exercise . . pp. 90-92 

§ 48. Verbs JT'S (continued) .• — table of apocopated forms — a peculiarity of 
IT'S verbs respecting apocopation — forms apocopated and effect : Qi. Imp. — 
Hi. Imp. — Q. Impf. — M. and Qi. Impf. — Hi. Impf. — forms of Q. and Hi. if 
the first radical be a guttural — the verb ,TSO — apoc. forms of J"pn and [-pPl 

— other forms of the same — peculiarities of the verb nPftlJ — effect when 
apocopated — vocabulary with notes — exercise pp. 92-94 

§ 49. Verbs fc$"S : — table of forms — origin of peculiarity in the inflection — 
forms ending in ^ — Q. Imp. and Impf. — all other forms where fc$ ends a syl- 
lable : before afformatives beginning with a consonant ; beginning with a vowel 

— intransitive verbs — the Hithq. voice — further likeness to verbs ,T"S — vocab- 
ulary with notes — exercise ' pp. 94-96 

Paradigms, Exercises in Translation, and List of Words : — Table (in full) 
of the Strong verb StDp, PP- 98, 99. — of the Weak verb Dip, pp. 100, 101. 

— of the Weak verb i^D> P- 102. — exercises in translation (Hebrew into 
English), pp. 108-117. — list of words found in vocabularies, alphabetically 
arranged, pp. 118-120. — abstract of notes to vocabularies, pp. 121, 122. 

Appendix I. Additional exercises in translation, with vocabulary, pp. 123- 
130. 

Appendix II. (A) List of Synonyms. — (i?) Words (of similar sound or 
form) to be distinguished, pp. 131-134. 



PART I. — CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS. 



>>£<c 



§ 1. THE ALPHABET.* 



Form. 


Name. 


Equivalent. 


Numerical 
Value. 


X 


'Aleph 


> 


1 


a 


B6th 


bh, b 


2 


i 


i 
Gimel 


gh, g 


3 


i 


Daleth 


dh, d 


4 


n, n 


He 


h, h 


5 


i 


Waw 


w 


6 


i 


Zayin 


z 


7 


n 


Heth 


h 


8 


to 


Teth 


t 


9 


i 


Y6dh 


y 


10 


3 and *] 


Kaph 


kh,k 


20 


«? 


Lamedh 


l 


30 


£2 and Q 


Mem 


m 


40 


J and f 

D 


Nun 


n 


50 


Samekh 


s 


60 


9 


'Ayin 


c 


70 


5 and £"| 


Pe 


ph, p 


80 


' S and » 


Qadhe 


9 


90 


P 


Q6ph 


i 


100 


-i 


Res 


r 


200 


t^or ty 


Stn or Sin 


s, s (sh) 


300 


n 


Taw 


tli, t 


400 



a Kem. — The perpendicular stroke is used everywhere to mark the tone when 
it is on the penult. Kules for the vowel sounds are given in § 2. 



Z THE ALPHABET. 

1. The Hebrew alphabet consists of twenty-two consonants, and 
the language is written from right to left. 

2. Five letters have two characters each to represent them, the 
second being used when the letter is at the end of a word. Such 
secondary forms are called " final letters." A convenient mnemonic 
for the letters having final forms is Kam-n e -phag (pfij£3). 

3. Six letters have a two-fold pronunciation, a hard and a soft ; 
the former when a dot is found in them (3 == b, 3 = bh). These 
letters are commonly known as the B e -gliadli-~k e -pliath (ft£3ft33) 
letters. 

4. The letter ft (h) is pronounced like ch in loch. J$, represented 
by a smooth breathing, is silent like the h in hour, ft, at the end 
of a word, is silent, being used simply as an accompaniment and 
sign of the preceding vowel. It generally occurs as a final letter in 
words whose third radical (ft , h , *]) does not appear. When it 
has consonantal value a dot is placed in it (ft). The sound of J, 
represented by a rough breathing, is scarcely to be distinguished in 
common usage from that 'of $. a |Vj (c) is pronounced much as ts 
would be in the same position. The letter ft has a pronunciation 
similar to that of 3, but the sound is formed further back in the 
mouth. The same is true of J^ as compared with ft. 

5. The Hebrew letters are divided, according to the organs of 
speech used in pronouncing them, into five classes : Gutturals 

CS, ft, ft, K)5 Palatals ( ( ft, 3, \ J); Linguals (ft, J, b, D, ft)', 
Dentals or Sibilants (\£?, \^, JJ, Q, *) ; and Labials (£, fo, *|, 2). 

6. Letters used as prefixes or suffixes in the formation and inflec- 
tion of words are called "serviles." They are ft, to, ^?, J, £), 7), 3? 
% I ft, 3, & (nm. 3^31, fttofo JJT& *> "Ethan," "Moses," and 
(^) "Caleb"). The other letters of a word are called "radicals." 

Exercise. — & 3? 3, 3? 3, 1 1 3? ft? ft, ft, ft ft, ft, ft, ft, ft, 

\ i, ], ], a, a bi a d, a, % & f> *> s, to, to ; am it, 

nn& 33, a^to, "jtonft, Dip, rm naa a^n- 

d, h, z, r, bh, h, t, k, s, s, s, _L ? 9, _L ? ph, q, t ; 'm, lbn, 
e m ? km, r f , rQ, swbh, bmdhbr, Vph, mspdh, ythr, gdhl, 
e jn, 3 vq, kwkhbhym, nws. 

Originally one of the two sounds of ^ approached that of Jf ; tne other that 
of g with a slight r sound before it ( r g). The word nflg, 'Azzdh, was trans- 
literated by the LXX. as rd£a : Gen. x. 19. 



THE VOWELS. 



§ 2. THE VOWELS. 



I. From the three primary vowel sounds, a, i, u (pronounced ah, 
ee, oo), the remaining vowels arose. Their various modifications, 
taking place in Hebrew, are shown in the following table. A vowel 
having no mark above it represents its short sound. 



From a came 


From i came 


From u came 


a (= a + a) 


t (=i + i or i + y) 


u (= u + n or u -f ty) 


a (lengthened "by tone) 


e (= a + i or a + y) 


6 (= a + u or a + w) 


e (see next table) 


e (heightened by tone) 


o (heightened by tone) 


e (see next table) 


e (by deflection or the 


o (by deflection) 


i (by thinning) 


shortening of e) 


6 (shorter form) 


a (shorter form) 


e (shorter form) 


€ (shortest form) 


e (shortest form) 


e (shortest form) 





2. Of these vowels those marked with the circumflex accent 
(a, i, e, u, 6), being long either by nature or contraction, are no longer 
changeable. The rest are subject to the changes noted. 

3- 1 CSp q:am. 2 H^ rnahj meh, moh. 3 ^ hi, lo, *fo m h me - 
Originally the Hebrew had no characters to represent the vowel 
sounds. There were four weak consonants, however, which served 
the purpose to a limited extent (% *\, J^, J$), and are generally known 
as "vowel letters/"' ^ stood for any vowel, but generally repre- 
sented the a sound in the midst of a word. 1 Jf at the end of a word 
stood for any vowel sound except i and u 2 ; while *] represented u or 
o, and * i or e either in the midst or at the end of a word. 3 These 
characters being found ambiguous and insufficient by later Jewish 
scholars, a system of vocalization was invented (a.d. 600-800) for 
the purpose of fixing and preserving the traditional pronunciation. 
On introducing this change the use of the so-called vowel letters was 
not discarded, nor the consonantal text disturbed. The new system 
was simply combined, as far as possible, with the old. A vowel 
represented both by a vowel letter and one of the new characters 
was said to be fully, by the latter only, defectively written. The 
characters adopted, with their names, sounds, and quantity, were as 
follows (see § 1. r.) : — 



THE VOWELS. 



Class. 


CHARACTER. 


Name. 


Sound. 


Quantity. 


A 


T 


Qainec 


a in father 


a or a 
a 




■=- 


Pathah 


a in fat 


a 




- 


Hateph-pathah. 


" " (but shorter) 


a 




— 


S*wa 


e in below 


e 


I 


-r- 


Hireq 


i in pin 


i and (sometimes) £ 




H _ 


" 


i in ravine 


i 




— 


Qere 


e in prey 


e and (sometimes) e 




1 


u 


u u 


e 




- 


S e gliol 


e in met 


e 




*i 


" 


e in there 


e 




— 


Hateph-s e ghol 


e in met (but shorter) 


e 




— 


S e wa 


e in below 


e 


U 


1 


Sfireq 


it in true 


u and (rarely) u 




— 


Qibbug 


u in put 


u and (often) u 




i 


Holem 


o in note 


5 and (often) 6 




i 


u 


" « 


6 and (rarely) 6 




— 


Qamec-hatuph 


o in on 







TT 


Hateph-qamec, 


" " (but shorter) 


6 




— 


S e wa 


e in below 


e 



Rem. 1. ■— The character e will be used for *-L only. By consulting the 
former table it will be observed that it is represented as coming from a (others 
say, ay). It is found in such combinations as PWvll g e -le-nah, 'TJ'HD'l 
d e -bhd-re-khd. The S e ghol in the word ft'jp (= *h>T) yigh-leh, is really equiva- 
lent to it ; but it will be found sufficient for practical purposes to represent all 
other forms of S e ghol by e, including two other forms from a, — as that in the first 
syllable of ^D (from Tib)?) me-lek, and of DDT yedh-khem, compounded of 
T and DD> — as weu as the form from i or e. 

TV , , 

Rem. 2. — The character — , it will be seen, stands both for Qamec and Qamec,- 
hatuph. Many times they are distinguishable only after one has become familiar 
with the derivation of words. In general, it may be said that the sign T - 
= o only when the vowel concerned was originally o. The following rules cover 
most of the cases of its occurrence. The sign — = o (1) in a toneless closed 
syllable (flftDn hokh-mah) ; (2) before a guttural with — , or before another o 

T : T 

OlDVn ho-'o-madh, Tlft^H ho-'om-dhu) excepting the article ; (3) in the two 



THE VOWELS. b 

abnormal plural forms Q^HP (qo-dha-sim), D*ur**Yw' (so-rd-Sim). In No. •". 

TllT ■ T IT 

_ (o) is used for _ (6), for which, in turn, : (_f_) might have been expected! 
There is some degree of ambiguity, it will be noticed, attaching to several other 

characters (_1 _1_ _[_ ) ; but it will practically disappear when the laws. 

of the syllable come to be understood. 

4. > 13 U. 2 IS % ph hoq, ji& crTn. 3 ) = wo, not o. 4 Hi,"T : 
T e -hd-wah. 5 mH*. 8 X3\B ***«*- 7i "Htt? sfrdliedh, ^SD *o-i^6s; 
The vowel signs, except in a few cases,, are written directly under 
the consonants to w r hich they belong and after which they are: pro- 
nounced. 1 Sureq is always found in the bosom of *] (^). The same' 
is true of Qamec or S e wa with a final Kaph (*TT, *?]). H6lem when 
accompanied by \ as a vowel letter, should be found over its right 
side ; when without \ it is placed over the left of the letter with 
which it is pronounced, or over the right of the following letter. 2 
When 1 is a consonant and H6lem is used with, it, it should be 
placed over its left side. 3 The character ^ will be 6-w if the pre- 
ceding consonant have no other vowel and *[ — being used as a 
consonant — have a vowel under it. 4 In some texts, wdien ^ is a 
consonant and H6lem is used just before it, it is placed over the left 
of the preceding letter to which it really belongs. 5 TVith the letters 
tt?> ^S a defectively written Hdlem may coincide with the dot 
("diacritical point ") of these letters respectively. It is then 
dropped, the one point answering both purposes. 6 When the vowel 
in this form is used in connection with these letters and does not 
coincide with the diacritical point, it is placed over the right or left 
limb, as may be required. 7 Still another exception will be found to 
the rule that vowels are placed under the consonants after which 
they are pronounced in Pathah furtive (§5). 

5 - 1 ^HK 'A-dhd-nay, C'H^H 'E-16-lnm, *^H W 1 - Tlie 

t ~: • ••■: • t: 

sign — (simple S e wa), it will be observed, is common to the 
three principal vowel sounds. Each class of vowels has also a 
Hateph, otherwise known as "composite S e wa," being compounded 
of a simple S e wa and one of the vowels — , — , — . The Hatephs 
are chiefly used, instead of simple S e wa, with guttural letters, 

a The Hatephs (t : , - : only) are found with other letters than gutturals : (1) 
when the same consonant is written twice in the midst of a word, and the first 
would naturally receive a vocal S e wa; (2) sometimes with ^ and ^j after long 
vowels and just before the tone ; (3) with the sibilants directly after the con- 
junction 1 ; (4) occasionally after i, a, o (Baer, Gen. xxxii. 18) under a sibilant, 
liquid or p. Hateph-qamec. when used with other letters than gutturals, is 
chiefly found with the sibilants or the emphatic consonants *£, p. 



6 



THE SYLLABLE. 



especially in the first and second syllables before the tone, to give 
them a more distinct vocal sonnd and facilitate their pronunciation. 1 



fHK 'a-dhon, to. lord. ^^ A-dho- 
nay, Lord. 

"i^ 1 adv. or. 

niS& 'E-16-aft, m. God ; pi. fTfbx 

'E-lo-him. 
□^ (interrog. and optat. particle) if, 

or; "^ conj. that, when, because. 

OK""^ out, unless, except. 
nSl 2 ("Tlfc$) prep, with; also sign of 

definite accus. 
V'ln 3 adv- without, on the street, 
rnpf 4 ha-lah, he weak, sick, v^pf t a 

T t • t: 

ho-li, to. sickness. 



pH 5 to. statute; pZ. D^pH huq-qim. 
HpH huq-qah,f. statute. 

b'D ° ("73 kpl) to. every, all, whole ; 
«cZv. wholly. 

I&fcp 7 m e -odh, to. force ; acZv. very, 
exceedingly. 

7K¥ 8 /• nock (of sheep or goats). 

*Ot? 9 sa-ni\ hate. n*Uti?t sm-'«/i, 
hate. 

Tlt£? 10 Sa-dhadh, he strong, to deso- 
late, ""p^ * to. force, violence. 

tTSn 11 td-phas, seize, hold, set (in), 
overlay with. 



1 Its sound is that of the first letter cf or. 2 Its last letter is equivalent to the 
last two of with. 3 Pronounced nearly like the pi. of coot. 4 Suggests cholera, 
from x oA V' 5 Has nearly the sound of Coke, the famous English jurist. 6 Cor- 
responds partly in pronunciation with whole. ' Approaches in sound and sense 
my oath. 8 Sheep are not found in the frigid zone. 9 Begins with a hissing 
letter. 10 Is the root of ^*£? Sad-day, a title of God : Gen. xvii. 1. n Associate 
with topaz often set in gold. 

Exercise. — 'e-meth, bath, ben, dam, d e -muth, liu', 
ha-16m, tobh, hoq, huq-qim, heq, dor, sir, yes, yom, kaph, 
min, e im, Qur, yo'o-madh, le-kha. 

Rem. — In this exercise the circumflex accent represents a fully written vowel 
in Hebrew. 



§ 3. THE SYLLABLE. 



1. ipn, *\% 'e-leph. 2 1X» m*-6dh. »^ y^ov, Q^fl 

ha-lom. A Hebrew word has as many syllables as there are full 
vowels, the S e was and Pathah furtive (§ 5) not being regarded as such. 1 
Every syllable begins with a consonant, and may begin with two. 2 
If a syllable begin with two consonants, the first will have under it 
a simple or composite S e wa — the latter with gutturals — to aid in 
the pronunciation. 3 Simple S e wa in this place is said to be "vocal" 



a The sign * attached to a word indicates that it is used less than fifty times, 
the sign t that it is used less than twenty-five times, in the Bible. 



THE SYLLABLE. 7 

to distinguish it from silent S e wa, which, is found at the end of a 
syllable only and is not sounded. Vocal S e wa is always found and 
only found under the first of two consonants — other than a guttural 
— that begin a syllable. 

Rem. 1. — The conjunction } when pointed with a dot in its bosom {*]) is the 
sole exception to the rule that every syllable begins with a consonant. 

Rem. 2. — An exception to the rule for vocal S e wa is the numeral VT£J two 
(for ''JHt^fcOj Gen. iv - 19, where the S e wa is silent. 

2 - ^aDK 2 T[bf2 malk - 3 nPlttt? sim-hah, ^SJlitj; sa-ma-nil. 

4 ^ft*£? sa-makh, r)^^ dalt (original form of J B |p ,s ?J de-leth). 

5 T\^$T\ re-sltJi (contracted from rWKH r^e-slth). A syllable 

may end either with a vowel or a consonant. 1 Only a final syllable 
can end with two consonants, and the last one, if sounded, must 
be a strong letter (one of the B e -ghadh-k e -phatli or p, J^). 2 An 
audible vowelless consonant, and generally $, ending a syllable — 
o,ther than the final — is provided with a silent S e wa. 3 The same 
is true of final Kaph and of each of two audible consonants ending 
a word. 4 * "Audible" consonants are so named to distinguish them 
from the vowel letters (% \ Jf , J$) which, as already noted, generally 
become silent after homogeneous vowel sounds. 5 

3. lta p yadh, HfiJ3\tf sim-hah, Q^ttJ sin-na-yim. 2 ffl, fig, 

FPX 'e-leph, )£. 3 ^?2 nia-yim, *Zf2D sa-makh. 4 HlfcX 'im-rah, 

D^n ha-kham. A syllable ending in a consonant is said to be shut; 

T T 

doubly shut if that consonant be immediately followed by another 
consonant in the same word ; sharpened, if these two consonants 
are the same letter repeated (seldom), or the same letter doubled 
by a dot in it, known as Daghes forte (§ 4). 1 A syllable ending in 
a vowel — as also fj, and ^ except in certain verbs whose first 
root letter it is — is said to be open. 2 The vowel of an open 
syllable must be long unless it have the tone, and a toneless syllable 
with a long vowel is open. 36 The vowel of a shut syllable must 

a There are a few instances where a silent S e wa stands under a single final 
consonant ; but they are mostly those where one of the original consonants has 
been dropped : F\R for y)}$. In Baer's text the final f) of the 2d sing. fern. per f. 
of verbs whose last root letter is ^ or f"J has it. 

6 The only open syllables having short vowels, even with the tone, are those 
which were originally doubly closed and have been opened by means of a short 
helping vowel (Tw\ de-leth, from an original FlT^T dalt) and the verbal suffix 
M_ d-ni. 



8 THE SYLLABLE. 

be short unless it have the tone, and a toneless syllable with a short 
vowel is shut. 4 

4. 1 Q^T* 1 yedh-Mem (your hand), mjJJ na-a-rah. Besides 
open and shut syllables, there is what is known as the half- 
open, or intermediate, syllable." It has a short, toneless vowel, 
and its final consonant a S e wa, simple or composite. This S e wa is 
neither silent nor vocal, though approaching the latter, and is called 
medial. It need not be confounded with vocal S e wa, since the syl- 
lable which it (partly) closes has a short, toneless vowel. And 
when followed by the B e ghadhk e phath letters, it need not be con- 
founded with a silent S e wa, since the dot (Daghes lene, § 4. 1) which 
is found in these letters when following a silent S e wa is omitted 
after a medial one. 1 

Rem. — A shut final syllable, with the tone, may have any vowel (i is found 
only in 7ft, Q^, Q^, and certain apocopated verbal forms) ; a shut penultimate 
syllable, with the tone, has only a, e, and a, e, o. In a toneless sharpened 
syllable only the vowels a, i, u can stand. 

5- 1 ,H^3' The principal tone in Hebrew words must be on 
one of the last two syllables, and is generally found on the last 
syllable. 6 In this book, as heretofore, whenever the tone syllable 
is not final it will be indicated by a perpendicular line over the 
penult. 1 

6. 1 nna'^ slie rejoiced. 2 Q3^25 your eyes. 3 HO^PI sne 

T : ,T v •• ,•• 7 : ,T 

was wise, nfiSH wisdom. 4 ^vHH the sickness. Methegh 

t : t -7: |V 

(meaning bridle) is a small perpendicular line placed beneath a 
word, usually on the left of a vowel, to indicate a kind of lighter, 
secondary tone. 1 It is found (1) with the second syllable before 
the tone, if open; or on the third or fourth open syllable, if the 
second be shut 2 ; (2) with a long vowel just before a pretonic vocal 
S e wa (useful for distinguishing Qamec from Qamec-hatuph in this 

° Half- open syllables arise from the dropping of vowels through inflectional 
and other changes ; the preference of gutturals for the Hatephs ; the omission 
of Daghes forte, as with the article and *\ copulative ; and the composition of 
words with particles or fragments of words affixed or prefixed, though not y 
with the infinitive. 

6 Words taking the tone on the penult are for the most part : (1) those whose 
last syllable has simply a helping vowel ; (2) those having the local ending JT,_, 
meaning towards or into a place ; (3) those having certain light verbal and 
nominal suffixes ; (4) those whose tone has been changed through the influence 
of 1 consecutive (§ 18) or the Pause (§ 6) ; (5) those in which the tone syllable, 
if final, would be immediately followed by another tone syllable. 



THE SYLLABLE. 



position) 8 ', with any vowel before composite S e wa 4 ; and (3) in 
numerous other cases when it is desired to indicate the distinct 
pronunciation of a vowel sound. The conjunction t] and is not 
subject to the first and second of these rules. 



FH>j| 1 m. ox ; pi. thousand. 

7V3 2 (cstr. ITS) m. house ; pi. Q^JTIlS 

battim. a 
v£3 3 recompense, perfect, 7fc3 c. 

- T T T 

camel. 
twh /• door (which swings). 
DDPI 4 be wise. DDPI «<#• wise - 

TO?I1 4 /• wisdom. 
Di^n 5 m - dream. 
•"l^ 5 m. river, (mostly) the Nile. 
HT stretch, throw out, praise. *"p /. 

T T T 

hand (shut) . rHln * /• praise. 
jrp /. hand (open), palm, sole (of 
foot) ; du. D^SS- 



D^b (csfr*. "tt) m. water. 
JO part, come ! now! pray ! 

T 

*' support, intrans. lean. 



p3J (C6-^-. p^) /. eye, fountain ; c?u. 

dts ; pj. rnr§- 

H§ (cstr. *£) m. mouth ; ,pZ. £^£, fll'S- 

$8*1 m. head; pi. U^tSC\ (for 

D^K"])- \\0tXl adj. foremost, 

former, iT^^*"! /- beginning, first, 

former. 

Plfcti? 7 rejoice, Hnttti? /• joy. 

- T T : • 

)$ c, tooth ; du. D^ttf- 



1 The letter tf has the form of a bullock's head, especially in Phoenician. 
Mn. "cattle on a thousand hills" : Ps. 1. 10. 2 Good mnemonics for this and 
most of the other words of this list will be the respective letters of the alphabet 
2i 1 % \ D> fa & Vi S? *li ttf- Tli e form of the letter as well as its sound is 
to be especially noted in each case. 3 The camel w r as so called because so com- 
plete and perfect an animal. 4 The wisdom literature of the Bible is often called 
the hokhmah literature. 5 Suggests, though somewhat remotely, hal-luvination. 
6 Suggests y e oar. ' Put here because it sounds like Tj^D ', j°y supports. 

Exercise. — e im, 'eth, 16, hug yhowah, 'Elohim, halah, 

kathabhta, yaronnu, yest, m e> 6clli, wayyar', ma^a'tha, 
dibber, liuqqim, simhah, seblia', 'aleklia, na'ar, na'arah, 
samayim, dablirah, kullo, taplias, malkhehem, ulyamim, 
sadkadh, ka'adkam, 'enekkem, 'abkrakam, sane', kan- 
pkekem. 

Rem. — The quantity of a vowel is not always given where, from foregoing 
principles, it should be known. The exercise will be useful also for placing the 
S e was and Methegh, and distinguishing the half-open or medial syllable. The 
same letter repeated indicates a sharpened syllable. 



a The Daghes forte in the second letter of DTD is characteristic (§ 4. 2) and 

• IT 

exceptional. Others would write the word batim, making the Daghes a Daghes 
lene, which, however, would be equally abnormal (§ 4. 1). 



10 OTHER CHARACTERS. 

§ 4. OTHER CHARACTERS USED WITH THE HEBREW TEXT. 

!• 1 n5?1^3- 2 25ll wisdom, fiftJH lier wisdom. Daghes 
lene is the name given to a point already referred to (§ 1), which is 
put in the B e ghadlik e phath letters to harden them. a It is used when- 
ever these letters do not immediately follow a vowel, a vocal or 
composite S e wa, or a half-open syllable ; in short, the least vowel 
sound. 1 The dot sometimes found in final ^] (§ 1. 4), a few times 
also with ^ (Gen. xliii. 26; Lev. xxiii. 17; Job xxxiii. 21; Ezra 
viii. 18), giving them consonantal power, is properly a Daghes lene, 
although it is commonly called Mappiq. 2 

Rem. — In the case of a disjunctive accent on the preceding word (§ 7), or 
any other sufficient pause just before them, like the end of a chapter, section, 
or verse, these letters cannot he said to follow immediately a vowel sound. 

2. 2 Except S'TD (§ 3 foot-note). 2s n3^ kikkar, not kikhkhar. 
Daghes forte is a dot of the same kind placed in letters — the 
B e ghadlik e phath included — which are to be doubled in pronunciation. 6 
It is easily distinguished from Daghes lene in that it mostly imme- 
diately follows a full, though a short, vowel. 1 When it is used with 
the B e ghadlik e phath letters, it hardens as well as doubles them. 2 

Eem. — Daghes forte is called compensative when it doubles the same con- 
sonant or assimilates two that are unlike ; characteristic when it characterizes a 
grammatical form, whether the doubling be original or inflectional ; conjunctive 
when it is placed in the first letter of a word for the purpose of johiing it to the 
last vowel of a preceding word ; emphatic when it is used to give strength to the 
tone syllable (mostly the penult) ; firmative when it is used with liquids to pre- 
vent a too slight pronunciation of the preceding vowel ; separative when it is 
used in a letter having a vocal S e wa in order to render the latter more audible. 
Cases will be noted under each head as they may occur. 

3- 1 S* , ^ t ^ t° waters, not Q^^, with a Daghes forte firmative 

■ ,7 T • ,7 T 

(see preceding note). Raphe (H^l soft) is a horizontal line placed 
over a letter. It was originally intended for every letter destitute 

a In Baer's text the rule is usually followed that a Daghes lene should be put 
in every consonant after a guttural with a silent S°wa, as also in one which, 
beginning a word, is the same as that with which the word next preceding ends. 
The principle, however, has not been generally accepted. 

6 Daghes forte is omitted from a final vowelless consonant (except J^, riflj); 
often from certain consonants — mostly p, 3, £> 7, \ 1, and the sibilants — in 
the middle of a word with only a vocal S e wa under them ; from the gutturals 
(generally including "1), in some of which the Daghes is then implied (possible in 
K, ", frequent in f], |f)> or compensation takes place by heightening the pre- 
ceding vowel (§ 5). 



OTHER CHARACTERS. 11 

of the kind of hardness indicated by a Daghes (or Mappiq). At 
present, however, it is principally used to show that the dot has 
been intentionally omitted. 1 

4. 1 QX"^3> ™^8> s3) m ]t$- Maqqeph is a horizontal line 
placed between words, closely related in sense, in order to make 
them one word as it respects pronunciation and tone. 1 

5 - ^w'S"^ il] ( tlie ) beginning. Q c re and Knliibli. In the 
asual Hebrew text attention is called to different readings by means 
of a small circle placed over a word. 1 The suggested reading is 
found at the bottom of the page. The vowels of the word placed 
there, however, are used with the original ivord still found in the 
text. This original word is called the K e thtbh, i.e., what is written. 
The word at the bottom of the page, the Q e re, i.e., what is (suggested 
to be) read. The circle is also used to call attention to any critical 
remarks made in the margin. In the case of a few words of very 
frequent occurrence, the word in the margin — whose vowels have 
been used with a word in the text — has been omitted. This is 
called a perpetual Q e re. a 

6. 1 ^p^2j between thee. The second i is superfluous. Special 
clots (Panda extraordinaria) are found above certain words in fifteen 
passages (ten in the Pent., as in Gen. xvi. 5). 1 In some cases they 
indicate that the letter or letters of a word over which they stand 
are to be omitted ; in others, their meaning is no longer clear. 

7. The end of a verse is marked in the Hebrew Bible by two 
dots (♦) called Soph Pasuq (i.e., end of the verse). 



^ISS 1 /- circuit, plain, talent, loaf. 
HD3 2 cover. Hp3 (or 822) m - st0 °l> 

throne. 
Dlt3 3 write. 

- T 

Kip 4 call, read, proclaim. 



rn^ 5 (and jn£) meet. iTnp*/- city 

XSI c soften, mitigate, heal. 

T T 

n2*1* 7 sink down, (causative) let 

sink, let go. 
P'tl? m. sackcloth. 



TlT 

1 P. *"H2 C"D) to go around. The meanings of the noun are all closely 
related to this idea. It suggests car. 2 Suggests case, in-case. The throne 

a The examples of perpetual Q e re are (1) KIP! (hi Pent, only), for which fc^i! 
is read (as in Gen. ii. 12) ; (2) HlITi f° r which ^^ is read, unless the two 
words are found together, when the vowels of QYl^tf are given to the former 
as far as applicahle (as in Gen. ii. 4) ; (3) *|^3 (in Pent, only as feminine), 
for which PH9J is read (as in Gen. xxiv. 14) ; (4) sbwTV, for which D^ttfVV 
is read (as in Josh. x. 1) ; (5) *-|2tT '*£*, for which ■^w^ is read (as in Gen. 
xxx. 18) ; and apparently (6) the numerals Q^, Q WiTi for which *y& and VV£J 
are respectively read (as in Ex. xxviii. 21). 



12 GUTTURALS AND QUIESCENT LETTERS. 

was so called probably from its canopy. 3 Mn. KHhibh. 4 Mn. Q e re. 5 To be 
associated with the preceding, whose form it often takes. 6 Mn. Raphe. " Mn. 
"Rephaim" (r e phd'im, ir. pi. of Jl£H), tne stretched out, lifeless (in Sheol). 

Exercise. — bayit, kap, peh, gamal, kol, kol, 'aclon, 
hakam, 'et, 'ak, mispat, btok, helqka, yest ? mamleket, 
ykatteb, tdabber, mdubbar, sabbat, wayyinnagpu, lipne, 
hit tah ; lamayim. 

Rem. — The pupil is expected to determine for himself, in this exercise, the 
quantity of some of the vowels, where S e wa is required, and whether a B e ghadhk e - 
phath letter should be hard or aspirated. 



§ 5. THE GUTTURALS AND (JUIESCENT LETTERS. 

1. 1 yfihri ( f o r ^HH) tl ™ darkness. 2 F^KPl not J^Xil, 
*?H5 not ^TTQ, *!p2 not *TT^3. Of the guttural letters (JJ, |-|> 

Hj X)> S ^presents a sound similar to that of {$, but firmer; and so 
Pi with respect to f]. The last two letters are stronger gutturals than 
the former two. All are' peculiar, first, in that they cannot be doubled 
by receiving a Daghes forte. It may be implied, however, i.e., simply 
left out without producing any change in the word. This occurs 
often with j™|, J°\, less often with J}, and sometimes with J^. 1 When 
Daghes forte would naturally be called for in these letters and it 
is not implied, there is compensation made for the omission. The 
short vowel preceding the guttural is heightened (a to a, i to e, 
u to 6). In other words, such vowels come to stand in an open, 
instead of a sharpened, syllable, and are accordingly changed to the 
corresponding tone long vowel. 2 

2. ^ot *-\feis:, i»»n ^t n»»i nt^isn (ho-omadh). 2 mt 

Plft'tt? but n£'tt?> not fil^X but nl^X- A second peculiarity 

? T ~ T v: - v: 

of the gutturals (JJ, f], j?J) is that they prefer the a class of vowels 
about them and require — or — when final. Hence (a), before 
these gutturals not final, i and u are generally changed to e and o, 
and, less frequently, after them. 1 (b) Any short vowel but _ with 
these gutturals when final is changed to — . And (c) after any long 
vowel with a final guttural except _ the vowel — steals in (Pathah 
furtive), to be sounded before the guttural. Such Pathah cannot 
take the tone, and, of course, disappears when additions are made 
to the word. 2 



GUTTURALS AND QUIESCENT LETTERS. 13 

3. i Dlbo; nosi not iisjj 2Not di^D3 but Qi^D3 in 

a dream. A third peculiarity of gutturals is that they require in 
place of a simple S e wa (vocal) a composite one, chiefly Pathah. 
They may take a simple S e wa silent ; but here too, in many cases, a 
Hateph is preferred. If a Hateph be taken in place of a silent S e wa, 
it will be homogeneous with the preceding short vowel (— corre- 
sponding to _, — to — , — to _, i.e., o), and the syllable in which 
it stands will be half open. 1 On the same principle, if a letter pre- 
ceding a Hateph is to be supplied with a vowel, it will take a short 
one corresponding with the Hateph. 2 From this fact is derived the 
rule found in some grammars that a guttural letter points itself and 
the letter next preceding, and vice versa. For the pointing of a 
consonant before a guttural with o, see § 2. 3. r. 2. 

4- 'DK- 2 K2- 3 biXS to eat. 4 Tl&iT or TISP I have 

T V: |V • T T • T T 

gone forth. The letter ^ has consonantal power (and is treated 
as a guttural) only at the beginning of a syllable. 1 At the end of 
a syllable 2 (except in certain verbs whose first letter is a guttural 
and when protected by a Hateph in a half-open syllable 3 ) it 
coalesces with the vowel next preceding, making it long and the 
syllable an open one. Occasionally the ^ in such cases disappears 
entirely. 4 

Rem. 1. — ^ may also lose its power as a consonant when following another 
consonant with vocal S e wa or a Hateph, merging them in its own or a homo- 
geneous long vowel, in which it then itself quiesces after that consonant 

(svjwi heads for d^*n, ib*6 for nb*6 or nbab, h^bvb for dt6*6, 

T I- t -: I- v 

Rem. 2. — A final ^ following a letter having silent S e wa is said to be otiant, 
and is ignored in pronunciation (&$tppJ ^tO- 

5. ^S^n not tt?S^n tlie head 5 rtDH3 slie blessed. The 

t - t -: i" 

letter ^ approaches the gutturals in some of its peculiarities. It 
takes Daghes forte only exceptionally, compensation being almost 
exclusively by heightening the preceding vowel ; prefers the vowel 
a about it, especially before it; and sometimes takes a Hateph 
pathah instead of a simple vocal S e wa. 1 

6. 1 y\ icaw; *P3&!2£ Q0 7id(y)iv his flocks, ^Jfc$lt cvna-y my flocks; 
^13 go-y nation; *\] Ziw one of the Hebrew months ; ^^H h&lu-y? 
pass. part, of H^fl. It has already been noted (§ 2) that *) and ^ 

T T 

ordinarily lose their value as consonants at the end of a syllable, 
after homogeneous vowel sounds (*] becoming } and \ 1 becoming 
^— , ^— , ^— ), and that with the heterogeneous a vowel they often 
unite to form diphthongal long vowels (^ with a becoming 6, ^ with 



14 CHANGES IN VOWELS. 

a becoming e). Occasionally, however, these characters retain at 
the end of a syllable their consonantal power after a, as they always 
do after other heterogeneous vowels. 1 



*%$> speak. ^jQjjj (i)i m. word. 

rrpx /■ word.' 

7X3 2 redeem. 
D^tfiPf) ™- sin. n^t^n /• sin. 



4 ??i. darkness. 
N^ 5 go forth, rise (of the sun) . K5M& 

m. going-forth, utterance. 
IfcV 6 stand, stand out, remain, stand 

still. *1N*!$ m. pillar. 






1 Erom the same root Emir (or Ameer), i.e. speaker, commander. 2 Cf. Gaol. 
8 May be associated with hate. 4 Cf. rDt27 forget, i.e., have darkness of memory. 
5 Yachts — go forth. 6 Might link its second meaning with its second syllable. 

Exercise. — ^R-|, l-ftp, n$dfo Dni : l2|, J^A liSX. 

Dhn abrts, ritiv, nbte rp&ton. m'm ss&, ■sns 

: : : v : t • : ■ t | •• • 

Tp_a nasj, i£?>?, i»? : > "!»?n> (§ 3 - K - 2) iT M'> "!&?3< 

Eem. — In this exercise each word requires correction. Initial fc$ in the pre- 
tone prefers » s ; at a distance from the tone, generally - : (though not in DTDR)- 



§ 6. CHANGES IN VOWELS. 

1. The, several causes working to produce vowel changes are 
changes in the character of a syllable ; the contact of a vowel with a 
different consonant or another vowel ; the shortening or lengthening 
of a word and the consequent shifting of the tone. These causes 
do not act independently of one another, but one change is likely to 
carry with it one or more of the others. 

changes in Hebrew are possible within the limits already stated 
(§2), the vowels represented by a, e, i, u, 6, being immutable under 
any circumstances. They are generally distinguishable by being 
fully written. Other immutable vowels are : (a) such as are made 
long by way of compensation before a guttural or ^j 1 (b) a short 
vowel before a guttural in which Daghes forte is implied ; 2 and (c) 
a short vowel in a doubly closed or sharpened syllable ; 3 the rule, in 
each of these cases, holding good as long as the conditions are 
unaltered. 



CHANGES IX VOWELS. 15 

3. ^ but D5T.; h'2 but -^3; |# but (generally) -j#. 
2 5*n ^ llt S^pH- I R addition to the principles already given under 
the head of the syllable (§ 3. 3. 4), it may be said that a vowel 
which has been made long by the tone, whether in an open or a shut 
syllable, will be changed to its own short form, or deflected to some 
homogeneous short vowel, if that syllable becomes a toneless shut, 
or loosely shut, syllable (a becoming a or e, e becoming e or ?', 
sometimes a ; o becoming o, and rarely v.). 1 If the change be to a 
sharpened syllable, there is a corresponding reduction of the vowel 
(e to I, and b generally to u). 2 

4. ^-Q^ cstr. of *Qn, but pL, U^Sl 5 ^fck from ^S; 
r*Tp from'^-p; ^ft from **£?£] 'Ha *Ha instead of 
TTrj3 he was blessed, ^TQ he blessed. 2 ^^ not $^\ If a shut 
syllable become open by the loss of its final consonant (including 
the gutturals and *■), § 5. 1. 5), either by its being joined to the follow- 
ing syllable, 1 or, being a quiescent letter (% ], J$), by losing its con- 
sonantal quality and coalescing with the preceding vowel, its vowel 
is lengthened — *or deflected — (a to a, e, i and e to e, u and o to o). 2 

Rem. — The effect may here he noted which is produced on vowels by what is 
known as the Pause; i.e., some one of the heavy disjunctive accents (§7) which, 
for rhythmical and liturgical purposes, was put at the end of a sentence or main 
division of it. A vowel under such an accent is said to he in Pause. The effect 
is to heighten a short vowel to its corresponding tone long (— , however, some- 
times becomes--, and vice versa) ; restore an original rowel ( , J_, sometimes 

becoming _ QaniecJ ; or a dropped vowel (_ before TT becoming -1) ; giving it, 
in each case, the form required by the tone ; and, frequently, to shift the tone, 
mostly from the ultimate to the penultimate syllable, but sometimes the reverse. 

o- ' btei <*&■■ ^£|, pL d^»|; nana ^ nan?; annjas 

ye have spoken. If the tone of a word be carried forward one 
syllable or become weakened (by the construct state or otherwise), 
a changeable vowel standing before it will be volatilized (become 
vocal or medial S e wa) or be dropped (leaving silent S e wa), according 
to the nature of the syllable that may result. 1 

Rem. — There is an important distinction between nouns and verbs in this 
respect. Verbs generally volatilize «, e, o, in the last syllable, when the tone is 
moved forward a place ; nouns, a and e in the penultimate syllable (mft'J? she 
stood, from -f££ ; but D'H^'I words, from * m Oft)- On D^Sfcll c/. § 31. 'l'.R. 4. 

6 - ^a^nan your words, QIT^fia their camels. If the tone 
be carried forward two places, of two changeable vowels coming 
before it, the one nearest to it will be dropped; while the other, 
now standing in a (loosely) shut syllable at a distance from it, will 
be correspondingly shortened or thinned (a often being changed to i). 1 



16 



THE ACCENTS. 



Tp i kneel, bless. HSIIS/- blessing. ttfHp 3 be apart, holy. t^llp (and 
^5^ 2 speak, ^^Jm.word. 13^ ttf-jg) adj. holy, ^p m. holiness. 

m. place of pasturage, wilderness, * ^ sanctuary.'" 

desert. ^Q*! 5n * P es tilence. ™ • 

1 Pass. part, is TPPG = "Baruch," (blessed) scribe of Jeremiah. 2 Mn. 
''Deborah" (PHlD 1 !) Dee - R- means drive, pour forth (as words from the 
mouth) ; hence ""Gift a drive or range (for cattle), like the Germ. Trift from 
treiben. 3 Mn. QadheS ("Kadesh"). There is an apparent play on the word 
in Num. xx. 1, 18, when Israel, being in "Kadesh," Jehovah is said to have 
been "sanctified" (t£H,T Kadeshed) in them. 



§ 7. THE ACCENTS. 

A.— THE PROSE ACCENTS. 





THE DISJUNCTIVES. 


THE CONJUNCTIVES. 


- No. 


Foem and Position. 


Name. 


Form and Position. 


Name. 


1 


TO 1 *! 

IT T 

*n^T 


Silluq 


*"Q^ 


Munah 


2 


'Athnah 

S e gholta 

Salseleth 

Great Zaqeph . . . 
Little Zaqeph . . . 
Tiphha 


JT T 

^yr\ 


M e huppakh 
Mer e kha 


3 


AT T 

^pTT 


<T T 

■"D^ 


4 


T T 
H^t] 


JT T 
^\21 


Double Mer e kha, 


5 


T T 

^QlT 


Jjr t 

^oi 


Darga 


6 


T T 

^iS** 


ST T 

1^1 

T T 

q 

*-|^T 


'Azla 


7 


T T 

^*YtT 


Little T e lisa 


8 
9 


*1"VtT 


R e bhia c 

Zarqa 

Pasta 
Ynhibh 
T e bhir 
Geres 

Double Geres 
Pazer 

Great Pazer 
Great T e lisa 
L e gharmeh 


T T 
*1^ 


Galgal 

May e la (always 
with Silluq or 


l*J I 

T T 

■n^T 


V T T 

f^vn.. 


10 


T T 

"n^i 


11 


T T 

-n4r 


'Athnah). It 
is properly a 


12 


V v< 

^n* 


Tiphha, but in 
this place it has 
the above name. 


13 


JT T 

^•n* 


14 


T T 

rr 
1^ 




15 

16 


T T 

nfrc 

^^7] 




17 


T T 

P 

'-i'Ytt 




18 


T T 

n^rT 






JT T 





THE ACCENTS. 



17 



1. The names of the accents are, in some cases, Aramaic ; in 
others, Hebrew. They are based on their form, position, pausal or 
musical value. 

2. Each word, or the last word of a series connected by Maqqeph, 
has an accent. As a rule, it is found on the tone syllable. When 
this is not the case, the principle requires that it should be repeated 
on the tone syllable ; but, in most texts, this is carried out only as 
it respects Pasta. 

3. The usual division of the accents into "emperors," "kings," 
"dukes," etc., is inexact, since the power of each accent varies 
greatly according to its position in the verse. The accents marking 
the highest tones in cantillation were those of the Disjunctives 
numbered (4), 13-16; those marking the next higher tones were 
8, 9, (3), 12, 18 ; those marking low, sustained tones were 1, 2, 5-7. 

4. The names of the two general classes of accents suggest their 
third principal use : to indicate where there were to be pauses in 
the recitation, or cantillation, and where there was to be none. The 
Disjunctive accents, accordingly, have reference to what precedes 
them ; the Conjunctive, to what follows. 



Final. 


First 
Word. 


Second 

Word. 


Third 
Word. 


Foitrtii Fifth 
Word. Word. 


Sixth 
Word. 


~r 


-(•*-) hr (-H- 8 -) -x (^) 


~a~ 


A 


~a~ 



5. The Main Division. Every verse closes with the accent 
Silluq, and this accent is used nowhere else. It is followed, as we 
have seen (§4. 7), by two dots resembling the colon, called S6ph 
Pasuq. The great law governing the accentual subdivisions of the 
verse, i.e., the use of the remaining Disjunctives, is that of dichot- 
omy. If the verse is long enough to allow it, it is divided into 
two parts, usually by 'Athnah; and, if the same condition holds 
respecting them, each of these parts, in turn, is divided into two 
parts, and so on, as long as the words of the verse hold out. These 
parts are not, necessarily, of equal length. The primary object 
aimed at in the division was musical effect in the public recitation 
of the Scriptures, combined with the desire so to mark the several 
parts of the verse as to bring out its thought to the best advantage. 
The general principle of the divisions seems to have been to put 
the main ones after the more important statements, or after words 
or clauses seeming to call for special emphasis. In this way, not 



18 



THE ACCENTS. 



infrequently, the logical and syntactical connection is given a sub- 
ordinate place. Moreover, by this plan of division it was often 
needful, as has been noted, to mark pauses of equal value by accents 
of unequal pausal value. Hence we are not able to say that a 
certain accent always implies a pause equivalent to the comma, the 
semicolon, and so on. Words and clauses receive one accent rather 
than another simply because of their position in the verse. 

6. The law governing the main dichotomy of the verse as repre- 
sented in the table was as follows. The main dichotomy, if falling 
in the first word before Silluq, is generally marked by Tiphha, but 
it may be 'Athnah ; if on the second word, it is more likely to be 
'Athnah ; but maybe either Tiphha or Zaqeph ; if on the third word, 
it will generally be 'Athnah, though Zaqeph is possible ; if on the 
fourth or any preceding word, it will be inA^ariably 'Athnah. 



Clause. 


Fixal. 


First 
Word. 


Seco>t) 

Word. 


Third 
Word. 


Fourth 

Word. 


Fifth 
Word. 


Sixth 

Word. 


Silluq 
Athnah 


~7T 


IT 


-(-) 
-(-)' 


-(-) 


-(-) 


•M^) 


-(-) 



7. The First Minor Division. The main division of the verse 
having been thus effected, the next question concerned the division 
of each of these halves, i.e., the Silluq clause and the 'Athnah clause, 
which remained. The principle is set forth in the table. In the 
Silluq clause, if the first minor dichotomy fall on the first word 
from it, it will be marked by Tiphha ; if on the second, by Tiphha 
or Zaqeph ; if on the third, or any preceding word, by Zaqeph only. 
In the 'Athnah clause, if the first minor dichotomy fall on the first 
word before it, it will be Tiphha ; if on the second, the same or 
Zaqeph ; and so on, as shown ; the more remote the position in a 
given accentual clause the heavier the accent, and the more remote 
the same accent the greater its disjunctive power. 

Rem. — The general principle governing the use of the Disjunctive prose 
accents having thus been shown, it seems unnecessary to pursue the subject 
further in this Grammar. Let it suffice to say that each of the Disjunctives 
may have a clause of its own which is entitled to subdivision under the rules of 
a continuous dichotomy, 



THE ACCENTS, 



19 



Clacse. 


DiSJ. 


First 
Conj. 


Second 
Conjf. 


Silluq 


— 


— 




'Athnah 


~7T 


J 


~J~ 


Zaqeph 


- 1 - 


~T 


~~J~ 


S e gholta 


— 


j 


~T 


TipKha 


— 


- (-) 


IT 



8. Order of the Conjunctives. The Conjunctives have influence, 
severally, only within the limited space between two Disjunctives, 
and, as already remarked, it is in the direction of the one that 
follows. In general, it is only closely connected words (a noun and 
its genitive, or adjective, etc.) that are joined together by a Con- 
junctive accent. The table shows which Conjunctives are found 
with the principal Disjunctives ; and in case there is more than one 
required, what one is found in the second place. With Silluq there 
will never be found any other Conjunctive than Aler e kka ; with 
'Athnah, Munah. So with all the remaining Disjunctives there is a 
uniform law respecting the Conjunctives that shall precede them in 
the sentence. 

Rem. — A double system of accentuation is found in certain passages : as in 
Gen. xxxv. 22 b , where the object is a more rapid reading of the words so accen- 
tuated ; and in the Decalogue (Ex. xx. 2-17 ; Deut. v. 6-18). where the object 
is to reduce the twelve verses to ten, i.e., to the number of the commandments. 
There are also, occasionally, single words which have two (alternative) accents 
(Lev. x. -4; 2 Kings xvii. 13 ; Ezek. xlviii. 10; Zeph. ii. 15). 

9. : | H£&H The Use ofPfaeq- Paseq (= cutting off) is a short 
perpendicular line found between words. 1 It is of two kinds, the 
ordinary and extraordinary. The former is used before any Dis- 
junctive, to separate, to some extent, words otherwise bound to- 
gether ; the latter, only before certain Disjunctives, to provide a 
means of marking a minor dichotomy where the usual accents fail 
to do so (G-en. i. 5, 8 ; xviii. 15 ; Deut. ix. 4 ; xxv. 19 ; 2 Sam. xxiv. 
13; 1 Kings xxi. 2). Of the ordinary Paseqs there are the follow- 
ing classes : (1) that distinguishing words as to sense (Gen. xviii. 
15) ; (2) as to emphasis (Ex. xv. 18) ; (3) that found between 
words repeated (Gen. xxii. 11) ; (4) that separating words, one of 
which ends in the same letter with which the following one begins 
(Cant. iv. 12). 



20 



THE ACCENTS. 



B. — THE POETIC ACCENTS. 





THE DISJUNCTIVES. 


THE CONJUNCTIVES. 


No. 


Fokm asd Position. 


Name. 


Form and Position. 


Name. 


1 


^m 


Silluq 


hST 




2 


IT T 

'-o'n 


'01e-w e y6redh . . 

Athnah 

• 

K e bhia' (great) . . 
R e bliia' (little) . . 
K e bhia' mughras 
Cinnor . . 


J~ T 


Tarha 


3 


JT T 

^2*1 


^T T 


4 


AT T 

'■Ql 


T T 




5 


T T 

^n^ 


-T T 


■nifty 

M e huppakh 

Calo-nl 


6 


T T 

^ 

T T 

^yr\ 


T T 

^\yi 


7 


<T T 
^Q* 


8 


T T 

nn^ 


D e hi 


V T T 

tit . 


Salseleth (little) 

Qinnorith 
(pretonic) 


9 


T TV. 

-n^ 


Pazer 


T T 


10 


T T 

n^ 


Salseleth 

'Azla 

M e lxuppakh 
Pgharmeh 


T T 


11 


T T 

nS^ 




12 


T T 

IW 

<T T 





1. The use of Poetic Accents is confined to the Books of Job, 
Psalms, and Proverbs. They serve much the same purpose in 
poetry as the Prose Accents do in prose. The verse is divided on 
the principle of a continuous dichotomy ; though here, the dichot- 
omy, naturally, is not carried as far. 

jt : v -: | vat t t : | : -\, J - ' - i^ ": <- : 

♦ D^^PH^S ^"liil Ps - viii - 2 - The rule for the main dichot- 
omy in poetry is as follows : (1) If it be on any one of the first 
three words from Silluq, it will be marked by 'Athnah ; (2) if on 
the fourth or fifth words, by 'Athnah or e 6le-w e y6redh j (3) if on 
any previous word, by the latter only. 

s- i ins -itfx wti % jbB-^5J bintf rsb jrm 

: • <v -: -jt • : - - v t I " : t t ,: 

ittbT. Tftra+ntix bsi bw vb nbsi insa ?# 

Ps. i. 3. The principles governing the consecution of accents in the 
minor dichotomy it will be sufficient to illustrate in the clause 
closed by Silluq. If e 6le-w e y6redh has been used to divide the verse 



THE ACCENTS. 21 

into its two halves, then 'Athnah may be expected to mark the 
second division. If 'Athnah has been nsed for this purpose (see 
example under 2), E e bhia e mughras will mark the second division, 
or, in some few cases, Salseleth. If there is another division called 
for between R e bhia c mughras and Silluq, it will be marked by 
M e huppakh l e gharmeh. 



PAET II. — WOKDS AND FOEMS. 



D^C 



1. 



§ 8. THE PERSONAL PRONOUN. 



I 


■btot 


*?* 




we 


wni* 


uni 






thou 


nm 


/. m 




you 


dak, 


/• |0» 


runs 

T " - 


he 


m 


she 


ten 


they 


on, ni^n, /. 


n 


nrt 



Kem. — 1. The form HDK is found five times without J°|. 2. F|J$ appears 
seven times (KHhibh) as ifl^. 3. Kill is used for XM — eleven times ex- 
cepted — throughout the Pentateuch. 4. ^pQ occurs but six times in the Bible ; 
a still shorter form !)}&$ but once. 5. The 2d pers. sing, and pi. was originally 
written with J after the ^ ; hence the Daghes forte compensative in ft (§ 4. 2. r.). 
The full original forms in the pi. were DIDJ^' pfiJX- 6. The Daghes In 
j-JftiT 7\li\ is a D. forte ftrmative (§ 4. 2. k.). 

T " T " 

2. The Personal Pronoun in this form — excepting If], which is 
used solely with prefixes — is found only in the Nom. case. The 
oblique cases are indicated by abbreviations of the same appended 
as suffixes to verbs, nouns, and particles. 



DK 1 (cstr. ^K, pi. nlDK) m. father. 

1D& 2 De l°st, perish. 

IlK * 3 be clear, bright. litf to. light, 
11X12 »». luminary. 

DIPT* 4 be dr y> desolate. DIP! /• 
sword. Dint to. dryness, desola- 
tion. ,1Din*/- ibid. 



nD'JJ 5 serve, minister. 1D^ «*• ser- 

- T V V 

vant. nib3? /• service, work. 
1^ 6 ni. skin. 
1S^ to. dust. (1£& t to. ashes.) 

XT V " 

JTDp 7 collect. 



1 Mn. and derivative "Abba" (Eom. viii. 15). 2 Mn. and deriv. "Abaddon," 
the Destroyer. 3 Suggests ore. * Mn. "Horeb" with its bald summit. Dill 
is from an allied root (stripped even to brightness and sharpness). 5 Mn. " Obed " 
(ID'l? servant). 6 Associate with, and discriminate from, 1^. The skin of 
Moses' face shone. 7 Mn. and deriv. the name of the vowel (_), i.e., a collec- 
tion of dots. 



THE ARTICLE. 



23 



9. THE ARTICLE. 



biprr 1 


Before ordinary consonants. . . 


■n 


tthrin 2 


Before ft, H (rarely £) 


n 


T "l~ 






• T 


Before J<, 1 (generally 'JJ) . . . 


n 

T 


T 






DOT" 

T T 






mrn 3 






ton 4 

T T IV 


Before "JJ, H "without the tone 

T T 


n 


(ifcnri 4 






DDnn 5 


Before fii !"1 


n 


T t: 



The original form of the Article was ^,^. This accounts for the 
accompanying D. forte which, placed in a following consonant, 
marks the assimilation of a letter (§ 4. 2. r.). 1 Before gutturals, 
which do not admit of doubling, the Article undergoes certain 
changes, whose law has been already indicated (§ 5. 1). D. forte 
may be implied; then it is simply omitted, and the vowel of the 
Article remains unchanged. 2 Or there may be compensation made 
for the omission, the vowel of the Article being lengthened. 3 In 
the second syllable from the tone, however, 4 and in all other cases 
where the vowel of the article is not lengthened to — , it is deflected 
to —, D. forte being implied. 5 

Rem. 1. — The Article in Hebrew had originally the force of a demonstrative 
pronoun, and still retains it in some expressions. Cl'ij this day, or to-day. 

Rem. 2. — With the Article the vowels of 'in? "12, ££, and the first vowel 
of JHK, are changed to _. ^m, [H^H- 

Rem. 3. — When the consonant following the Article is not supported by a 
full vowel, its D. forte is frequently omitted. ^l&Tf. 



■£TX m. man ; pi. D^UttK 5 cstr. "TOtf. 

HITS /• woman, wife ; cstr. ntTX ; 

phirm 

, • T 

/. earth, land. 



fllbn* 1 sound, roar. j"i£n wi. noise, 

multitude, abundance. 
'1H 2 m. mountain. 
ttflPl* new. tnn 3 m - new moon, 

T T 

month. 



24 DEMONSTRATIVE AND RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 



7^ 4 be capacious, able. 7D\1 

T T " 

temple, palace. 
Q^ 5 m. people, nation. Q^ with. 
703? 6 m. toil, travail. 



^T2 ' w*. evening. 

n*iS* 8 be fruitful, bear. ^g bullock 

(/•nna). na ™. fruit. 

bnJ5* 9 ca H? convene. 7|"||2 m. con- 

- It » t It 

vocation, ^p m. voice, cry, sound. 
1 Mimetic; c/. bum. 2 R. ^l^H = horrere, be stiff, rigid. Mn. "Hor" 
Cnn). 3 To be associated with, but discriminated from, tlHp (§6). The 
seventh Jewish month was especially the holy month. 4 The origin of 'JOTI is 
probably an Assyr. word for great house. 5 R. DttV = bind together. Hence 
the prep, meaning with. 6 Mn. "Moil,"" to which it is in idea akin. 7 Allied 
Assyrian word is Erebu; cf. Erebus. 8 Mn. "Ephraim" (D^^S^ double fruit- 
fulness) : Gen. xli. 52 ; or with 'Hg there may be associated berry, pear. 9 Mn. 
TwT\p " Qoheleth," the Preacher of Ecclesiastes (i. 1). ^p is from a kindred 
root'(^p). 

Exercise. — The statute. 2 The flock. 2 The house. 3 
The mouth. 3 The tooth. 3 The eye. 3 The sin. 5 The 
darkness. 5 The talent. 4 The wisdom. 3 The wise. 3 Thou 
(art) the man. She (is) the woman. I (am) G-od (pi.). 2 
We (are) the people. The Nile (River). 3 The earth. The 
bullock. The cow. The toil. They (are) a multitude. 
The dust. 8 The skin. 8 The sword. 8 



§ 10. DEMONSTRATIVE AND RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 

1. The Demonstrative Pronoun. Jf] this, / T\HV P^ G - Pl^X- 

xin that, /. ki,-j, pi. c. an, rttzh /• h, rah 

Rem. — 1. It will be noticed that for the demonstrative pronoun of the remote 

object the 3d pers. of the personal pronoun is used. 2. The Daghes in the 7 of 

H^k is ~D- forte firmative (§ 4. 2. R.). 3. J"|t is sometimes used adverbiaUy = 

here, now. 4. *|| and •j] are each used once, and J-jf several times for JHKI ; 

7^ is found nine times for j"[7tf, though but once outside the Pentateuch. 

5. A form J"|J>n (/• It^Hj c - HH) for the remote object- that one yonder, 
... T _ .. _ T _ 

occurs a few times. 

w\r\?\ bnan' that g peat da y- 4 svn ^na g* eat is tne da y- 

5 ?n3n Di*H tne great day. The demonstrative pronoun, when 
used as such, is placed at the head of the sentence. 1 It may be used 
as an adjective; then, like other adjectives, it follows the substan- 
tive, and both usually take the article. 2 If another adjective be 
used, the demonstrative adjective is placed after it, and each word 
is usually made definite by the article. 3 An adjective, wdien a 



INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS AND PARTICLES. 25 

predicate, ordinarily precedes the substantive, and is without the 
article. 4 When it qualifies a substantive, as remarked, it follows it ; 
and if the latter be definite, the adjective is made so. 5 

3. The Relative Pronoun. "HB^X who, which, what. 

Rem. — In place of the ordinary form of the relative there is not infrequently 
found, though mostly in the later biblical books, -tl?, -t£?, or ^, the fc< of the origi- 
nal word, as most suppose, having fallen away, while the *") has been assimilated. 
If is also used as a relative fourteen times (1. r. 4). 

4. i^ in it, H3 . . . T^& ^ which; Q^ there, B$ . . . 

T TV": T T 

Htt?K wnere - The relative pronoun is indeclinable, and used for 
all genders, numbers, and cases. Often it serves as a sign of relation, 
giving a relative signification to a pronoun or adverb that follows at 
a greater or less distance. 1 It may also be used as a conjunction in 
the sense of that, when, because, (with 3) according as. 



7*73 be, become great. Sl13 great. 

^iJIfcp 1 w- tower. 

2JE* be good. DID 2 good, yfo* 

m. goodness. ^tO* 1 be good, well. 

D^ 3 m. day; pi. Q^£\ Qfc^ daily, 

• T T 

by day. 



Eft*") he high. D*"! 4 high, exalted. 

T 

EiTO m. height, high place. TO^fi 

T t : 

/. (heave) offering, tribute. 
QtLJ 5 m. name, fame (R. TOtt? be 

high); pi. nittt!?- D;&ttf heavens. 
Dt2^ there. 



1 Mn. "Migdol." 2 Mn. "Tobias" (H^ltO Jehovah is good), the apocryphal 

T • 

hero. 3 The word ' ' Yom ' ' for day has become somewhat familiar through dis- 
cussions over Gen. i. 4 Mn. " Abram" (=D15N high father). 5 Mn. "Shem" 
(DtV), the name of a son of Noah. 

Exercise. — This day. These (are) the statutes. 2 These 
statutes. A people 9 great and (1) high. Thou (art) a 
great God. 2 A good name. This high mountain. 9 That 
land. 9 All 2 which he had made (Pl'ttJS). This people. 9 



11. THE INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS AND PARTICLES. 

1. The Interrogative Pronouns. *fe who ? ftfo which ? what ? 



•to 


Before ordinary consonants (usually with Maqqeph). 


to 


With D. forte implied before jf and (rarely) ,"]• 


TO 


Always before ^ and "1, generally before J"| without Qamec. 


to 


With disjunctive accents (§ 7). 


to 


Before J, H, PI- 


TO (or 


Before ordinary consonants when without Maqqeph and at a 


ma) 

T 


distance from the principal accent of the clause. 



26 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS AND PARTICLES. 

2 - 1 nriK ^ who art tiiQ u? 2 nxrn?3 what is tMs? t^ 

interrogative ^ is used for persons, 1 [-(£ for things. 2 It will be 
noticed that the pointing of the latter is much like that of the 
Article. The D. forte sometimes following it may be regarded as 
conjunctive (§ 4. 2. k.). 

Rem. 1. — The interrogative pronouns are sometimes used in the Genitive, in 
which case they follow the word they limit. *fc "ll/DP! whose ass ? 

Rem. 2. — Jfft before adjectives and verbs may have an adverbial and ex- 
clamatory force. How ! "Wherefore ! Dil£~n£2 b° w good ! 

Rem. 8. — *fc ail d TltH are sometimes used as indefinite pronouns : ichoever 
(any one who), whatever. 

3. Interrogative Particles. Jf, £^ if whether, *i^ where. 



n 


Before ordinary consonants. 


n 


Before ordinary consonants with 5 e vva (sometimes -Jf). 


n 


Before gutturals (D. forte implied). 


n 


Before gutturals with Qamec. 



4 STtn is tllis? 2 ^5 H) nriSH whether thou here (art) 
my son (§ 10. r. 3). 3 ft] ^ilft fTPlX"DX whether I shall 

• t: i" v : |V 

recover (live) from this sickness. 4 ^31 S X where is Abel ? 
5 fl*"^X which ? who ? The inseparable particle ^ is generally 
used in direct, 1 but sometimes in indirect questions. 2 Q$$ introduces 
indirect, very seldom direct, questions. 3 In questions where an 
alternative is suggested (whether — or), £] pretty uniformly pre- 
cedes, followed by EX in the next, or the second clause. ^ when 
found without a pronominal suffix, always takes the form ^. 4 Used 
with other adverbs or pronouns, it simply gives them an interroga- 
tive sense. 5 

Rem. — 1. There may be a question asked without the use of an interrogative 
pronoun or particle. 2. "When a D. forte is used with Jf interrogative (see 
table) it is a D. f. separative (§ 4. 2. e.). 3. Combined with the negative JO 
not (X^n), H requires the answer yes (= nonne in Latin). 



THE INSEPARABLE PREPOSITIONS. 



27 



*"iifcn 3 m - ass - 

HISS ^ e heavy, rich, glorious. *03 



adj. same meaning 

glory, wealth. 
& Cor aib) wo*. 
H^S 5 (or HttS) wherefore 



H33 1 build, p (cs?>\ -p or -p; 
#*• D^2) son. ^12 (i??- ni33) «<#• same meaning. TD3' 

• T ~ T 

daughter. 
HTI 2 be, become. 

irn live, ^n a*, d^pd !*&. n s n 

T T - • - T~ 

/. life, (wild) beast. 
1 The family is built tip through children: Gen. xvi. 2. ]■)* written fully 
would be ri32 ; hence the pi. 2 This is to be discriminated from the following, 
which has the stronger jf ; so living compared with being. 3 Mn. " Hamor," 
name of a prince : Gen. xxxiii. 19. Homer compares Ajax to an ass (II. xi. 557). 
*Mn. "Ichabod" HHD •»& 1 Sam. iv. 21), inglorious. 5 7V*P> = 7]fo and ^ = 
to what, for what, wherefore. The form Jfl^S (and HftS) occurs mostly before 
gutturals. 

Exercise. — "Who (is) that man? "Who (art) thou (/) ? 
Whose daughter (art) thou ? How good ! What (are) 
these ? Wherefore (is) this ? Wherefore have I (is there 
to me = *h) life (pi.) ? A son honoreth (1331) a father. 8 
Is it not this? What (is) man? Is the people 9 strong 
(p|H Order : Is strong, etc.) ? 



§ 12. THE INSEPARABLE PREPOSITIONS. 

1. JJ in (among), by (for or through), with; ^ to, unto, belong- 
ing to, at, for ; 3 as, like, according to. The pointing of these 
prepositions, when combined with other words, is as follows : — 



T : - 

rhka 

... .. T 



Before a vowel, !5 e wa. 

Before a S e wa, Hireq. 

Before a composite S e wa, the corresponding short vowel. 

Before the Article, takes its vowel, and H is syncopated. 

In the pretone often Qameg. 

2 and 3 with H£, Pathah with DagkeS ; but J1JS2, H1S3 m 

: . t v - v - 

Pause (§ 6. 4. r.) and before ^. 



Rem. 1. — When, by processes of inflection or composition, two S e was come 
together at the beginning of a syllable, a new (half open) syllable arises, whose 
vowel is Hireq CHS3 as fruit). 



28 PREPOSITION 1Q AND WAV COPULATIVE. 

Rem. 2. — These several prepositions have independent forms (iftS, lM t 
1^7, 1ft = nib)j Dut > excepting 1ft3, they are only used in poetry. 

Eem. 3. — Before mrf, which generally has the vowels of *¥*]$, (§4. 5. n.), 
these prepositions take the pointing required by the Hateph of the latter 
(Pathah), and the following S e wa disappears (^'IK^ PIUtS). Cf. § 5. 4. r. 1. 



m. silver, money. 
IIDD " write, count, recount. "I^lD (i) 
m. book, letter, ^pfc »». number. 
SKt^ 8 ask. %fltf "Sheol." 



Jl^lK - 1 c. ark (of testimony) . 
1*^2 TOt ii 0Ili 

Jl^nS 3 /• heast, (domestic) cattle. 
TH^ 4 tread, walk. "TH*! c. way, walk 
jrD 5 wi- priest. 

1 May be associated with Ji^lllK "Aaron" who kept it. 2 Mn. "Ariel" 
(bfcjt'HK lion of God). 3 Mn., its' pi., "Behemoth" (nlttllS Job xl. 15 = the 
hippopotamus). 4 Cf. T(d)rack. 5 Origin of the names "Ivohen," "Cohen," 
etc. 6 R. S"pS means split, cut ; so P|p3 properly a piece (of money). 7 May 
be associated with cipher. 8 The word ^i&tT is D Y some derived from this r., 
and so would mean the place that is always demanding. More likely its r. is 
sVVJi the derivative meaning the sunken place. 

Exercise. — To the number. To the woman. 9 By wis- 
dom. 3 Among cattle. In the palace. 9 In a dream. 3 In 
the dream. In the land. 9 Like an ass. 11 As the dust. 8 
According to all. 2 According to the number. Like (the) 
people, 9 so (— like the) priest. On (in) that day. 10 For (3) 
silver. In Jehovah. 



§ 13. THE PREPOSITION Ifi AND WAW COPULATIVE. 

from, out of. 1Q is generally found independently written with 
words having the article, and often in poetry. 1 In other cases it is 
wont to coalesce with the word to which it is prefixed, the final 1 
being assimilated (§ 4. 2. r.). 2 In the case of gutturals — including 
the article when 1Q is not connected with it by Maqqeph — and ^, 
in which a Daghes cannot stand, there is compensation made for 
the omission of Daghes by heightening the vowel. 3 With j°] and J^, 
however, D. forte is sometimes implied (§ 5. I). 4 

Rem. 1. — In letters having S e wa the D. forte may be omitted (§ 9. r. 3). 
*H££ of fruit. 

Rem. 2. — If the word with which f jp coalesces begins with i, it unites with 
the latter to form *fo rTHiTft from Judah ; but niiTJ&i tn e word ^Htf being 

t • t : i" t -: 

implied. § 5. 4. r. 1. 



THE STRONG VERB. 29 

2 - 71N.TV 2 ^m 3 *p^> ^1- 4 ^ i ?:^] OV i 1 and 
(but, or, etc.). The conjunction *] as copulative is ordinarily pointed 
with S e w& ; but before a guttural with a Hateph, with the corre- 
sponding short vowel; 2 before the labials or another simple 8 e wa, 
with a dot in its bosom ; 3 immediately before the tone syllable, 
especially when connecting words associated in pairs, and at the 
end of a clause, with Qamec. 4 

Rem. — Placed before words beginning with \ ) unites with the latter to form 
"H (flTim an< i Judah) ; excepting with nliT? where it becomes 1, hi harmony 

i ■ T : - 

with principles already noticed. 



Tpft reign, become king, ^hfo 1 (/• 

n|S^),kmg. nDbftrebao (or 

rD^EE) /• kingdom. 
f5 a "(/."rQC?) tree, wood, 
plit he just, righteous, p"^^ right- 



eous. p'li 1 (i) w*. righteousness. 
rp*7S£ /■ righteousness. 
Dip* 3 he before. Q^p m. east 

-It , -It 

wind. 0*"!p adv. before ; on. the 
east. TO*lp* eastward. 



1 Mn. "MelcMzedek" (pni^sbtt Gen. xiv. 18). 2 The pi. is used for sticks 
of wood, timber, etc. 3 Mn. KaS/xos, who is said to have brought the original 
Greek alphabet from the east. 

Exercise. — From the house. 3 From the land. 9 From 
'Adhonay. From a tree. From without. 2 From 
Jerusalem (DvEfaT). From a kingdom. And I. Bread 
(DPD) and water. And righteousness (/.). And cattle. 12 
The heavens 10 and the earth. 



§ 14. THE STRONG VERB. 

1. * ^I0|5' r ^ ne ro °ts from which Hebrew words in their present 
form are derived consist almost invariably of three (unpointed) 
consonants j * although there are a few words having four or five 
(quadriliterals, quinqueliterals) . a 

2- 'tin- "Titf- 3 ittK- *Dvi<ra>- 5 a'^ r ">«:»; r6a- 

-T - T -T | - T TT TT 

Verbs are classified as strong or weak according to the nature of 
the radicals they contain. Weak verbs are such as have one or 
more of the following letters as radicals : J, 1 *, \ ff, ^ '■> or repeat 

a Words composed of more than three root letters have been generally formed 
from pre-existing triliterals ; just as many trilateral roots may be referred to 
original biliterals. 



30 THE STRONG VERB. 

the second radical letter as a third. 2 The names given to the 
different kinds of weak verbs are derived from the verb ^5^^ 
(to do), which was formerly used in inflection. A verb whose first 
letter is J is called a yfi, 1 the J standing in the place of £ in 
^^S- A verD wh° se fi rs t letter is J$ is called a $"Q. 5 One 
whose middle letter is *| or \ an y'JJ or VJ^. 4 One whose second 
and third root letters are the same is called an y^. 2 The verb 
22? % accordingly, is a v '£; 5 while £^fo and ]"|"?;| are named, 

-T . . TT TT 

respectively, ^ //fc ^ 6 and Jf"^- 6 

Rem. — In this Grammar verbs having gutturals as radicals are classified as 
strong verbs. They require, it is true, as compared with other strong verbs, 
certain changes in vocalization ; but they do not, like the weak verbs, call for 
changes in the consonants themselves which make up the root. 

3. The Perfect. 



Sing. Pluk. 

3. TO. 3. C !J 

3. /. . . n_ 

T 

2. to. ... ri 2. to. . . ut\ 

T 

2./. ... n 2. /..... jn 

I.e. ...<fl I.e..... y 



Sing. Plue. 

3. to. StOP lie killed 3 c iStOD they killed 

- It : I it 

3. /• TbW she killed 2. ™ Ufbw y e kille d 

T : I IT v : - | : 

2. ?)i. nS^p thou killedst 2. /. Jftep ye killed 

2. /• FlSlDjJ thou killedst 1. c. . .ftbkg we killed 
1- c. TlStOP I killed 



The so-called Perfect of the strong verb is formed by appending 
to the simple stem the above shortened forms of the Personal 
Pronoun (§8). 

Rem. 1. — The immediate origin of most of these pronominal fragments is 
obvious. The ending Jf_ is for JH_ (§ 1. 4), which letter, indeed, the verb 

T 

always takes when other suffixes^are added,- and sometimes without them. The 
ending ij?| is, most likely, for ^ in *0}£$. The ending *) seems to have been 
at one time V\ (still found Deut. viii. 3, 16; Isa. xxvi. 16), and originally una, 
an old plural ending of masculine nouns. The ending !)J is from ^HJ. 

Rem. 2. — It will be noticed that the endings p\, h fi, and ^ do not take the 

T 

tone ; in all other cases, however, the tone is on the final syllable. 

Rem. 3. — As it respects vocal changes, certain earlier statements should be 
here recalled. The vowels a, e, 5, in the final syllable of the verb, are volatilized 
immediately before affixes beginning with a vowel, and having the tone (§ 6. 5. r.). 
A few cases, to be hereafter noted, are excepted from this rule. 



THE INFINITIVES AND IMPERATIVE. 



31 



p3 1 distinguish, perceive, understand. 



^ between. HIPS*/- understand- 



ing- iiyOri*/- same. 
}""H))' 2 strip, uncover, reveal. ,1713* 

T T T 

/. captivity, captives. 
^tt^ 3 sit, dwell, be enthroned, Httfifc* 

- T T 

m. seat, dwelling. 



^^ 4 find. 

T T 

w')D 5 draw near. 

hop kill (poetic). 

""Dtl? break (mn. shiver) ; as denom. 

o/ nntb sell grain. ^QttJ* ("D&) 

breach, destruction, grain. 



1 Distinguish between j^ and p3, on the one hand, and pg and p} 11 , on the 
other. 2 A derivative is fiv3 "Goliath," meaning the polished, brilliant (<•/. 
S^lll § 8 )- 3 An allied root of fDttJ (be firm, rest) with its natural mn. 
" Sabbath." 4 Associate with tf^ (§ 5) in the order tf^fc, &2T he went forth, 
he found. 5 Belongs to a class of verbs beginning with ^, having the meaning 
hit, push, strike, etc. 

Exercise. — I wrote. 4 Which he wrote. He wrote in 
the book. 12 They have trodden. 12 He reigned 13 in Jeru- 
salem (Q^tthT). I have broken Moab p$1»). She has 
ruled. Ye have ruled. Thou hast counted. 12 

Bem. — Bers. pr. as subjects of verbs are only to be expressed when italicized. 



§ 15. THE INFINITIVES AND IMPERATIVE. 

1. Infinitives. Imperative. 



Inf. construct 7fcDp to kill 


Sing. 2. to. 7>bp kill thou 


Inf. absolute 7ltflp killing 


2. /• *b*Op kill thou 




Plur. 2. to. iSftp kill ye 




2. /. nAiDjJ kill ye 



The two Infinitives are, strictly speaking, verbal nouns, and inde- 
pendent of one another. The Inf. cstr. lias a changeable vowel : 
the Inf. abs. is unchangeable in form, the 6 in the last syllable 
coming not from _, but being an obscured a. 

2 - "ti^xn TtottJs wnen the man ^p*- 2 isDb bin ke 

■ T : • , : • t 

ceased to count. 3 ^rHp£ *lpB visiting I (=1 surely) visited. 
The respective names of the Infinitives describe fairly well their 
uses. The Inf. cstr. is used in construction with prefixed preposi- 



32 THE INFINITIVES AND IMPERATIVE. 

tions (p, 3, 3, 7^?)^ as we ^ as w ^ pronominal suffixes; it may 
govern substantives or be governed by them, or by verbs. 2 The 
Inf. abs. serves to emphasize the abstract idea of its root without 
limitation by subject or object. Used before a verb in a finite form, 
it usually emphasizes the fact of the action expressed by it ; 3 used 
after one, it has the same effect, or, more often, expresses the idea 
of continuance. 

Rem. — The syllable formed by the prefixing of a preposition to the Inf. 
construct is generally half open ; but to this rule ^ is a special exception (§ 3. 4. 
foot-note). 

3. pBp from an' original 7(2) [5. It should be noted that the 
ground-form of the Imperative (and Impf., § 16) is the same as the 
Inf. cstr. 

Rem. — Of the pronominal endings, >1 _ is from ^^ (= T)£, § 8. 1. R. 2) ; !J = ?!] 
(perhaps from una, § 14. 3.R. 1) ; ,*"J3 is from [-[SH (§ 8). 

4. 'bbiT let nim kilL 2 ^bppl"^S (never ^bp"bX) do 
not kill. The Imp. is used in the second person only. When a 
command is given in the third person, the Imperfect (§ 16) is 
used; 1 as also in the second person when a negative is required 
(prohibition). 2 

Rem. 1. — In explanation of the vowel of the first syllable of ^tpp, 'Dtpp? 
see § 12. r. 1. 

Rem. 2. — The form 7^^ may appear in the lengthened form T\T\£Oi ah 

I : T : It 

(!"[_) being added, and the original Holem (0), placed under the word, becom- 

T 

ing in a shut, toneless syllable Qamec-hatuph (o, § 2. 3. r. 2). This lengthened 
form is sometimes called the emphatic Imperative. As a matter of fact, it more 
often softens the command, making it an entreaty or an expression of strong 
desire. 



7$ not (with Jussive, etc.). 

ttTYl 1 seek. 

7*in 2 leave off, cease. 

7t£?ft 3 rule. vt£?ft «*•. similitude, 

- T T T 

proverb. 
Hp2 4 visit (judicially), muster, ap- 



point. JTlDS*/- visitation, charge. 

Tl\ : 

EP^pSt precepts. 

^Dj? 5 bury - ^©|? ® m - grave ' sep " 

ulchre. 
^foW 6 keep, observe. m6#ft /• 

- T v v : 

post, watch, ordinance. 



1 Mn. "Midrash" (t£H*fft) 5 explanation, a commentary on the Talmud. 
2 Associate with Sbf! 49 begin. 3 R. = place in order {marshal) ; hence the mean- 
ing of the noun. * R, = open wide (the eyes). Cf. Hf5S ("Pekah") blossom. 
6 Mn. Cover (by accommodation), the r. meaning heap up. 6 It may be asso- 
ciated with ^Otl? (break, keep). 



THE IMPERFECT AND PARTICIPLES. 



33 



Exercise. — To bury. Bury thou. To rule over (3) 
the day. 10 To keep .the way. 12 The man 9 (asking) asked 
(verbs first). 12 To ('?) seek Jehovah. Inquire of (seek) 
Jehovah. He left on; counting (to count). 12 I surely 
visited (= visiting, I v.). Thou hast visited the earth. 9 



§ 16. THE IMPERFECT AND PARTICIPLES. 

1. The Imperfect. 



Sixu. 




Pluk. 




3. m. . . 


i 


S.m. ..} 


, "1 


3./.... 


• fl 


3./. H3 


.fl 


2. m. . . 


•n 


2. m...!| 


.fl 


2. /. •»_ 


n 


2. /. nj 

T 


-fl 


I.e.... 


k 


1. c 


.3 



3. m. bbi^ 1 / ^e will 

. ' ■ ' 1 kill 
3. /. ^bPfl j she will 

•■ * \kill 
2. m. 7t3pfl f thou wilt 

'■ • \kill 
2. /• ^lOpfl J thou wilt 



I.e. 



. '• \kill 
TiipK / 1 will 

l: - 1 kill 



5. m. . . ^HttiT / they will 
. sl: '\kffl 

>• /• fl^bpfl I they will 

T = l: • \kill 
2.m. ..Y?ttpfl J Ye will 



i kill 



/• nabiSpfl J ye will 
• • Pttpj f we will 



I.e. 



If 



\kill 



It will be observed that the Imp/, has generally affixes only in 
the pi. ; but takes prefixes — of single consonants — throughout. 
The former are due to the circumstance that the prefixes do not 
always suffice to indicate the gender and number. The reason why 
the Impf. takes prefixes, while the Per/, has only affixes, lies 
largely in the fact that, in the one case, the emphasis is laid more 
on the act ; in the other, on the one acting. 

Eem. — The origin of the several prefixes and affixes it is not possible to fix 
with certainty in every instance. Those of the 1st Pers. are, respectively, from 
"Aft Wlli- The fl prefixed to the 2d Pers. is from flfltf, Qfi£, etc. ; and the 
affix H3 from flSH, J73flfc$. The other affixes of the 2d Pers. (\ \) have heen 

T T - T " ~ 

explained (§ 14. 3. e. 1). Of the prefixes of the 3d pers., fl may he supposed 
to he the original feminine ending of the noun. The prefix *[, it has heen 
suggested, represents an original ya (still found in Arahic). In most cases the 
vowel has heen thinned to __, hut with ^ (§ 5. e. under Exercise) deflected to — . 

2. The terms Per/., Impf., as applied to the Hebrew verb 
(notwithstanding the translations appended in the tables above), 
do not, properly speaking, represent tenses. The former refers to 
what is completed, especially in the past, but also in the present or 
future; the latter to what is incomplete, especially to something 
about to be entered upon, though also to what has been already 



34 



THE IMPERFECT AND PARTICIPLES. 



entered upon. The Per/, is employed in prophecies and assevera- 
tions, where the event is looked upon as certain; the Impf., in 
speaking of what is possible, may or ought to be. Either may be 
used of what is customary and of general truths, according to the 
point of view. 

3. The Participles. 

Part, active ^tpP killing 

Part, passive TltQp killed 



The simple stem of the verb alone (Qal ; see § 19) has two parti- 
ciples ; and even here, the Part. pass, appears to be the remnant of 
a lost passive verbal form of this stem (still used in Arabic). 

4. The Participles may be used either as nouns (verbal) or 
adjectives ; take prefixes (the Article and prepositions) and suffixes 
to indicate gender and number, or (pronominal, to indicate) the 
relation of government or dependence with respect to some person 
or thing. 

5. The Participles mostly indicate present time ; but may refer 
to the future, especially to something just about to take place ; or 
to the past, in a context descriptive of a past event. 

Rem. — The original form of the Part. act. was qatil. The a has been ob- 
scured to 6, and i heightened to e. In the Part, pass., on the other hand (orig., 
qatul), it is the vowel of the second syllable that is unchangeable ; while the first, 
being tone long, is changeable. The Part, is based on the Perf. of the verb, as 
the Imp. and Impf. on the Inf. cstr. 



tt^H* 1 drive out. tZ?13E 2 m. com- 

-T t: • 

mon, precincts, suburbs. 
12 SD 3 escape. 

- T 

H^ID 4 cover, close up, shut. 

- T 

toSs* 3 escape. tO^St m. one escaped. 

- T , • T 

HtOvS * /• escape, deliverance. 



?£^* cover, keep, lay up. JIS^ 5 6. 

North. 
M p * 6 be angry. Mp * (i) m. anger. 
*"|tl?p* v bind, conspire. 
I"Ottf 8 rest, cease. fOttf /• Sabbath. 



1 Cf. Sansc. gras (Eng. grass), devour. 2 Properly a drive (for cattle). Of. 
*D1ft from ^2^! (§6). 3 R. = make smooth (and escape). The next word 

T : • - T 

but one = divide, break through (and escape) ; cf. plat. 4 Same r. letters as 
Span, seguro (Eng. secure). 5 So called as the covered, dark region. 6 R. Vp = 
cut, break. This word means break loose, break out in anger. 7 R. tTp = be 
fast, hard, stiff. 8 Mn. "Sabbath." Cf. y&\ § 14. 



INTRANSITIVE VERBS. 35 

Exercise. — I am driving out (Part.). They drive out 
(Imp/.). And 13 the door 3 he shut. Y e h6vvfili will shut 
(verb first). Shut ye the door. He will be angry. Jam 
angry (Part. act.). The goodness 10 which thou hast laid 
up. They will conspire. And it (N1H) was shut (Part. 
pass.). And ye shall describe 4 (write) the land. 9 



§ 17. INTRANSITIVE VERBS. 

!• ^EDD- 2i l22; iftD- Tlie principal vowel of the verb is 
that of the second syllable. On that is generally based the distinc- 
tion between verbs transitive and intransitive. The verbs already 
treated have a (— ) in that position, and are commonly called middle 
a verbs. 1 There are others which have e (— ) 2 or o (j) 2 in the 
second syllable, and are called middle e or middle o verbs. The 
latter classes are generally intransitive, or, as others name them, 
stative, verbs. They indicate, for the most part, some state or 
condition of the subject. 

2- '"QS- 2 1Z2 (with n_ paragogic, ."TOS ; § is.*- B-2J. 

- : - : t - : • 

3 *722*'- Verbs middle e are inflected in the Perf. and//?/ abs.- 
like verbs middle a (see table of Strong Verbs). In the Inf. cstr., 1 
Imp., 2 and Impf., 3 they are generally said to take a (— ) in the 
second syllable. As a matter of fact, most of the Inf. cstrs. of 
middle e verbs end in o. a 

3 - 'FlifcbS- Z H3B5- 8 EFlJfi3- Verbs middle 5 retain o, 

t : |t t : ||T v : T |: 

under the tone, throughout the Perf; 1 but in an open syllable with- 
out the tone it becomes S e wa (§ 14. 3. r. 3) ; 2 and in a shut syllable 
without the tone, Qamec-hatiiph (§ 2. k. 2). 3 In the forms follow- 
ing the Perf, verbs middle e and middle o conform to the same law 
of vocalization, excepting the Participles (Qal; see § 19), which 
take the form of the Perf (3. s. m.). h 

a The middle e verbs, strong and weak, most used are the following : 

pu rzn n™, k&&, tfn\ kt, -m, *6& (trans, orintrans.), na, tai 

S -!& Kjum ^Stl*- In addition, there is a considerable number of verbs which 
in the ground-form are either middle e or a, but which are always middle e in 
Pause (§ 6. 4. e.), and take e as a pretonic vowel before a suffix, in all cases without 
change of sense. 

6 The following are the more common middle 5 verbs : *"|iK, tTlS? 3112? 



36 IMPERFECT AND WAV CONSECUTIVE. 

Rem. 1. — Both forms of the Inf. cstr., 7£p, HH^ may take a feminine 
ending (JT^tDp? i"HD3), ail( i may then be used either as proper infinitives or 
substantives. These forms are mostly found in the intransitive verbs. 

Rem. 2. — There are about thirty middle a verbs which take a also in the 
second syllable of the Impf. (Qal) ; and about twenty that may have either a or 6. 



ttftS *>e ashamed. fittfS* 1 /- shame. 

Jj5tt 2 beold. fpi old. 

JCP 3 be afraid. £T fearing, figy* 

/.' fear. 
tfStt 4 "be full. S^ft full. $bte* m. 

fulness. 
^!}J* 5 be (lax) foolish, wither, fade. 



S^i foolish. nbS3t /• folly. 

bi> (i) m. psaltery.' tfEU*/. 

corpse. 
ftDpt be small, young. jftp small. 

|t?p G small. 
Sitttf* "be low, humbled. fibst? 7 /• 

plain, valley. 



1 Mn. "Ishbosheth" (fittf^"^*^ 2 Sam. ii. 8). 2 The connection between 
being old and "cane" (?p) is not remote. Xote also form of first letter. 
3 i and ) are interchangeable in certain *"% verbs ; and fc^l approaches, in sense 
and sound, "wary." 4 Mn. "Millo" (^l^^H = the Filling, fortification, a part 
of ancient Jerusalem, 1 Kings ix. 15). 5 Mn. "Xabal" (7^3 fool, 1 Sam. xxv. 

T T 

25), originally so called from unresponsiveness, like the unstrung cord of a viol. 
Note the same general idea in the other words. 6 Mn. "Joktan" (flop's Gen. 
x. 25), a descendant of Shem. Was he smaller or simply younger? 7 "She- 
phelah" = the Lowlands, one of the districts of southern Palestine. 

Exercise. — Abraham (Drl^DX) was old (see b. 1). 
Abraham was very 2 rich. 11 Thou hast acted foolishly 
(been foolish). And the leaf (PI^S) has faded. I am 
small. This (/.) will be small (b. 2). He will be humbled. 
Thou art humbled (Perf.). They were not 11 able. 9 She 
was not able. I was able. Jehovah shall be glorious. 11 
I" fear (Part.) God. 

Rem. 1. — With a finite verb (a verbal sentence), the order of words in a sentence 
is usually : (negative) verb, subject, object. In a nominal sentence (substantive 
or pronoun) with its predicate (substantive, adjective, or participle), the order 
is : subject, predicate. An adverb limiting an adjective follows it. 

Rem. 2. — In this Exercise the Impfs. are in a. 



§ 18. LENGTHENED FORM OF THE IMPERFECT AND WAW 

CONSECUTIVE. 

1. : nbtppK I will kill, let me (I would like to) kill; nbtjpj 
let us kill. It has been seen (§ 15. 4. r. 2; § 17. 2) that the Imp. 



IMPERFECT AND WAW CONSECUTIVE. 3< 

besides its ordinary form has also a lengthened one,- generally 
expressive of strong desire, entreaty. Following this analogy, there 
is also a lengthened form of the Impf. called the Cohortative. 
It is formed in the same way as the lengthened Imp. by append- 
ing ah (f] ) to the ordinary form. 1 This paragogic fl u takes the' 

T T 

tone like ] and ^ . With, few exceptions, it is found only with 

the 1st Pei's. {s. and pi.), but occurs in all classes of verbs, and- 
in all Imperfects excepting, naturally, the Passives. It indicates- 
the special direction of the will toward the act, and carries the ide'a- 
of purpose, wish, or exhortation {pi.). 1 

Rem. — That the vowel originally under the tone is volatilized before ah, 
the latter attracting the tone to itself, is in harmony with a law already con- 
sidered (§ 6. 5. k. ; § 14. 3. r. 3). 

2. Waw consecutive. 1 "In those days Hezekiah was sick {Perf) 
. . . and (Waw consecutive) there came {Impf.) to him Isaiah . . . 
and (Waw consec.) said {Impf.) " : 2 Kings xx. 1. 2 " Lest he put 
forth {Impf) his hand and (Waw consec.) take {Perf) . . . and 
(Waw consec) live {Perf) forever": Gen. iii. 22. It has been 
observed- (§ 16. 2) that the Perf. and Impf of the Hebrew verb 
are not limited to the expression of time past and future respec- 
tively. They have also a still more marked peculiarity in their 
relation of sequence to one another. In a narrative of past events, 
for example, only the first of the verbs is ordinarily put in the Perf 
Those that follow are in the Impf., the narrative being looked 
upon as continuous from, that point. 1 On the other hand, if a series 
of events be regarded as taking place in the future, the verb intro- 
ducing the narrative will be put in the Impf; while those that 
follow will be in the Perf., the matter described being looked upon 
by the narrator as completed (in the future). 2 This peculiar conse- 
cution of the Perf. and Impf is indicated by what is known as 
Waw consecutive ; that is, by a *\ so pointed as generally to denote 
when joined to a Perf. or Impf. that it sustains this peculiar rela- 
tion to the verb next preceding. 

Rem. 1. — The original form of Waw consec. was wa (*|). 

Rem. 2. — Waw consec. is always joined to the verbs successively which it is 
expected to affect, the same being placed at the head of the connected clauses. 
If this order is broken (in prose) , a new start has to be made. 

Rem. 3. — It is not necessary, though usual, that Waw consec. should te 
preceded by a verb in the Perf. or Impf. An Imp. or Part., or some statement 
or implication of past or future time, may suffice to begin the series. For 
example, a number of books of the Bible begin with the Impf. and Waw consec, 
implying the existence of the book or books preceding. 



38 1MPEEFECT AND WAW CONSECUTIVE. 

3 - ^fcp*! and lie killed. 2 "|ftK*l and ne saicl (ItiW = 
Impf. of *n^^). With, the Imp/., Waw consec. has its original 

_ T 

form (*\) ; and on account of its close connection with its word, 
the letter following, if not a guttural, has D. forte. 1 Still further, 
wa being a syllable prefixed, it attracts the tone toward it, from the 
final to the penultimate syllable — if the latter be an open syllable, 
and the tone is not already on it — with a corresponding change 
(shortening) of the final vowel (§ 3. 3). 2 

Eem. 1. — Before fc$ of the 1st Pers., wliicli does not admit a D. forte, Waw 
consec. becomes ) (§ 5. 1). DtDiDKl- 

T I : v IT 

Eem. 2. — Before the prefix i, the pointing is ), and D. forte is omitted (§ 4. 2. 

footnote; § 9. r. 3). bfiSjTl- 

Eem. 3. — The 1st Pers. s. retains the tone on the final syllable. ^^JO- 
Eem. 4. — Waw consec. is not infrequently — mostly, however, in the later 

books — joined to the Cohortative form niftk^l an -d I kept. Its usual demand 

for a shortened form of the Impf., when such a form is possible, will be specially 

noted hereafter. 

4. 1 75j2pl and ne will* kill; j-pn^ and it will (be) come to pass. 
2 r) l "I^yi and thou shalt stand. With the Perf., Waw consec. takes 

t : - it : 

the pointing of Waw copulative (§ 13) under the same circumstances, 1 
and the tone is often thrown forward upon the final syllable, if it be 
not already there. 2 The projection of the tone serves to distinguish 
Waw consec. from Waw copulative. It also well indicates the force 
of the former with the Perf, the thought being thrown forward by 
it into the future, in harmony with the verb that precedes." 



1£ h 3 learn, (in some forms) teach. 



SID draw near. S*)D (i) m. midst. 

-It v]v 

fS^lp 4 w*. gift, sacrifice. Slip 
near, neighbor. 
sjftttf 5 tear. rWfcttf*/- report. 



plSl 1 slaughter, (especially for) sacri- 

- T , 

fice. HSi (i) m - slaughtering, sacrifice. 
nllTft m - altar. 
""|St 2 remember. ^jSt m - male. 

- T T T 

rOtDt slaughter, (especially for) eat- 

- T 

ing. ilStO* guard (executioner). 
PDtb t m. slaughter. 

1 Of. PDID- 2 Mn. "Zechariah" (IH^Dt Jehovah has remembered). ISt 

- T T : - : T t 

distinguishes the male (sexually) as i"OP? the female. 3 Mn. "Talmud" 
OlttSfi) = that which is taught. 4 Mn. "Corban" (Mk. vii. 11). 5 Mn. 
"Ishmael" (baCft^ Godheareth). 

° The shifting of the tone never occurs in Pause (§ 6. 4. e.) ; with the 1st Pers. 
pi. ; when another tone syllable would immediately follow ; or in certain other 
forms of the Strong and Weak verbs to be noted when they occur. 



VOICES OF THE VERB. 



39 



Exercise. — Let us draw near. keep 15 this (§ 15. 4. r.2). 
hear ! (Imp/. =2E*0 § 17. 2). Let us hear. And (w.c.) 
ye shall sacrifice. And (w.c.) I remembered. They shall 
hear and (w.c.) shall keep. And (w.c.) thou shalt stand. 5 
He heard and (w.c.) kept. I have heard and. (w.c.) re- 
membered. In (5) the midst. And (w.c.) God remembered 
Noah (HiTl& § 2. vocab.). 



§ 19. VOICES OF THE VERB. 

1- ll ^t2p- The Per/. 3. s. m. of the verb, as inflected above 
(§ 14), is one of its simplest forms, and is accordingly taken as a 
gronnd-form. 1 Cf. § 16. 5. r. For the same reason this stem 
throughout is called the Qal (i.e., light) stem. 

Rem. 1. — The Hebrew verb is found in lexicons and generally cited in gram- 
mars under this form, excepting verbs Y$ an( i *"V (§ 14. 2) whose Inf. cstr. is 
given. Tf 1 ^ rule ; but Q^p to rise up. 

Re3i. 2. — For convenience this form of the verb is translated in vocabularies 
as though it were an Inf. cstr. ^l2i3 kill, or to kill; lit., he has killed. 

- I T 

Rem. 3. — This same form of the Q. (theoretically, when stripped of its 
vowels) is generally used to represent the root of Hebrew words of three letters 
(§ 14. 1) ; though a nominal root of the same form may exist alongside of it 
(^Q1 = ""D^ or ""D *!) ; ar >d there is a class of verbs called Denominatives, 

T T T 

which is derived directly from nouns, themselves primitive or derivative. 
7,1X hve in a tent, from 7H& 33 "tent. 



2. 



by& 


Qal 


bvp T 


Qal 


by*>i 


Mph'al 


^p? 


Xiqtal 


ta 


Pi'el 


bsp 


Qittel 


br&. 


Pu'al 


■fcj? 


Quttal 


b^nri 


Hithpa'el 


btepm 


Hithqattel 


brssn 


Hiphll 


b'vpri 


Hiqtil 


- : T 


Hoph'al 


bppn 


Hoqtal 



Besides the primitive stem of the verb (Qal), there are several 
others based upon it and used to express various modifications of 
the verbal idea. These different formations have generally received 
the name " Conjugations " ; but they are less incorrectly named 



40 THE NIQTAL. 

Voices. The derived stems (or voices) are formed from the Q. stem 
by means of prefixes, certain vowel changes, and the repetition of 
the second or third radical letter. The several Voices of the Hebrew 
verb (excepting Qal) have commonly received their names from the 
forms they took with the verb ^J^S, which was formerly nsed as a 
paradigm (§ 14. 2). But since that verb has been rejected as a para- 
digm, because poorly adapted to the purpose, and S{^5 nas been 
generally substituted for it, it seems more practical to use the latter 
as the basis of designation. Familiarity with the old names, how- 
ever, will be found necessary in using the lexicon and other gram- 
mars ; hence both are given. Few verbs appear in all the Voices ; 
some are found only in a single one. 



V7|3 4 be light, hold light, curse. 

- It 

Thbp*f- curse. 

T T I: 

nStT 5 settle, lie down. D3tTfc w. 

- T T : • 

lying down, bed. 
D^tt? rise up (early). DwtT t m. 

- T VI 

shoulder. 



TQ* deceive, deal treacherously. 

*"^Q 1 (i) w. a garment. 
^^7 take (prey, a city, etc.), choose 

- T 

out. 
HpS 2 take. 
Op 3 rise up, (Hi.) establish. Hftlp 

/. height. Diptt c. place. 

1 The connection between noun and verb seems to be the same as between 
robe and rob, the garment being the thing oftenest stolen. 2 This and the pre- 
ceding word are to be carefully distinguished in form and sense. 3 Mn. ra\ei6d 
kovi*= u Damsel, Arise !■" Mk. v. 41. 4 Mn. Qal. 5 This word and the next 
should be associated. The root of each means to bow, that of D^tT to let down 

- T 

the shoulder (used of the camel, etc.) for the (early) morning burden. 



20. THE NIQTAL (Mph'al). 



Perf. . . . btOp? Inf. cstr. . . . StDpH Imp. . . . SttpP! 

Part. . . . SDpi Inf. abs. . . . SbpH (or StojJJ) I™Pf ■ ■ • bfcj^ 



1. This Voice is formed by prefixing J to the primitive stem. 
Throughout the Strong verb its original vowel a has been thinned to i. 
The prefix J actually appears only in the Perf., Part., and one form 
of the Inf. abs. In the Inf. cstr. and related parts, the syllable in 
— Kin for distinctness — is used, whose n is then assimilated to 
the first radical (§ 4. 2. r.). The aspirate [-J is used with it, 



THE NIQTAL. 41 

except in the Impf., which, has prefixes of its own, where ^ is 
syncopated. 

Rem. 1. — The characteristic sign of the Ni. is for the Perf. and Part, a pre- 
fixed } ; for the remaining parts a D. forte (compensative) in the first radical. 

Rem. 2. — The tone in the Inf., Imp., and Impf. is generally retracted (— in 
the last syllable becoming _) when a syllable having the tone follows it imme- 
diately. XJ *lDt^H take heed now. 

T V T • 

Rem. 3. — The Impf. 1. s. may take — as well as — with ^ (§ 5. r. under 
Exercise). Sttl2X- 

~|t ■ 

Rem. 4. — The second form of the Inf. abs. is based on the Perf. as the first 
follows the Inf. cstr. 

Rem. 5. — The inflection of the Ni., on the basis of these typical forms, is 
quite analogous to that of Qal. 

2 - lm )foVJ keep; ^Qttfa keep oneself, take heed. 2ta Qpbnry; 

^fipJ b e buried. In meaning the ISTL is either reflexive 1 (occasionally 

reciprocal), or — what is now more common — passive 2 of the Qal. 



rV^S 1 /- covenant. 
D32*' 2 steal. 

- T 

""|£3 3 cover, atone. *"p£3 m. a young 
lion. ^|Sit m. bribe. rH&3*/- 
(cover of the ark) mercy-seat. 

71^13 x cut, cut off. 

*"Dft 4 sell. 



T^lS break, break in. 'tt'Hjp* 5 (i) m. 

a breach. 
r< £H3 6 break, spread, scatter. 

- T 

tlJ'IIS w*- rider, riding-horse. 

07tl? be whole, well, at peace. Qibt!? 

m. peace. Dytl? 7 »** (mostly pi.) 

peace-offering. 
^fft'tt) 8 smite, destroy. 



1 R. = cut (like that of ]7H3)> so, separate, decide. rVHS an( i H^lS (" cut 

- T • : - T 

a covenant") are often found together. 2 Note 2d syl., nab. 3 Cf. ^!3p- 15 
Mn. "cover." The young lion was so called on account of his luxuriant main. 
The bribe covered the eyes. * Cf. Lat. mercator, merchant. 5 Mn. ■"Perez" — 
Uzzah, 2 Sam. vi. 8. 6 Mn. " Pharisee " = the separated. The roots tl?1£ and 
t£?'-|2 are allied in sense (the idea of the rider being of one who springs forward, 
breaks away). ~ Mn. "Salaam" (= peace), a form of salutation in the East. 
8 Cf. the root-letters with the consonants of " smite.'" 

Exercise. — And if ( ("DS 2 ) it shall be stolen (Ni.). And 
(w.c.) that soul (ttfjjM/.) shall be cut off. And he (w.c.) 
shall be sold. The land (/.) 9 shall not be sold. And 
thou (w.c.) shalt spread abroad. In peace. They shall be 
scattered. And I (w.c.) shall be destroyed. Ye shall be 
utterly (Ni. Inf. abs. ; § 15. 2) destroyed. To be destroyed. 
I will be sanctified 6 (Ni.). I loill be honored 11 (Ni. 
Cohort.). He was shut in. 16 Shut thyself in (Ni.). 



42 THE QITTEL, QUTTAL, AND HITHQATTEL. 

§ 21. THE QITTEL (Pi'el), QTTTTAL (Pual), AND 
HITHOATTEL (ffithpael). 

per/. hop b&p ^®pnn 

w. »»■ Step b©pnn 

^/. «&* bgp 6tsp) bbp • ^pnn 

jwp bep ^tsprn 

imp/. h®p s b®tf s .-■ ^ftprr 

pan btepfc ^i?£--- bibpxje 



1. The most characteristic mark of these Voices is the doubling 
of the middle radical throughout j another, common to the first two, 
is the S e wa (originally a vowel) under the preformatives. The 
vowel in the first syllable of Qi. (orig. a> as in Q., Ni.) has been 
thinned in the Perf. to i,. though appearing in all the other forms of 
this Voice and everywhere in Hithq. The original vowel of the 
second syllable (a) appears in all forms of the Perf. having affixes 
beginning with a consonant (see table below) ; elsewhere in the Qi. 
and Hithq. it has been thinned to i, and then, under the influence of 
the tone, heightened to e (§2. table). In the Inf. abs., 6 of the 
final syllable is from an original d (as in Q.). 

Rem. 1. — The prefix £ in the Participles of these and the following Voices 
is connected with the Interrogative Pronoun, ifo (one who ). 

Rem. 2. — Three verbs, when not in Pause, take e instead of e in the Perf. 
3. s. m. *)%% D23, nS3- 

Rem. 3. — The D. forte in the middle radical of verbs of these Voices may be 
dropped when such letter is not supported by a full vowel (§ 4. 2. foot-note). 

2. The Qu. is still further characterized by a so-called " dark 
vowel " u (rarely o) in the first syllable. It lacks the Inf. cstr. 
(except Ps. cxxxii. 1) and the Imp. 

3. The Hithq. is formed directly from the Qi. by restoring the 
original vowel of its first syllable and prefixing the syllable Hith. 
In the Impf. and Part., which are provided with other prefixes, the 
weak fi of the prefix ^^ is syncopated after such prefixes. 

Rem. — If the first radical is a sibilant (§ 1. 5), the H of the prefix changes 
places with it, for euphonic reasons (as ^IJSnt^H for *"|£3tITirO- If» further, 
that sibilant is ^, the ]-| not only changes places with it, but is itself changed to 
tO (as p'sftQiCTl f° r p*lSMVT)- I f j again, the stem begin with the Linguals 



THE QITTEL, QUTTAL, AND HITHQATTEL. 43 

Di *7> or t£ (occasionally }, ^ ; ^, 1j t? once each), the ]~] of the prefix is 
assimilated to it, the same being indicated by D. forte compensative (as '"intD!"! 
for intern purify oneself). 

4. 1 *Q^ shiver (Q. break). 2 *HSD recount, relate (Q. count) ; 

^1^*1 persecute (Q. follow) ; *l3p bury many (Q. bury). 3ta T^^ 

teach (Q. learn). - 4 23]| be stolen. The Qi. Voice as related to the 

Q. mostly carries the idea of intensity, 1 including that of repetition; 2 
occasionally that of causation. 3 The Qu. is the Passive of Qi. (some- 
times of the Q.). 4 

5. 1 ty^Tpnn sanctify oneself. 2 nK""^!"! look at one another. 
3 nnSnH (§ *>. 2) open for oneself. 4 H ^HUH feign oneself sick. 

- - : • t - : • 

5,f l^^nty ,l, they will be forgotten. The Hithq. Voice holds nearly 
the same relation to the Qi. that the Ni. does to the Q. It is (1) 
chiefly reflexive (intensive); 1 but, also, (2) reciprocal; 2 (3) medial 
(do for oneself); 3 (4) has the idea of giving oneself out as some- 
thing ; 4 and (5) rarely has a Passive signification. 5 



nOS 5 open. nrilS (0 m. door. 

STT") 6 follow. 

nptl? 7 forget. 

p*^ 8 settle down, dwell. |3#fi 



Tabernacle. 



^iPltO 1 be clean. TintS clean. 

■■ T T 

i^fttD De unclean. KfttD wi. unclean. 

•• T T 

nXJpp * /• uncleanness. 
DD3 2 tread, wash. \I?D3 3 m, lamb. 

- 7 V V , 

iriD 4 cover, hide. IHD* (i) »*■ 

- T V - 

hiding-place, covert, secrecy. 

1 Assoc, with following (clean, unclean), which also begins with ft. 2 Washing 
was done by treading. Fix in mind as one of the three exceptions named above. 
3 R. allied to that of Cl'Z'D- i Qi- Part. = "inD^ with which compare mystery. 
5 Mn. Pathah. Cf. TyT^i § 3- 6 Mimetic. Repeated, the word sounds like the 
hoof -beat. 7 Same radicals TTylTT 5 (here darkness of memory). 8 Mn. " Shekinah," 
connected with the Tabernacle. 

Exercise. — Thou hast spoken. 6 He has spoken. Wash 
thou. Let him wash. And he (w.c.) washed. Is not 
(§11. 4. r. 3) David (TPT) hiding himself (Hithq. Party. 
I will cause to dwell (Cohort.). On (in) 12 the Sabbath. 16 
The heavens 10 recount 12 (Part.) the glory of God 
(^S"nl33). How 11 shall we justify ourselves ? 13 Sanc- 
tify yourselves. 6 To sanctify. (The one) sanctified. 
He made atonement. 20 Atonement was made (Qu.). 

Rem. — Only the Voices treated in the present section are to be used in this 
Exercise. 



44 THE HIQTIL AND HOQTAL. 

§ 22. THE HIQTIL (Hvpliil) AND HOQTAL (HopJial). 



Hi. Hi. Ho. 

^rf. bnopn /top/. S^|T Ptei/- bejjn 

Inf. cstr ^tOpH (Jussive) ^tDjT /«/. a&s StOpH 

/n/. ate btDpn (Jussive) ^pf] 7mp/. St^T 

j»»i> bepn -p«^ ^tpp£ Parf ^tpp& 



1. The characteristic mark of the Hi. and Ho. Voices in the Perf. 
is a prefixed f| ; in the Inf. and related forms (including the Part.) 
of the Hi. it is the vowel a, of the Ho. the dark vowel o (or u) 
under the preformative letter. Both the vowels in the Hi. Perf. 
were originally a. The first has been uniformly thinned to t; the 
second (as Inf. cstr., etc., following verbs Y'!9) becomes %, except 
before consonantal suffixes, and takes the tone. In the Inf. cstr. and 
related parts (also the Part.), an original i of the second syllable 
has been lengthened to %, except in the ground-form of the Imp. and 
in the Jussive (see 2), where the normal heightening of i to e under 
the tone has taken place." 

Rem. 1. — It will be noted that the final vowel of the Inf. abs. in these Voices 
is e (like the dominant Inf. abs. Qi. ) . 

Rem. 2. — The Ho. Part., like the other two Pass. Part., has a in the last 
syllable. 

2- 'n^BplT 2 ^tP|?!T 3 ^©pH It has been seen (§ 15. 
4. r. 2; § 17. 2; § 18. 1) that both the Imp. and Impf. may have 
lengthened forms with an accompanying change of sense. Ordinary 
forms of the Imp. and Impf. may also be shortened. In the Strong 
Verb this takes place only in the Hi. Voice ; namely, in the ground- 
form of the Imp. and in the Impf. (chiefly 2. and 3. s.). The ordinary 
form of the Imp. maintains itself only when without augment at the 
end. In the case of the lengthened Imp., 1 and with inflectional and 
other additions, 2 it assumes its normal state. The Impf. Jussive is 
used to express a command, wish, or (with ^^) a prohibition. 
Such forms have arisen from a natural effort to speak the word 
quickly. Connected with this is a tendency to draw back the tone 
from the final syllable. And inasmuch as the same tendency was 

° The form H^StoprKImpf. 2. and 3. /. pi), although found in the table below, 
does not occur; but the Imp. 2./. pi. follows this analogy. pUDtOpn 



GUTTURAL VERBS. 45 

observed with Waw consec. of the Impf., we often find the two forms 

agreeing orthographically. 3 

3- ^y^HpH sanctify (Q. be holy); p^SH declare righteous 
(Q. be righteous). 2 *V3JH show one's self strong (Q. be strong). 
3 ^1*^2? n ^ s ( nas been) cast away (Hi. to cast away). In sense 
the Hi. is (much oftener than Qi.) a causative Voice. With a per- 
sonal object it is indirectly causative; i.e., such person is caused to 
do or be the thing denoted by the verb. 1 Without a personal object 
it is directly causative ; i.e., the thing itself denoted by the verb 
becomes the object. 2 The Ho. is Pass, of the Hi., sometimes of 
the Q. 3 



SlH3 »»■ coast, border (see following). 
*"Q2 1 be strong, prevail. ^1^3 m - hero. 

prTQI/ strength. nn| («*r. *op 

m. man (poetic). 
pD"! cleave, follow closely, hard. 
h'CS' 2 stumble. 



w"2S 3 clothe. *C*nS m. clothing. 
H£J fall. Mn. "Nepkilim " : Gen. vi. 4. 

- T 

nS?2J 4 send, stretch forth. ?|"nt27 m. 

- t It:.. 

table. 
T?t2? 5 (Hi. and Ho.) cast down, away, 
out. 



1 One of a series of words beginning with ^3 which mean be rounded out, 
gibbous. This word = be high: so strong ; the preceding, be high, and so mark- 
ing a boundary. 2 Sometimes associated with ^£3 "stumble and fall." 3 A 

- T 

pupil suggests lavish (i.e., in clothing) as mnemonic. i Mn. "Siloam" (StAwo/x, 
John ix. 7, '"by interpretation Sent"). 5 To be associated with preceding; 
the one = throw out; the other, throw down. 

Exercise. — All the coast of Yisra'el. The waters 3 pre- 
vailed (Q.) exceedingly. 2 And he (w.c.) shall make strong 
a covenant. 20 And he (w.c.) followed hard (Hi.). They 
stumbled and fell. Ye have caused to stumble. And he 
(w.c.) shall cleave. He cast away. To cast away. I 
was cast away. Cast not (^X) away (§ 15. 4). And she 
(w.c.) cast down. And thou art cast out. The head 3 
shall be (Part.) cast out. He sent. They sent. He put 
forth the hand. 3 And he (w.c.) shall fall. She fell. 



§23. GUTTURAL VERBS.— AN INITIAL GUTTURAL. 

1. Guttural Verbs are those having gutturals (including ^, j!\) 
among their radical letters. ^ is regarded as a guttural only when 
used as a consonant (not when a vowel-letter, and so quiescent). 
For the peculiarities of f] and ^, see §1.4, §5.5, respectively. The 



46 



GUTTURAL VERBS. 



latter section might now be reviewed with profit, since it contains 
the general principles distinguishing, in their inflection, the guttural 
from other Strong verbs. 



Perf. s. 3. to. 

3./. 

2. TO, 

pi. 2. TO, 



Inf. cstr. 
Inf. abs. 



Imp. s. to. . 
pl.f. 



Impf. s. 3. m, 

2./- 

1. c. 

pi. 3. /. 

Part. act. . . . 
Part. pass. . . 



mas 

T : it 

mfcy 

T : - T 

nb^ 



rMrtto 

T : ■: 

• : - i- 
t : -: i~ 

itiv 
lib? 



PICJ 

'Pin 



TOW 

pffJK 

rroinn 



TBJ3 

■Tf?H 

T : - v: iv 

.. T ,.. 

" T I" 

• : it •• 

PtHfeWl 

t : - T I" 

" T I" 
• : IT " 

imx 

" T I" 

nnbsn 

T : - t I" 

nM3 



Hi. 

rmtan 

T • v: iv 

nrtton 

T : •• -: i- 
t : •• -: i- 



Ho. 

insr\ 

- t: it 

phmpi 

T : T IT 



v : - t: IT 



wantim 



l&l 

- t: it 



lt2T 

- t: it 

• : T IT 

- t: it 



ibvto 



2. 1 ^IH^- The following are the chief points of difference 
between the verb whose typical forms are given in the table and the 
ordinary Strong verb : (1) An initial guttural requiring S e wa takes 
a Hateph. (2) With a preformative letter the guttural is either 
closely joined to it (mostly f"J), forming a shut syllable, 1 or it is 
loosely joined, forming a half-open syllable (§ 3. 4). In the latter 
case, which is by far the more common, if the second radical has a 



a Typical forms only are given in this and a few subsequent tables. The 
remaining ones can easily be supplied by the student on the basis of 7tDp> 
following the analogy of the typical forms. 



GUTTURAL VERBS. 47 

vowel, the guttural will take a Hatepli corresponding to the short 
vowel of the pref ormative ; if the vowel of the second radical is 
volatilized the guttural will take a short vowel corresponding to 
that of the pref ormative (Q. Impf. 2.f. s., 3. m., 2. m.pl, etc.). The 
vocalization is further disturbed (changed from the a class of vowels) 
only when an original a thinned to i (§ 5. 2) lies at the basis of the 
form (Pert M., Hi., etc.). (3) When the initial guttural would, 
if an ordinary letter, be doubled, compensation is made for the 
doubling by heightening the preceding vowel (Ni. Inf., Imp., 
Impf.). 

Rem. 1. — The vowel i of the Q. Imp. 2. s.f. is explained elsewhere (§ 12. r. 1). 
Rem. 2. — Some forms of pfpf are given (Q. Imp., Impf.) as an example of a 
/erb whose Imp. and related parts take a. 

Rem. 3. — The Qi. and Qu. Voices are omitted as offering no irregularities. 



1 /. stone. 
FpN 2 collect, assemble. 
}JlbX 3 he faithful, true, (Hi.) believe. 

?TM£K /■ faithfulness. n£K (= 

n3£K) /• truth. 
pin 4 De strong, (Hi.) lay hold of. 

pin strong. 
^nn 5 cease, leave off. 



n^onb) 6 ™. heart; P i. nisb. 

""O^ 7 P ass over, along. *"Q^ m. pas- 

- T V " 

sage (ford), place of passage, the 
beyond, T1D37* /• (overflow of) 
anger. 
^13J 8 leave, forsake. 

"TO help. ^t4* (0 (Tin?/-) help. 



1 Mn. "Ebenezer" (= Iflj}, D&), 1 Sam. iv. 1. 2 Asaph (FpX) was a collector 
of psalms : 1 Ch. vi. 24. 3 Mn. and deriv. "Amen." 4 Mn. " Hezekiah " (Tptfl 
strength of Jehovah). 5 Discrim. from ^JTJJ (see § 15). 6 The heart, too, needs 
lav-ing. 7 Origin of the word "Hebrew," as those coming over the Jordan or 
Euphrates. 8 Used by our Lord (in Aramaic form) on the cross (Fi^h? tltiibi 

T : - T T T 

cf. Ps. xxii. 2) : Matt, xxvii. 46. 

Exercise. — They were not able 9 to stand. 5 'Abhraham 
believed in (5) Jehovah. Forsake not wisdom. 3 The 
people 9 had not assembled themselves (Ni. Perf.). Be 
strong. And (w.c.) the men 9 laid hold. The land (f.) 9 
shall be forsaken (Ni.). Jehovah hath helped. She left 
off speaking (Qi. Inf.). 6 Pass along {pi.). He made pass 
over. He stood 5 before (^B?) Jehovah. I have served. 8 
Holding in service (Hi. Part.). I am (Ni. Perf.) helped. 
To be helped. 



48 



VERBS WITH A MEDIAL GUTTURAL. 



24. VERBS WITH A MEDIAL GUTTURAL. 



Perf. s. 3. to. 

3./. 

2. m 

pi. 2. TO 



Inf. cstr. 
Inf. abs. 



Imp. s. m. . . . 

f ... 

pl.f. ... 



Impf. s. 3. to. 

2-/. 

1. c. 

pi. 3. /. 



Part ac£. . 
Part. pass. 



tow 

- T 

mow 

T -: IT 
T : _ T 

ornpotf 

to'w 
BlW 

T 

toW 

rutoW 



npwn 
toWa 

rutoWn 



tontr 

WW 



tow? 
ntoWJ 

town 
toiw? 

ronton 

^toWn 

• -: it • 

rutoWn 

T : - T • 

toW 

• -: IT • 

toWK 

•• T V 

mtown 

T : - t • 

toWJ 



Qi. 



nana 

T -: I" 

nana 

T : - •• 

nnaia 



"ana 

• ■: it 

ruana 

T : - t 

TO 

^anan 



TO 
nana 

nana 

T : - 

nnan'a 



TO 

^an'an 



Hithq. 

ronann 

t ■: it : • 

naiann 

T : - T : • 

Dnanann 

v : - it : • 

TWO 

• -: it : • 

rwnanri 

T : - T : • 

TO 

^anann 



njanari njan'an njanann 



1. The following changes from verbs non-guttural, in addition to 
those referred to in the preceding section, are worthy of notice : 
(1) The original _ has been restored, through the influence of the 
guttural, in the first syllable of the Q. Imp., in the forms ending 
in ^— and *). (2) By the same influence, __ is introduced in the 
last syllable of the Q. Imp. and Impf. This change is no more 
general elsewhere, because a guttural has less influence on a follow- 
ing than on a preceding vowel. 

Rem. 1. — The change to the verb ^pQ m the last three Voices is because 
*1 alone in this position (except Ezek. xvi. 4) requires compensation for an 
omitted D. forte by heightening the preceding vowel. The other gutturals 
Q?i IT !"N an( l sometimes fc$) permit D. forte to be simply implied (§ 5. 1). 

nro. (Qi-) nw. 



VERBS WITH A FINAL GUTTURAL. 49 

Rem. 2. — The vowel heightened through the omission of D. forte is unchangeable. 

Rem. 3. — The letter *| takes a composite in place of simple 6 e wa in forms of 

the Qi. and related Voices before syllables beginning with ^, and having the tone. 



p^Ji (andpjtf) cry out. 

DT13 m. Cherub. 

D*"D 2 c. vineyard. 

Drf? 3 (Q.) eat, fight; (Ni.) fight. 

nrh ™. bread, ntiftbfo /• war. 
trHty burn. Mn. "Seraph." 



tDnti? 4 slay (espec.) for sacrifice. 
nntT 4 corrupt, destroy. fipltb t /. 

corruption, destruction. 
lOpty* 5 De quiet, rest. 
rniT CQ'-) serve, minister, (Qi. Part.) 

n^lt^^l 6 servant, . minister. 



1 Mimetic. 2 With servile letter b = 7)^13? i- e -, vineyard-like. 3 Mn. 

» Bethlehem " (= D|-ft, ITS)- 4 »■ tlt> = oe low ; npfttf , HITO 49 sink ; tDTTtS^ 
... ..... _ T T T _ T 

lay low, riPfttf destroy. 5 Discrim. from tOHtT- 6 Syn. of ID^- Tne latter is 
more slavish, the former voluntary, noble service. 

Exercise. — They cried unto (""?X) Jehovah. David 
(TH) blessed (Qi.) Jehovah. To strengthen (Qi.). 23 Whom 
H#8) thoublessest (Qi. Impf.) he shall be blest (Qu. Part.). 
Pass not 15 now 3 along. 23 Ask (/.). 12 Fight ye (Ni. m.). 
And (w.c.) the earth (/.) was corrupt (Ni.). To destroy 
(Hi.). Destroy thou (Hi. m.). I am destroying (Hi. Part.). 
He slew the lamb. 21 And thou (w.c.) shalt burn the city 
(TS). To serve. They shall minister. I will cut off: 
(Hi.'). 20 They have cut ofT. To cleanse (Qi.). 21 



§ 25. VERBS WITH A FINAL GUTTURAL. 



Perf.s. 3. m fiStf? 

- T 

3./. nnbv 

T : it 

2./. nrtto 

: - - t 

pi2.m nnrbtf 

Inf. cstr rbp 

inf. abs nibtr 

T 

Imp. s. m TlbV) 

/• viv 

pi./- mrbv 



Ni. 


Qi. 


Hi. 


rib®: 


nbw 


rrbtfn 


nrbw: 


nnbv7 


nrpfttfn 


nrbtii 


mbw 


nrhtn 


nfirbf) 


nnthxp 


nnnbtrn 


nbvn 


n 1 ?*? 


n^t^n 


tfy& 


n^tr 


rfen 


rbtin 


nW 


nbtri 


*rbvn 


vfc& 


V'bwn 


nrbtin 


mni'ti 


runbvn 



50 



VERBS WITH A FINAL GUTTURAL. 





Q. 


m. 


Qi. 


m. 


Impf. s. 3. m.. . . 


... rfy& 


rh& 


rt?& 


nhw 


2./.... 


... Vbtfy) 


rbvr\ 

• : it • 


VWn 


*nhv$ 


I.e....'. 


• • • rbm 


nbt^K 


rff0$ 


\rh^x 


pi. 3. /. . . . 


. • • rvnbvzn 

T : - : 


T : - T 


njitfltofi 


njnStrn 


Part, act - 


rbw 


rbw: 


niwfc 


rrbtffc 


Part, pass 


■ ■ . n&i? 









1. The characteristic of gutturals most widely exhibited in the 
present class of verbs is that of Pathah furtive, required under a 
final guttural immediately after a heterogeneous long vowel (§ 5.2; 
cf. Q. Inf. cstr., abs., Part. act. and pass. ; Ni. Inf. abs. ; Qi. Inf. abs., 
Part.; Hi. Perf., Inf. cstr. and abs., Impf., Part.). Again, in some 
cases where 6 would otherwise be expected (final syl. of Q. Imp., 
Impf.), we find a, largely through the influence of the final guttural. 
Still further, in final syllables where e would be expected in non- 
guttural Strong verbs (Ni. Inf. cstr., Imp., Impf. ; Qi. Perf., Inf. cstr., 
Imp., Impf.; Hi. Imp.), a is ordinarily to be found, though under 
the influence of the tone it may become e. Finally, in the Perf. s. 
2. f. of all Voices, the guttural, for euphonic reasons, takes in place 
of a silent S e wa a helping Pathah, though the following J"| retains 
its usual pointing (§ 3. 2. foot-note; § 4. 1). Like Pathah furtive, 
this helping vowel cannot have the tone, and disappears when the 
verb takes suffixes. 

2. *nW, nbtf), nby??- *rfam& tya. cstr. the sam e), 

n^"B7tt- The Qu. 1 (Inf. and Imp. wanting), Hith. 2 (Inf. abs. want- 

t : t 

ing), and Ho. 3 (Inf. cstr. and Imp. wanting) Voices have no special 
peculiarities. 



HK2 x /• well, spring. >■ ' 

2J53- 2 split, divide. H2p? t /. valley. 

n"12 3 flee. H^S * m. tolt, "bar. 

- T • : 

HtTft anoint. fPtlJft 4 anointed, Mes- 

- T " • T 

siah. 
^S* 5 meet, press, light upon. 



^*t^S* 6 transgress. "JJt^B (i) m. trans- 

- T - V 

gression. 
^5't^ 7 "be satisfied. 
v^i? (Ni., Hi.) swear. y^p m. 

(TOlttf /•) seven. JlSHttf * /•' oath. 

T : • T : 

^pfi 8 smite, blow (a blast). 



I Mn. with ^Dw "Beersheba": Gen. xxi. 32. 2 The "Beka" (2p3) was 



NOUNS. 51 

the split, i.e., half Shekel. 3 Discrim. from Tp3. 4 Mn. " Messiah." 5 Cf. irdyw, 
pango, pact, etc. 6 Many a "Pasha" transgresses. 7 Discrim. from the follow- 
ing. 8 Mn. "Tekoa" (>1pri, 2 Sam. xiv. 2), properly the place where tent-pins 
were (often) driven in, i.e., a favorite tenting- ground. 

Exercise. — To (^) flee. Fle-e. He made flee. (One) 
making flee. (One) splitting wood (ETSS). It (Ni. /.) 
shall be split. They shall be split (Qn.). They shall be 
cleft (Hithq., cleave themselves). And thou (w.c.) shalt 
anoint as fy) king. 13 He caused to light upon. Trans- 
gressor (Q. "Part.). They transgressed. And (w.c.) Mcab 
(SSitt) transgressed against (5) Israel. Thou art satisfied. 
Ye shall be satisfied (with) bread. 24 The oath which I 
swore (Ni.) to (*?) 'Abhraham. Blow the trumpet ("iBlttJ) 
in Tekoa. If 2 ye shall hearken 18 diligently (§ 15. 2). 



§26. NOUNS. — GENDER AND NUMBER. 

!• lm Q1' 2 mbt2i JTIS- Tne Hebrew lias but two 

t t : • : 

genders, a- masculine and a feminine. Objects regarded as neuter 
in other languages it treats as masc. or fern., more frequently the 
latter. Masc. nouns have in the sing, no peculiarity of form dis- 
tinguishing them as such ; x the endings ^ (with the tone) and fl 

(after a vowel), mark the fern, sing. 2 

Rem. 1. — There are not a few words which are used as either masc. or fern. 
Such are marked here c, ; i.e., common. 

Rem. 2. — The ending |"]_, as already noted (§ 1. 4), often represents an 
original ]")_, which, as will be hereafter seen, needs to "be restored in certain 
forms of the noun and verb. JTVitf = ITT^- 

Rem. 3. — The ending ]"| may mark the fern, in nouns also after a consonant, 
if a helping vowel (_, or __ with a guttural) be used in pronouncing it. 

nntr for rintf ; nr&oo for &&£& 

Rem. 4. — Adjectives, as it respects Gender and Xumber, follow the analogy 
of nouns. 

2. 'n^vi- , D M ik?- 'nniri- 4 d^t t - 5 n^r- N ° uns 

are used in the sing., pi, and (more rarely) dual numbers ; adjectives, 
excepting the numeral for two, 1 in the sing, and pi. only. The end- 
ing of the masc.pl. is generally Q* 1 (or Q ); 2 of the fern. pi. 



52 



NOUNS. 



Di ( or fi) 3 5 °f the du. D^^- 4 The du. is mostly used with things 
occurring in pairs, like certain members of the body, or things 
which may be conceived of as in pairs. 5 



Masc. 



D1t0 mfllD DID ffDID 



Fem nnito ntoito. 



DtDlD 



• HDID D1D1D DTIDW 

T • " T ! 



3. The endings Q^ and Q^J_ are added directly to the masc. sing. 

But before adding the latter to the fem. sing, with |-[ , this ending 

T 

is restored to its original form J^ , the vowel becoming T in an 

open syllable (§3.3). The ending J™)^ is added directly to the 

sing, of nouns not already ending in ( *"J ; but in the case of those 

so ending, the latter is simply changed to the former for the pi. 

Rem. 1. — The changes required in the changeable vowels of a word to which 
syllables attracting the tone to themselves are added will be noted hereafter. 
For the present, the principle is illustrated by words with unchangeable vowels. 

Rem. 2. — There are many nouns having a fem. ending in the sing, which 
take Q^_ in the_pZ.; and, on the other hand, masc. nouns sometimes take ]"l1 m 
the pi. 

Rem. 3. — The pi. ending D*\ is an obscured ath (cf. Q. Inf. abs.), and is 
unchangeable. That it is here, however, a strengthened form of the original 
sing, ending ath is doubtful. 

Rem. 4. — The pi. in Hebrew is used to indicate a variety of relations besides 
plurality ; especially those expressed in other languages by abstract nouns, 
tjiapl (pi. of ifi) = life ; D'WHp most holy : Hos. xii. 1. 



Q*?| to. blood ; related to Dl^K re( l. 
*li* (/■ iTlft) Wtter. Mn. "Marah": 

Ex. xv. 23. 
DID (/• ilDID) horse. 

T 

*1^ wind, press, besiege. "I^ to. 
rock, "l^lit* to. neck. Tiift^m. 

T _ T 

siege, fortress. Mn. "Tyre" (TJ2t)> 
*"Hi£ bind together, shut in, oppress. 



^liU (/• ("Hit) enemy, oppressor. 
Mn. "Tsar." 
"it? (/• iTlW Prince. Mn. "Sarah": 

T T T 

Gen. xvii. 15. 
TtT sing, y®i (/• HTtf) song. 
!"Dttf 2 (Qu., Hi.) give to drink. 

I T T 

nntf (Q-, Ni.) drink. pirittffc m. ban- 
quet. 



1 The heading of a number of Psalms. 2 This verb and the next are defective, 
but mutually supplementary, as will be noted (cf. the root-letters). The p. n. 
"Rabshakeh" (2 Ki. xviii. 17) is usually derived from it (npttf"D*1)> i.e., chief 
cup-bearer ; probably it is the Assyr. Bab-sak, chief captain. 



ANCIENT CASE ENDINGS. 53 

Exercise. — Bullock. 9 Cow. Cows. These (are) the 
good cows. Two mares. The princes. The waters 3 
were" bitter. These mountains 9 are very high. 10 Enemies 
(m.). A new 9 song (in.). He took 19 asses. 11 He did 
not drink from 13 the waters. Wisdom 3 is good. And 13 
with (3) horses. Righteousnesses 13 (/.). Oaths 25 (/.). 
Two talents. 4 Je shall keep 15 the Sabbaths (nl")- 16 Bela' 
reigned 13 in 'Edom. Heroes 22 like 12 those. 

° Rem. — Not infrequently the subject and predicate in clauses of this nature 
are united by the 3d pers.- (sing, or pi. masc. or fern.) of the Pers. Pronoun serving 
as copula (These are, were = HUH PlpSO- When the copula is to be expressed, 
the word representing it will not be inclosed in parentheses. 



§27. ANCIENT CASE ENDINGS. — THE CONSTRUCT STATE. 

i. "inri &r nr\-- om. 1 21 ; b^inQ (wi«? = ne) ! 

Gen. iv. 18 5 ^3 for "TJ : Gen. xlix. 11. It would appear that, 

originally, the Hebrew had. endings to represent, respectively, the 

Norn, and Gen. case. The one was \ ("j or *|), the other ^ . In 

rare instances these endings still remain ; l but their power as case 

endings has entirely ceased. 

1 1 

2. x ^ . 2 n*inn towards the mountain; H^^t^H towards 

the heavens. Another old case ending, however, representing the 
Accusative, generally toneless, has, to some extent, maintained 
itself as well in fact as in form. 1 It is appended to substantives 
mostly to denote direction (whither, more rarely ivhere), and has 
accordingly received the name fj locative. 2 

T 

Rem. 1. — {"] locative being without the tone may be easily distinguished 
from the fern, ending of nouns ; and, for the same reason, it does not usually 
disturb the vocalization of a word to which it is appended. H^'C* thither. 

T T 

Rem. 2. — When appended to a word having a like fern, ending, the latter 
reverts to its original form fl_- H*Ti3? help ; iUTHTS help ! 

T : v T T : v 

3- 1 ^Tp)§nD1D the horse of the king. The relations expressed 
in other languages by case endings are expressed in Hebrew mostly 
by Prepositions. But in addition to what has been said above of 
the Accus., it has also a method of representing the close relation 
ordinarily indicated by the Gen. (subjective and objective), the Adj., 
etc. One noun (the one to be limited) is put before another 



54 



ANCIENT CASE ENDINGS. 



(the one limiting) so as to express with it one idea. 1 The former 
word is said to be in the construct state with the latter, which is in 
the absolute state. 

4 - *ib&ti lm Q*i the word of tne kin g- 2 bs but ~bs- 

Furthermore, since the emphasis of this compound expression is on 
the final word while the first one is hastened over, changeable vowels 
in the first word will be either dropped, volatilized, thinned, or 
shortened; 1 the effect being the same as though the tone were 
removed one place beyond it 2 (§ 3. 3. 4. r ; § 6. 5). 



Abs DID, HD1D, D^DID, 

T 

Cstr DID, HD1D, TPD, 



D'DID, DT1D1D, TODp- 

tpd, tidid, nana 



5. The changes taking place in other (changeable) vowels of 
nouns put in the construct state will be further illustrated here- 
after (§ 29) ; those required in the terminations of such constructs 
should be stated here. The terminations of the pi. masc. and du. 

(Q*i , Q^_i_) become ^ (orig., i ) ; the j"( of fern, nouns 

reverts to its original form f] ; while nouns ending in |"[ change 

the same to |"[ . 

Rem. — The construct may also be found before words governed by Preposi- 
tions, before clauses beginning with a Relative pronoun, and in many other cases 
where a close connection of thought is indicated. ^b/IQ 'HH mountains in 
(of) Gilboa. ^^ Dlp£ tne P lace & which. 



tn^ 1 seize, possess. n*n&$/-P ossess i° n - 
HDil 2 bend, settle, encamp. IVDl!* 3 

T T • -: 

/. spear. n^HD 2 c - encam P men t- 
nn3l2 /• gi^, (meal) offering, Minhdh. 
^i* (R- "113) m. lamp, light, fl^fi* 

/. candlestick. 



^llSli 5 c. bird (chirper). 

^j^tT 6 "be over, left. ^Xtf?* rn. rest, 

- T T : 

remnant, rTHNKSJ /. remnant. 
i"Q*£J 7 carry (away) captive. "QtT m - 

T T ■ : 

captivity. rUDtl? /• captivity. 



1 Mn. " Ahaz" (IPIX) who possessed the throne in the time of Isaiah. 2 Mn. 

T T 

" Mahanaim," i.e., two camps: Gen. xxxii. 3. 3 The spear was so called from 
its elasticity. 4 Name of Abner's father: 1 Sam. xiv. 50. 5 Mn. "Zipporah," 
wife of Moses; also mimetic. 6 Mn. " Shear-jashub " (DlttT l "lKt?) = a rem- 
nant shall return: Isa. vii. 3. 7 Mn. "Tishbeh" (J-Qtt7fi), the home of "Elijah 
the Tishbite." What has the name to do with the idea ? 



THE NOUN WITH PRONOMINAL SUFFIXES. 



55 



. Exercise. — / (am) Jehovah the God a (pL) of Israel 
(^KHt^). Righteous 13 (are) we. A possession of a 
burying-place. 15 The camp of Israel. With (3) a sword 8 
and with a spear. The spear of the king. (Meal) offer- 
ings. An offering in righteousness. The candlesticks of 
silver. 12 And he (w.c.) shall kill 24 the bird. 5 And he 
(w.c.) has kept 15 the statutes 2 (m. ). Statutes (/.). Asses 11 
of. The Altars 18 (DPI). The queen 13 of S e bha\ Borders 22 
of Israel. The mighty men 22 of 'Edom. Cherubim. 24 

(Into) Sheol. 12 Ye shall cast 22 every son ('tlT^Sy (into) 
the river (Nile). 3 

a Rem. 1. — A noun in the construct does not take the article, being made 
definite by its connection with the following word. 

1 Rem. 2. — The definite accusative is generally marked in prose by TlK ( or 
n& § 2). A noun is regarded as definite when it has the article; is a proper 
name ; is in the construct state (with a definite noun) ; when it has a pro- 
nominal suffix (§ 28), and in some other cases. 

c Rem. 3 — 7J3 is a noun (cstr. "73), and when followed by the article carries 
the idea of totality ; without it, it is used distributively. Dp~TO every people ; 
D2?iT/5 tne whole people. 



§ 28. THE NOUN WITH PRONOMINAL SUFFIXES. 

1. Suffixes with a Sing. Noun. Suffixes with a PL and Du. Noun. 



Sing. 


Plur. 


Sing. 


Pluk. 


I.e. *_ my 


tt. ttJL our 


1. c. h my 


iy_l_ our 


2.m. % TT_) 




2. m. *T ' ) 
2./. ^Xj thy 


p, ^your 


3.m.rn;i, riMs 

3./. H, n_,her 

T T 




3. to. V_ Ms 
3. /. J-pI. h er 

T 


jnv| their 



Rem. 1. — In the suffixes of the 2. pers. throughout, ^ — by a not uncommon 
interchange of these letters — has taken the place of f\. Otherwise the fragmen- 
tary endings may be readily traced to their origin in the Personal Pronoun 
(sing. 3./. J^_ = Jl_ ; sing. 3. m. *) (H) is a contraction from in_). 

T T T T 

Rem. 2. — With Nouns in the sing, are given forms both with and without a 
preceding vowel, or S e wa. The former are used with nouns ending in a con- 
sonant, the latter with those ending in a vowel. This so-called "connecting" 



56 



THE NOUN WITH PRONOMINAL SUFFIXES. 



vowel is really an original final vowel of the noun, which here in a form more or 
less modified reappears before most of the suffixes. 

Rem. 3. — In the case of pi. and du. nouns, the original form of the cstr. (ay) 
is taken as the basis for the appended suffixes. This is generally contracted to 
e (pi.) ; a is once lengthened to a (sing. 3. to.), and twice deflected to e (sing. 
2. to., 3. /.). In the sing. 1. c. the pronominal ending is absorbed in the ay of the 
ground- form ; and in the sing. 2./. a helping vowel (i) is used. 

Rem. 4. — The suffixes ftp, ?p, EH, jH are called "heavy" suffixes, and 
strongly attract the tone ; the other suffixes are "light." 

Rem. 5. — For the endings }*_, OJT_, the poetic forms 1fP_Lj ift^_!_ ma Y 
be found. The effect of a Pausal accent on the suffixes falls under the general 
rules for Pause (§ 6. 4. r.). 



2. 



Singular Noun. 



Plural Noun. 



Sing. 1. c. my. . 

2. to. thy . . 
2./. thy.. 

3. to. his . . 
3./. her.. 

1. c. our. . 

2. to. your. 

2. /. your. 

3. to. their. 
3. /. their. 



PI 



Masc. 

"BID 



PTD1D 

T 

DDD1D 



DD1D 
JD1D 



Fem. Masc. Fem. 

TIDID W3 TllDID 

• - i - i 

*jraD spto sprtoip 

TpDlp ^6lD ^TriWD 

inDiD void vmbiD 

T I T T I 

nnDiD rrmD rrrtoio 

T T I TV T V I 

iJhDio «"biD wrtoib 

MnCID D^^Dffi MTHD1D 

... . - , ... .. , ... .. , 

pnpiD jyovp pTiipiD 

nnpip nrwip ErrnipiD 

jnpip [rap j.TniDiD- 



Rem. 1. — The word here used, it will be noted, has immutable vowels. It is 
representative of all such nouns. The effects of the pronominal suffixes on the 
mutable vowels of a word will be shown in the following section. 

Rem. 2. — The suffixes of nouns denote the Genitive relation, and the words 
to which they are attached are in the cstr. state in fact, if not in form. Hence 
the. cstr. of the fem. (D_)> whose vowel, however, when falling in an open syl- 
lable (always except with the heavy suffixes) is lengthened. 

Rem. 3. — In the fem. of pi. nouns there is a double indication of the pi.: that 
of the masc. in addition to the fem. ; but in the 3. Pers.pl. the endings Q__, |_ 
are oftener found than those given. 

Rem. 4. — The omission of Daghes from ^ in the 2. to. and /. of the sing. fem. 
noun with pi. suffix is due to the loosely closed syllable (§ 3. 4). 



Til 1 to. uncle, beloved (one). 
^)*!\ 2 to. generation. 



!"DD* 3 /- booth, tabernacle. 

T ■• 

*J^ 4 to. forever. 



FIRST CLASS OF NOUNS. 57 



*"72? (prep, and adv.) till, as far as. 
X* (/• m?) m. witness. nHV »»■ 
testimony. 1i" again, still. 

niSk 5 comniand. Jll^ib /• conmiand- 

T T T : • 

ment. 



^"] G strive. ^*) m. strife, cause 

(legal). 
HnSw" 7 /• maid- servant, handmaid. 

nhSttffc /• family. 



1 Mn. ••David' 1 (11^) the beloved. 2 R. ^jift = revolve. Mn. '-door." 
3 PL •• Succ th," 1 where Jacob built -booths 1 '': Gen. xxxiii. 17. * Mn. "add" 
(the common idea at the basis of this list of words). *7" (r. i""RV »° on ) 
forever ; *"]*£, iTH^ ( r - *Ti> repeat over) = witness ; ^fj^ (adv.) again, still. 

5 R. = be hard, solid, and from it comes T V^ = •• Zion,'' which may serve as mn. 

6 Mn. ''Reeve," an old term for officer. Sheriff = Shire-reeye. " If r. = join, 
then so called as one joined to the family ; and the family, as those joined together. 

Exercise. — My beloved. His uncle. Our witness (vowel 
immutable). Your witnesses. Their witnesses (/.). Her 
commandment. Your commandment. The tabernacle of 
David. Strifes of. Thy handmaid. His maidservants. 
Upon (7* 2?) the maidservants in those days. 10 This (is) 
the commandment which Jehovah sent. 22 Great 10 (is) the 
day of Y e howah. Yisra'el has not kept 15 my precepts. 15 
Jehovah (is) a man 9 of war. 24 The horses of Par'oh and 
all his mighty men. 22 It (is) thy voice. 9 Jehovah our 
God (pi.) (is) holy (sing.). 6 Our rock 26 (is) not as their 
rock. bn|n ^barrj? the eldest son of the king.* 

a Rem. — An Adj. modifying a noun in immediate connection with a Genitive 
(i.e., in the cstr. state) is placed after the compound expression; and the noun 
being (by its connection) definite, the adjective has the article (cf. § 10. 2). 



§ 29. FIRST CLASS OF NOUNS. 

1. Nouns witli mutable vowels may be divided into classes 
according as they are affected by the pl. } clu., and /<?/?*. terminations, 
pronominal suffixes, and the cstr. state. In each of these cases the 
tone moves forward one or two places, producing the effects described 
in § 6 (which should now be reviewed). 



Sing. 
PI... 



Lbs. 


CSTK. 


Light Suff. 


Heavy Sfff. 


• T 


-1?' 


'VH* 


ttCPB- 


*B« 


*?'"U' 


"SHS' 


arm:- 



58 



FIRST CLASS OF NOUNS. 



2. As a first class, those nouns (including adjectives and participles) 
may be designated which ha\e a mutable vowel in the penult only. 
Inasmuch as that vowel is volatilized by any moving forward of the 
tone, the form of the word thus becomes fixed, and to it, as a base, 
the several terminations and suffixes are added without further 
change. 

Rem. 1. — If a word begin with a guttural, the general rule for gutturals in 
the same circumstances is to be followed (§ 5. 3. fj$ 9 fig, i^g, fitfl5» TllOT)- 
The same is true of a word ending in a guttural. § 5. 2. i?Q3, DpfcTD}? ITttJb, 

Rem. 2. — Feminines of the form H /ITS (from m. h*i1$) follow the analogy 
°f HD^ID in the previous section. 

T 

Rem. 3. — Words of the form ij£, in addition to the changes spoken of in 

e. 1, become Q^39 S 1^% QD n!, ^> in the pi.; those of the form ^ become 
.... ..... ... ..... . T . 

**y$ (my affliction) with a suffix. 



^iDn 1 m * mercy. TOft* merciful, 

V V - T 

godly. 
SD1 2 prophesy, J031 prophet. 

T T • T 

12 D3 1°°^ upon, regard. 
^33 3 tell, narrate. ^3 over against,, 
before. ""p^ * m. prince, leader. 



2M1* liberal, noble. Mn. "Nadab." 
Kt?3 4 lift up, bear, forgive. fcOtft »»• 

T X - T 

prince. Kt£?ft 4 burden, portion. 
HI!? t 5 do iniquity. ?'l^ m. iniquity. 
TO? 6 oppress. ^ poor. iJJJ* m. 

t t • t -t: 

affliction,, oppression. 



1 m^Dri the Stork, was so named from its tenderness to its young. 2 To be 
associated with the next root ; the idea of the r. being to bubble forth, as the 
prophet's words from his soul, as the eye from the lids. 2 Mn. for the second 
root "Nebat," father of the notorious Jeroboam. 3 R. = be high, sightly. 
Note three words for Noble beginning with J (TJD, S I H3» fcOtW)- 4 To De 
disting. from J"fD3 (mn. "Massah": Ex. xvii. 7), which also means to lift up, 
but with the idea of trying r proving. 5 Mn. Awa, an iniquitous strong- drink, of 
the Hawaiian Islands. 6 Mn. "Anna" (an oppressive empress of Russia, a.d. 
1730-1740). Distinguish HJ^ answer, § 47. 



Exercise. — Collect 23 (pi-) my godly (ones). Our 
prophets. The prophets of Jehovah. Thy (f.) prophets. 
He went forth 5 from his place. 19 Ruler (TJJ) of the 
house 3 of God. The princes (X^J) of the earth. 9 Our 
iniquity. Their iniquities. Forgiving (Part.) iniquity 
and transgression. 25 Thy poor '{pi-)* The poor of the 
flock. 2 Their affliction. And all her multitude QlOi^T). 
Pray for (ask ? 12 ^Z.) the peace 20 of Jerusalem. 



SECOND CLASS OF NOUNS. 59 



§ 30. SECOND CLASS OF NOUNS. 

1. D^W> |Sn : p- S^ b^ Hill- A second class of 
nouns are those which have a mutable vowel in the final syllable 
only : while that of the penult is (by nature or position) immutable. 



Sing. 
PI... 



Abs. 


CSTR. 


Light suff. 


Heavy Suff. 


T 


dSi?, 


• T 1 


DD^Sr;. 


D^bi2, 


^b\% 


■toSfa, 


M'tobiS- 



2. The law of inflection for nouns (or participles and adjectives) 
of the form Q^i^ ^ s that & remains in an open syllable ; is changed 

T 

to a in a loosely shut syllable {cstr. and with heavy suff. in the 
sing.) ; and volatilized when the tone is moved forward two places 
(cstr. and with heavy suff:. in the pi). 

Rem. 1. — The NL, Qu., and Ho. Participles of the Strong verb follow in 
inflection the analogy of D7l2?> as the Q. (act.), Qi. and Hithq. Participles follow 
that of ^1K. 

Rem. 2. — Monosyllables with a mutable a belonging to this class of words 
have some peculiarities, represented by *T\ ^p, DDT? CTi VT? ^T> DiTT I 

T - v : v • - t T T •• : v •• : 

and J3*?Jj ^"l, DD£T D^ft^i OJTftl- The special peculiarity consists in 

t • t v : • T ■••••: 

thinning a to i or e, with heavy suff. in the sing., and in the cstr. and with heavy 
suff. in the pi. 



Sing. 
PI... 



Abs. 


CSTK. 


Vocal Suff. 


Conson. Suff. 


*% 


W 


^:*?' 


^?^- 


D^& 


■a'to, 


^K, 


. 



3. In words of the form ^fc or * ne Act. Part. Qal (i.e., words 
having e in the final syllable and an immutable vowel in the penult), 
the last vowel is volatilized with suffixes beginning with a vowel, 
and is shortened to e or i before those beginning with consonants. 
The cstr. sing, is like the abs. except before Maqqeph. 

Rem. — Monosyllabic nouns with e naturally follow this law of inflection. 

D0, ^ ^fctf, "Dtf. 



60 THIRD CLASS OF NOUNS. 

4 - ^th> D^ft M1PT- In words of the form j-]J*n, J-Jftfo the 
cs£r. si'?2#. is Jf]"n (§ 27. 5). Before suffixes, |-| and the vowel are 

dropped, and the suffixes are added directly to the word as thus 

apocopated. 



^K 1 m. one hating, enemy. 

mil * 2 see ? behold (a vision) . nth t 

m. seer. Jiffl* w**' vision. 
HtOJ 3 stretch out, turn aside, ntfifcp * 

/. bed. HIDD c. staff, tribe. 



Q7l2? w - antiquity, age, eternity. 

njj^ acquire, buy. n^jT' 4 (cs£r. {flip) 

to. cane, stalk. Hipp m - property 
(in cattle), cattle. 

n^l 5 see. Jl^t*)D sight, appearance. 

ISStT 6 judge. tDSl^ft judgment, rule. 

- t t : ■ 

1 An interesting fact about this word is that it is used in this (Part.) form 
about 280 times in the Bible and only once in another form: Ex. xxiii. 22. 
2 Not the r. of "Hosea," the prophet; but JITl is a svn - of tf'Ol 29 and HiO 

• T 

(seer). 3 Mn. Lat. Nata-re (= stretch out hands) to swim. 4 Mn. cane. The 
idea of acquisition in the r. comes through that of setting upright, establishing. 
5 Note that all the letters are weak, and the first is a " vibrating ' ' letter. 6 Mn. 
" Jehosaphat" (tD£^i!T)> Jehovah has judged. 

t t I : 

Exercise. — By (3) means of (hand of) all the seers. 
Your blood. 26 Your hand. Their hands. , The hand of 
his enemies. The seer of the king. 13 Upon (T>S) the bed of 
the man 9 of God. Thy rod. And I (w.c.) will break 14 the 
staff of bread. 24 Possession (property) of flocks {sing.)? 
His cattle. Our cattle. In the name 10 of Jehovah. The 
name of that place. 19 What 11 is thy name ? His judg- 
ments are in all the earth. 9 The priests 12 and the judges 
(Part.). I have taught 18 (Qi.) statutes 2 and judgments. 
And the appearance of the glory 11 of Jehovah. Their 
appearance. The names of the tribes (01") of Israel. 



§ 31. THIRD CLASS OF NOUNS. 

1- ta D* ? T, DDb> TO\> TVVD ( see vocab. § 40). This class in- 
eludes words with two mutable vowels. The law of vowel changes, 
when additions are taken, is found § 6. 4-6. 



Sing. 
PI... 



Abs. 


CSTE. 


Light Stiff. 


Heavy Suit. 


12% 

T T 


"O^ 


• T : 


Byiyj. 


Dnm, 


nrn, 


*!£% 


Dsnm 



THIED CLASS OF NOUNS. 61 

Rem. 1. — The thinning of the original a to i (cstr.pl., etc.) takes place, 
except in cases where one of the first two letters is a guttural (£*£— H, "£2iT 

D^rBi ^Hj)' and in a few otner words - ^133, *£j3- 

Eem. 2. — Words of the form Tpf become ?pj in the cstr. sing. 

Rem. 3. — HI *u having (unlike ,1 TN § 30) a mutable vowel in both syllables 

belongs to this ciass. Cstr. HtuV +$&, H*l)D (or m'Tw)< cstr. pi. +1&. 

..... . T T ... 

Eem. 4. — Words of this class occasionally take with additions D. forte 
(characteristic, § 4. 2. e.) in their final radical, in order to keep the pretonic 
vowel short. E* 1 ?/-;! f° r D^EH- 



Sing 

fi mpiat 

2. In feminines of this class ending in |"| , the original form in 

T 

ath (a-th in open syllable) is assumed, and the law of vocal changes 
is then applied, as in the masculines. 

Eem. —The dual has the form (HE'w ) D'TlStttf, cstr. TlSftfc Ti2'w , DDTlS'ttf- 



ABS. 


CSTE. 


Light Suff. 


Heavy Suff. 


It t : 


rppt 


Tt?T» 


crnp-pj. 


"flpW 


rflpT* 


Trip-i*. 


Dj^nijrpf 



D1J< »*■ man, Adam. HEI^ 1 f- I &133 4 r - wi^gi border. 

T T T T -8 IT T 

ground, earth. I HH3 5 m - river. Syn. '^S' , • 

^Ip'Z' 2 c. (large) cattle, herd. *lp2 

m. morning. 
^t'lt 3 (Qi-) bring good tidings. 

^it'S •»■ flesh. 



n£"w 6 /• hp, border, shore. 

H"w*t change. i"D "wE 7 »&■ second, 

T T ••• : 

copy. Hiu' /■ year. ijjjj m. (f. 

rPJttJ) second. citT two. 



1 Associate with preceding word. 2 E. = break through : cattle, the clods (in 
ploughing) ; morning, the mists and darkness. 3 Idea of r. , to smooth the skin, 
rub out its wrinkles. Of. Germ, glatten, Eng. gladden. 4 E. V2= cover. The 
three root -letters are in " canopy." 5 Associate with *1H (river and mount). 
6 Idea of r. 5y£\ S"pi is fo rub. Of. "|£D = rub P en on the paper. ' It is easy 
to see how the idea of year comes from that of change. The two following 
words are from an allied r. Mil "MisTvna" G"Ot27Jft)s i-e., the text °f the 
Talmud, so called as a repetition of the law. 

Exercise. — From the elders 17 of Israel. The wisdom 3 
of his wise (men). 3 According to (3) the word 6 of Jeho- 
vah. He wrote 4 all the words in a book. 12 The words of 
the lips of Jehovah. His words. Their words. In the 
heart 23 of the righteous 13 [pi.)- Which is upon (yV) the 



62 FOURTH CLASS OF NOUNS. 

shore of the sea (DJ). In the house 3 and in the field (rfl'tt?). 
The waters 3 of the river. Flock 2 and herd. I will give 
(jRX) thy flesh to the birds of (*)1S*?) heaven. 10 The 
righteous acts (righteousnesses) of Jehovah. Jehovah 
our righteousness. 

§ 32. FOURTH CLASS OF NOUNS. 

!• ^IT 5 ^? ""ISD? HpS (*lp3)- Numerous nouns of a peculiar 
formation (originally monosyllabic) may be reckoned as a fourth, 
class. Their vowels were respectively a, i, and u (or o). 

2 - **bft> *1SD (3*15)> ^p3- 0n account of tne difficulty of 
pronouncing these words as monosyllables, a helping vowel was used 
under the second radical ; and as this vowel was ordinarily S e gh6l 
(see, however, the following section) they are generally known as 
Segholates. They are named Segholates of the a, i, or u (or o) 
class, according to the vowel which originally characterized them. 

Rem. 1. — In Segholates of the a class this vowel has been ordinarily de- 
flected to e. <ihft from ^fofa. 

Rem. 2. — In Segholates of the i and u (or o) class these vowels (now stand- 
ing in an open syllable with the tone) are changed to e and 5. 

Rem. 3. — It is not possible to judge from their absolute form to which of the 
first two classes a Segholate belongs, if the vowel of the first syllable be e. 
Accordingly, those of the i class have been indicated in our vocabularies. 

Rem. 4. — Certain words of this class have not been given a helping vowel, 
but remain in their original monosyllabic form. tfftn> lKtOn> D^tflPf- 



Sing. Abs ^b6 

Cstr ^bk 

Light suff. *?bti 

Heavy suff. DDP T 5 ?? 

PL Abs D'OStt 

• T : 

Cstr rpSft 

Light suff. *Zbt2 

- T : 

Heavy suff. M"? 1 ^ 

Du D^P) 



*^P 


^3 


"l?p 


T?* 


"HBD 


T?? 


D ?1?P 


vrm 


• T : 


cii?? 


n&p 


~m 


- t : 


*m 


BSHED 


asmps 



FOURTH CLASS OF NOUNS. 



63 



3. The law for the inflection of Segholates is that in the sing, and 
du. of the word, and in the cstr. and the forms having heavy suffixes 
of the pi, the pronominal suffixes are appended to the original 
rncmosyllabic form. In the other forms {pi. and the pi. with light 
suffixes) a "helping" vowel (d) is used with the second radical, its 
own being volatilized, and the suffixes are then added without fur- 
ther change. 

Rem. 1. — It will be noted that the cstr. sing, is like the abs. This law is 
nearly universal. 

Rem. 2. — In Segholates of the u (or o) class, the characteristic vowel of the 
inflected forms is generally o, but there are examples of the use of u, and even i. 
i^nS from ^"[5 greatness. 

Rem. 3. — On the exceptional ^7. forms of t» "lw* anc ^ w**Tp> see § 2. 3. k. 2. 

Rem. 4. — The cstr. pi. is really formed from the abs. pi. by volatilizing the 
"helping"' vowel a. and restoring in the first syllable the original a (i or o); 
but, for practical reasons, it seemed better to state the rule as above. 

Rem. 5. — A more characteristic mark of words of this class than v is the 
tone on the penult. 



?*K* (Hi.) give ear. T'^ 1 m. ear. 
^133 2 ra. firstborn. |"PDSt /• fil- 
ling, birthright. 
*TT beget, give birth. H^ 3 m. boy, 

- T 

son. 
-HJ* vow. ^y (and *nJ) (i) m. 
a vow. 



w*S ] c - soul, life, self. 

^JH* 5 go? (g° about to) calumniate, 

spy out, tread. 7)H /■ f°°t- 
j£'£ 6 (i) m. oil. 
w'EU* 7 c. the sun. 
u'T^* 8 »». root. 



1 C7*. awriv, dat.pl. of o5s. 2 R. = break through. Cf. I £2. 3 A mn. will, 

IT T 

perhaps, suggest itself. 4 R. akin to Tfo, mn. "Nazirite" (TlJ). 5 R. JH 

• T 

carries the idea of (excited) movement. 6 Mn. " Gethsemane" (Aram. 
H^tti!? DU oil press). " Mn. "Beth-shemesh" (Josh. xv. 10), house of the 

t : t - , 

sun. 8 Assoc, with £Hp (see § 2. 3. r. 2). 



Exercise. — In their ears. In the ears of the people 9 of 
the land. 9 All 2 the firstborn. The firstborn according to 
(2) his birthright. My sons. Their sons. Where (§10.4) 
thou hast vowed a vow. His vows. Your vows. Bless 6 
(Qi.), my soul, Jehovah. For (^) the sole 3 of her foot. 
From between (pab) his feet. At p) their feet. We 
(are) your servants. 8 Cause (me) to hear 18 in the morn- 
ing 31 thy lovingkindness. 29 The root of the righteous 13 (pi.). 
And he (w.c.) wrote 4 these words 6 in the book 12 of the 
law (rnifl) of God. 





^a 

^a 


D ?0¥? 


v : T it 


dtisu 


D^fi 


V$l 


^sa 


- T : 


- t : 


D3T15U 


M^sa 



64 FOURTH CLASS OF NOUNS. 

§ 33. FOURTH CLASS OF NOUNS (Continued). 



Sing. Abs. and Cstr ^j) 

Light suff. i^JJ 

Heavy suff. D5*"p3 

PZ. Abs D'HEJ 

Cstr 1^53 

Ztyft* suff. ^J 

- T : 

Heavy suff. M'HSJ 



1. Segholates having a guttural for their second or third radical 
generally take a instead of e as a helping vowel ; and in those having 
a guttural as their second radical, an original a in the first syllable 
is usually retained, i.e., the word does not assume an actual Segho- 
late form in either case. 

Rem. 1. — To the second part of this rule there are occasional exceptions. 

orft from nrb- 

Rem. 2. — Segholates of the u (or 0) class sometimes retain the o in the pi. 
abs. and in the pi. with light suffixes. D*vn& V7PI& Irom 7fl&- 

• T I T T I 

Rem. 3. — Segholates of the i class whose first letter is a guttural (^, |f) 
usually take e with suffixes instead of the original vowel. I'l'ftJ from ^fj?. 



Sing. Abs fi^fr 

Cstr n^Slp 

Light suff. TD^fc 

• T : - 

Heavy suff. DlDroSfc 

pi Abs n^bfc 

Cstr nlD^lp 

Light suff.. TTtoSfc 



» 1 1 .1 

2. Feminines from masc. Segholates (like ^TpQ? ^ITlD' ^HH) 

require no new principle in their inflection. The fern, ending affects 
the word as the ordinary suffix affects the masc. — throws it into its 
monosyllabic form. The fern. pi. form is also precisely analogous 



nsnn 

T : v 


rrann 

T : T 


nann 


nnn 

: t 


Tiann 

• T : v 


• T : T 


D?na^rr 


Mnann 


mann 

T -: 


nimn 

T t: 


niann 


ntonn 

: T 


•mann 


TUnnn 



FOURTH CLASS OF NOUNS. 65 

to the masc. All suffixes in both sing, and pi. are appended to the 
cstr. (as in fern, nouns of the third class), the final a in the sing. 

becoming a in an open syllable. 

Rem. — HS^in /• reproach. See s.v. 5"Hn> AP- 1- 
Sing. Abs. and cstr. rO^fifi H^p rH52 mistress n^PT3 

z^rM«^.... , «rofe9 "rbbp wi? Titfrij 

p*. ^ niDb&& niStop 

T : - : I I 

cstr tfdb&e flfcroj? 

3. Besides the /e??i. form of masc. Segholates, there are also 
proper fern. Segholates. They are nouns with the fern, ending ^) 
and a helping vowel (_, — ). They are inflected in the siwgr. like 
the masc. Segholates. In the pi. the first form follows the analogy 
of the fern, of masc. Segholates; the second (the f em. act. Part. Q., 
Qi., Hithq.) drops the pretonic vowel in the pi. ; the third and 
fourth are rarely met with in the pi. 

Rem. — Some/e??i. nouns have an abs. form in |"|_ as well as in J"|_ (HfciPHft 
or Dpnb^i nbtpp ° r fHtpp) 5 while there are some whose a&s. form is in 
H_ and their cstr. always in f|_. ,1^7^^? fltTX- 



SnK m. tent. Mil "Oholiab": Ex. 

xxxi. 6. 
^2T w. forest. Mn. (p7.) "Jearim": 

Josh. xv. 10 ("forest- city"). 
ntrn^ 1 6. copper, brass (bronze). 
-l^i 2 'young man; iffiM /• J CTlTO 

— t -: i- : 

youth. 



n^i 3 (Qi-) l ea d, especially a choir. 

- T 

n^i (o r nifi) g lor y> eternity. 
PES * »*• Passover ; Gr. Trdaxa. 
7^S i do, make. S^i2 * w*. deed, work. 

- T 
I 

D'JJS 5 c. stroke, step, a time (once). 
TSJ1& c - gate. R. divide. Mn. "share." 



1 The memory may be aided by combining the p.n. "Necho" (Pharaoh) and 
"Seth" (DtlJ)i though the latter may have been nearer the bronze age: Gen. 
iv. 22. 2 Mimetic, referring to time of puberty. Cf. gnar (= gnarl, snarl, growl). 
3 The Qi. Part. V&lfc w ith 7 is found over fifty times in headings of Psalms 
in the sense of choir-leader. 4 May be associated with the usual names of the 
Voices, as "Niph'al," "Pu'al," etc. (§ 19). It is used in poetry for Hti?!?- 
5 The original monosyllabic form D^S suggests better the idea of stroke, step. 

Exercise. — He sent 22 (Qi.) each man 9 (=a man) to ("?) 
his tent (pi.). As a lion 12 in the forest. Its brass. In 
silver 12 and in brass. He spoke 5 to his young man. And 
thou (w.c. Impf. in a) hast cleaved 22 to (3) the maidens 



Ob NOUNS OF PECULIAR FORMATION. 

of Bo e az. "To the chief musician." To cut off 20 (Hi.) 
from the city (TS) of Jehovah. all workers of iniquity 
(flX). Ask 12 (pi.) concerning (^5?) my sons 11 and con- 
cerning the work of my hands. 3 And I (w.c.) will reward 20 
(Qi. of D'p'E?) them (DH7) according to their works. My 
steps. Twice (du.). 

§ 34. NOUNS OF PECULIAR FORMATION. 



Sing. Abs HK 

T 

Gstr *m 

Light stiff. VPIK 

• T 

Heavy stiff. Dp^HSI 

PI. Abs Q^ 

Gstr T|K 

Light stiff. ^ng 
Heavy stiff. D3TW 



nina 

T 

mm 

T -: 

rrvm 

T : - 



T T 

T -: 



^ 



D3^3 






^3 



on:? 

• T 

^2 



Rem. — 1. In CfTX the vowel of the first syllable is possible because there is 
a D. forte implied. For VHK (pi. with light suff.), VPlK is always found by 
exception. 2. In JnlH^ the ending is not that of the fern, pi., but is a contrac- 
tion for -awath. 3. The H m niHftK is used as a consonant, and not as in 
PlttX- 4. The pi. of ^3 is formed as if from 73, and of ^2? as if from ^|^, 

T T • : ... T 

the latter form being still found in proper names. 5. The remaining nouns 
usually reckoned under this head have already been given in preceding vocabu- 
laries, but should now be reviewed: 2tf (§ 8); f^R, HttfK (§ 9); JV3 (§ 3); 
J3, T3 (§ 11); D1^ (§ 10); D?£, HS, tf*1 (§ 3); b#, D^tf (§ 10). 



PQK wish, will, fl^K 1 poor. 
J11K* wish, desire. HlKn /. ibid. 

T T T -: 1- 

1K (§ 2) or. 
HK 2 brother. HiPTK sister. 

1 T 

^TJPIK Dack side 5 backwards, "inK TO - 
after. *lHS| another, ji^n^ 3 latter, 
later. fi'HnX /• latter time, future, 
"ira, mftft * /• to-morrow. 



D« 4 (with suff. ?&*, pi. niEK) /• 
mother. HftK cubit, mother-city, 

T _ 

metropolis. 
PltoK 5 /• maidservant. 
H^3 6 complete, end. tf-JS* bride, 

T T . T - 

daughter-in-law. 175 vessel, weapon, 
thing. njbS, (only pZ.) ni^S? reins, 
inward parts. 
*lfi$ be astir, awake, *V9 /. city. 



THE CARDINAL NUMBERS. 67 

1 Mn. and deriv. "Ebionite." The idea of "poor" as coming from this r. 
is obvious. 2 The same word as interjection = Alas ! 3 Mn. for this series of 
words "Acheron" Qb.xepa>v), a fabled river of the after world. ^nX (note 
vowel and D. forte implied as in ""inX) = one after, i.e., another, 'inft appar- 
ently = ^HSp- i-e., the (day) after. * R- q^ ( m Assyr.) = be broad* roomy ; 
hence cubit. 5 Cf. Germ. Amme, nurse ; Lat. mamma. All seem to be mimetic. 
6 Idea of r. is to be rounded out, complete. ^3 (§ 2) is from an allied r. The 
bride was so called as the full grown maiden ; the reins, from the conception of 
them, probably, as a sort of vessel chS)- 7 ^ ote idea of a city. *"p^ is 
equivalent to *■)£, as in DKift"13* city of Moab : Num. xxi. 28. 

T T T 

Exercise. —He slept 19 with 9 his fathers. The wife 9 
(woman) of thy youth. 33 All the men of Israel. The 
house of the women. A place 19 for (*?) houses. My sons 
and my. daughters. In the days of your fathers. Accord- 
ing to (^3?) the word (mouth) of Jehovah. His brethren 
(r. 1) were not able. 9 Say 5 (/.) thou (art) my sister. His 

wife (formed from JT£?X) and his maidservants. The 
vessels (are) holy (holiness). 6 And (w.c.) the elders 17 of 
that city shall take 19 the man. I have-made-to-cease 16 
from the cities of Y e hudhah the voice 9 of joy. 3 



§ 35. THE CARDINAL NUMBERS. 



Abs. Cste. Abs. Cstb. 

i nnK nru* nnst nm 

2 crto *y& Q7D9 ^ 

3 ritibti Ft00 • • xshp uibw 

4 rrcsriK reins . • • • . wik Sana 

5 rnton ntrin-' t^n tr^n 

T • -: v •• -: " t •• -: 

6.' nw n^ w w 

7 rxpsp nsstf 25$ sap 

8 rubtr mbv) mbv wanting 

T : ~ : v : 

9 nrtrn nstfn stfn sttfn 

10 mto rn\rs nwi nwJ 



T T 



68 THE CARDINAL NUMBERS. 

Rem. — 1. The vowels e and a in the first syllable of the word for one are 
not in an open syllable ; but D. forte is implied in }-[. 2. The Daghes in D'Tlt? 
and its cstr. is not D. forte, but, by exception (§ 3. 1. k. 2), a D. lene, the word 
being for DTK?**- 

2. 'IPfS DV- 2 DT)tt? D'HS- 8 DltfJ Tlttf- The mime- 
ral for one is rarely used except as an adj. ; hence it is found after 
its word, and agrees with it in gender and number. 1 The numeral 
for two is an abstract noun; hence it may be found standing in 
apposition before or after the thing enumerated, 2 or in the construct 
state before it. 3 

3. Q'HS ttf bttf- ttf bttf D*HS- The numerals from 3 to 10 

• t : T • T 

are also abstract nouns ; but as a rule they disagree in gender with 
the things they enumerate, a masc. being used with a fern, and 
vice versd* 



( totx mw nn« 

ii \ tt "" -*• "" 

I *\m Tltf J TTjtity "F\Wy 

f 1W D^- ' m"OT D'flttf 

12 T T 

I nw ^ mm *™ 

T T " : " : v " : 

13 nws ntrStr rrrtrrc tfbtf 

T T 7 : •■:•••: 

Etc. Etc. 

20 DT^? 30 D^Stt? 

ioo HKtt 200 DTIKDW 

T " • - T 

1000 jr^K 2000 D?©^ (*0 

Kin (inn) mam cmr-i) (po 



i; 



10000. 

'mm ndm c^o 



T T 



4. The numerals from eleven to nineteen are formed by prefixing 
the units to the numeral for ten. 

Rem. 1. — The form Titt?^ represents a root not elsewhere found in Hebrew, 
but that appears in Assyrian in the word istin, one. 

Rem. 2. — The forms D W, DTit^ (contracted from Q^tt?, DTlttf) st ^nd 
for ijjt& ''fit?) and come under the head of perpetual Q e res, though only used in 
this connection. 

a The fern, form of the numeral, being the original, is used with the more 
common masc. nouns ; while the masc. form of the numeral, as shorter, is used 
with the fern, nouns. 



THE STRONG VERB WITH SUFFIXES. 69 

5. The numeral for twenty is the pi. of that for ten ; while those 
from thirty to ninety are the plurals of the respective units. 

• t : • t t : - : • t 

The numerals from two to ten generally stand in the cstr. before 
their nouns ; 1 but may stand before them, 2 or, still less frequently, 
after them, 3 in the abs. 

Rem. — The fern. du. of the corresponding cardinal is used to express the 
idea of -fold. DTl^Sttf sevenfold. 

• - T : • 

7. ]WVT\: (/) njltfiT] &st. 1J#, (/.) tVJltf second. 
^^t£?, (/•) irvi^E? third - The ordinal numbers (1 to 10), 
except that for first, are formed from the corresponding cardinals by 

inserting an ^ . after the 2d and 3d consonants. They are adjectives, 

and so construed. Above ten the cardinals are used for the ordinals, 
as also often in other cases in counting years and the days of the 
month. 

Rem. — h ^D*1 fourth, drops the weak ^ of ^3'HK on becoming an ordinal. 

8. The following idiomatic expressions are worth noting: a — 

1. lPY$ VJwVJ HI these three years. 5. DlD'TuLJ y° u two ( or ) two °^ y ou - 

2. D^U? 2?5$-|3 seven years old. 6. D^SftH *?p the two kings. 

3. rhlk tPZbftft *y& these two kings. 7. tpiS "flttf thy two sons. 

v •• • t : - •• : I v T •• : 

4- D'HSH niSSa 1ti?9 the cherub was ten cubits (high). 



§ 36. THE STRONG VERB WITH SUFFIXES. 

1. The Inf. cstr. and Part. (Q.) : ^fcp, blDp- ^J^SSp killing 

me. 2 ^ftp m y killing, killing me. *7|^£3p e ^ c - Being them- 
selves properly nouns, the Inf. cstr. and Part, take the pronominal 
suffixes of nouns ; except the suffix of the 1st Pers. s., where *^J_ may 

be used for ^ . The former always denotes the object of the verb 

(me), 1 the latter the subject or object (my or me). 2 

Rem. 1. — The ending sjj_ is found with the Part, only in poetry. 

Rem. 2. — The Part, in this form, it will be remembered, belongs to the 
second class of nouns (§ 30) ; the Inf. to the fourth class (§ 32) . The vowel o, 
in the latter, is drawn back and used under the first radical, where, falling in a 
shut syllable without the tone, it becomes o (or u), and is inflected (with the 
exception of the 1st Pers.) much like *"]p3. 

a Cf Kennedy's Introd. to Bib. Hebrew (Lond., 1889), p. 106. 



70 



THE STRONG VERB WITH SUFFIXES. 



Eem. 8. — With the suffixes 1, Q^, p, the Inf. generally takes the vowel 
under the 2d radical. THtOp? DlIDlDp- 

Rem. 4. — The Inf. of the form ^fpp (Intrans., etc.) becomes *hlDp PlfttDp), 
Tjbipp? etc., when inflected. 



3. Sing. Masc. 


3. Sing. Fem. 


2. Sing. Masc. 


2. Sing. Fem. 


3. Pluk. Com. 


2. Pluk. Com. 


"*i? 


nbtpp 


nbtip 


fi*?BR 


i^tpp 


Bfi^p 


"#W 


^9i? 


^fibtsp 


^tOp 


^tOp 


^bep 


te 


^jrfep 


— 





^^p 


— 


■^ 


"W^ffi 


— 





^bt?p 


■ — 


fep 


™^?f? 


mbep 


inriS^p 


vftbp 


etc. 


nbtop 


nrfttop 


rrribtop 


O^^ep 


ni%p 


as 3. pZ. 


u'itap 


wn^Bp 


wrfctop 


wAbep 


w^iop 




wanting 


wanting 


— 


— 


M&gp 





wanting 


wanting 


— 


— 


wanting 





Dbftp 


orfttop 


Dfi^ep 


DTlSftp 


d6bj? 




fStop 

It tI : 


to^i? 


ft^i? 


r^sp 


fa>i? 





2. TV^e Per/. The accusative of the Pers. Pron. is sometimes 
expressed with the verb by means of the particle £")£$ and a suffix 
(§ 39). When this is not the case, the pronominal fragment is 
attached to the verb itself. 

Rem. — 1. The suffixes of the verb here, too, it will be seen, with the excep- 
tion above noted, are the same as those of the noun (§ 28). 2. As in the case 
of the noun, also, a union vowel (originally found with the word) is generally 
used before suffixes beginning with a consonant, after forms ending in one. In 
the verb it is ordinarily a in the Perf, as in ^_!_ (the only exceptions being e 
before the suffix of the 2. /. and _ before 1 2. m. of pftp? ilPt^p)? and e in 

: I -It t : I it 

the Impf. and Imper. 3. Before appending the suffixes the verb assumes in 
some instances (3. s.f, 2. s. f, 2. pi. c.) a different (older) form, already in- 
dicated, better suited to the additions to be made (,1_becoming ]")_)> T\ (from 

T - : 

TlX)? M or J1 ; EH? D1i1? an ^ then (eliding Q) !)fl. 4. The changes produced 
by the suffix on the preceding vowels are in harmony with previous rules : the 
vowel in the pretone is dropped ; that in the tone preserved, a becoming a in an 
open syllable, 5. The ending ]■)_ (3. s.f), it will be noted, always has the 
tone, while ^, 13, H, Pl_ never have it. 6. The remaining parts of the verb 

T 

in the Perf , as ending in a vowel, present no difficulty, the suffix being added 
directly (1. s. c. TpflStDp 5 !•*>*■ c - *1libt2p? etc.). 7. In place of the form 



THE STRONG VERB WITH SUFFIXES. 71 

liiriT'Ep (3. s./.) of the table, the ending }F|_1 may be found; for InStOp 
(2. s. wi.), the ending inri_ ; and f° r liTn^iOP (1- s - c 0> tne ending *p_- 

T • : - I : 

3. Reflexive action (kill one's self) cannot be expressed by means 
of suffixes appended to the verb, but only by the reflexive voices of 
the verb itself (NL, Hithq.). 

4. r^apn, ^r??pH> ^t?pH5 ^t?p, ^p, ^jpp. 

In the Hi. Perf. with suffixes no new principle is introduced. Its 
vowels are unchangeable. The Qi. (and Hithq.) form has a change- 
able vowel only in the last syllable, and is treated, with the excep- 
tions already named (1st Pers.), like a noun of the second class. 

5. *]3S, ^23, *?H35> QIH55- Intransitive verbs of 

this form simply retain e in an open syllable where the transitives 
have a. 



inS* 1 fear. "inS »»• fear. 

PIS* m. snare. 

*) J£E 2 cut off, reap ; be short. *-p^D 

- It -It 

m. harvest. 

t^H* 3 he moved, angry, afraid. 

- - 

^PH* 4 he broad, enlarged. ^|"H m - 



breadth. ^["TH*/- a broad street, 

place. 
PIT"! 5 wash. 
DDH 6 ride. D5*l (i) m - rider, wagon. 

HM*n5 /' chariot. 
7^'u? 7 have sagacity, act wisely. 
"HS ■ u? 8 pour out, shed. 



1 Idea of r. letters |f£ is swell up, spring up, as the flesh from fear, as the 
snare, etc. 2 Idea of Vp is cut, break. Cf. F]2£p» § 16. 3 Idea of JH is com- 
motion. Cf ^y~\, § 32. 4 H 1 ™! i n "this word is connected with the r. HTH be airy, 
then broad. "Eehob," king of Zoba (2 Sam. viii. 3), had a name indicative of 
breadth. 5 Idea of j"|*"| in numerous words is to be soft ; here make soft by 
washing. 6 Mn. "Rechabite" COD 1 ")* 2 Sam. iv. 2), so called from their riding 
on camels. 7 Mn. "Maschil 1 ' (^3t*J3)i a title of certain Psalms (32d, etc.), 
as skilfully wrought perhaps. 8 Used especially of shedding blood (Q1). 

T 

Exercise. — In his reigning;. 13 Thou hast honored me 
(Qi.). 11 And (w.c.) shalt honor him (Qi.). They have 
honored me (Qi.). And we (w.c.) will honor thee. And 
(he that) honoreth him (Qi. Part. s.). To honor thee (Qi., 
in P.). Wherefore 11 hast thou disquieted (moved, Hi.) me ? 
And (w.c.) thy heart 23 (/.) shall fear and shall be enlarged. 
And I (w.c.) will make thee ride. To make thee sagacious. 
Until 28 he hath destroyed 20 (Hi. Inf.). To till 8 it (/.) and 
to keep 15 it. I have sanctified 6 thee (Hi.). I will teach 18 
you (Qi.) the fear 17 of God. They sought 15 him with (3) 
all the heart. 



72 



THE STRONG VERB WITH SUFFIXES. 



§ 37. THE STRONG VERB WITH SUFFIXES (Continued). 
1. The Imperfect. The Imperative. 



3. Sing. Masc. 


With 3 Demon 


3. Plur. Masc. 


Sing. 


With 3 Demon. 


Pluk. 


^E,T 


l^p! 


^top! 


^PP 


#PB 


'?^Pp 








irfttpp 


fc!?¥p 


etc. 


n_ n^p,T 


n^pp? 


n^tpp: 


n_ rfttpp 


n|^ep 


as 


u^pl 




i^Pp? 


tt^pp 




Impf. 


E^top? 


— 


M^Pp"! 


— 


— 







— 


p^tp,T 


B^?p 


— 





fr?lT. 


— 


H^i? 


frpp 


— 





Rem. — 1. In both the Impf. and Imp., forms ending in a vowel take the suffix 
directly (rftVtSpfl* 2 - and3./.jpZ., becomes ^iStppJH before suffixes). 2. The 
final 5 of forms of the imp/, is volatilized before the suffix, except with TJ, 0^> ?5' 
when it becomes o. The final o of the Imp. is drawn back under the first radi- 
cal, after the analogy of the Inf. , and becomes o. 3. The union vowel which by 
the rule is here e (§ 36. 2. r. 2) appears in the Impf. as — before the suffixes 
% Op; J5' anc * ,& before J"| (sometimes contracted to H_) m tne Impf and 
imp. 4. The alternative (strengthened) forms before the suffixes ^, % ]f], J"| 
are due to the presence of the syllable an, now mostly reduced to }. This 3 is 
assimilated to a following *7[ and 3 ; while a Jf following is assimilated to it, as 
indicated by the D. forte in both cases. This } is called J demonstrative, and is 
found mostly with pausal and emphatic (cohortative) forms. It will be noted 
that every syllable where it is found has the vowel e with the tone. 

2. 133% snap's 'tHM 1 '- Verbs having a in the last syl- 
lable of the Impf. and Imp. (Intrans., etc.) retain it, and, in an 
open syllable, heighten it to a. 

3- bn?p!!, i&bp\ T| s p- | t?|pi; bap% y^pN rf?%\£- 

The Hi. Impf, having unchangeable vowels, presents no difficulties ; 
while the Qi. Impf follows the analogy of the Perf, with the 
difference of the union vowel. 



PARTICLES WITH SUFFIXES. 



73 



nSD* 7 (akin to rhti' 

P]*l^ 8 try, prove. 

^ItDp 9 burn incense, sacrifice 

- It 

/. incense. 

b$fy (r 
m. weight 



rritojj 



weigh) m. Shekel bfTvtfft* 

It : • 



713 x separate. 
trp3 2 (Qi., Qu.) seek. 
tTDI 3 m - honey, syrup. 
p" 14 m. wine. 
CT 5 (pZ. WW) m. sea. 
pft 10 m. right hand. 

1 R- 12 = separate. Cf. 12, § 38). 2 "Backshish " = a gratuity in the East. 
3 Mn. dibs, a syrup much used in the East. 4 Substituting ) for \ we have p"|, 
a word approaching " wine 1 ' in sound. 5 The " Yam" is mostly from oyer the 
seas. 6 Mn. "Benjamin 1 ' (pp^2)- 7 Idea of send, fling away, and forgive 
are closely allied. 8 Cf. FH'tL?, though the r. idea is different. 9 Mn. "Keturah" 
(HmtOD), name of Abraham's second wife (= sweet odor). 

T I : 

Exercise. — And I (w.c.) will keep 15 thee. He who keep- 
eth thee (Q. Part.). To keep him. And from his keeping 
(Inf. cstr.). Keep (sing.) them. I ivill keep (Cohort.). 
He will keep me. And he (w.c.) has kept us. He will 
keep him. He will keep him (3 demon.). The lips 31 of 
the wise (pl-Y will keep them. For 2 thou didst separate 
them. And I (w.c.) washed 36 thee in (the) water. 3 Jeho- 
vah will surely separate (separating will separate, Hi.) me. 
Seek ye me (pi. Qi.). Thou hast tried us as the trying 
of (p with Inf. cstr.) silver. 12 We ceased 15 to burn in- 
cense (Qi.). And they (w.c.) shall pursue 21 thee. He was 
pursuing (Inf. cstr.) with (3) a sword 8 his brother-. 34 Seek 
(Qi.) peace 20 and pursue it (m.). And he (w.c.) pursued 
them. And they (w.c.) shall burn 24 it (/.). For thou 
wilt visit 15 him (3 demon.). Ye shall seek 15 me with (3) 
all your heart. 23 



38. PARTICLES WITH SUFFIXES. —ADVERBS. 



1. 



•n cnap 


r» 


P CH3H) 


T PI3*K 

t| t v - 


*i?i* 


^?H CJJJ1) 


i s K 


tiJTS 


1?n 


T ~ 


T v •• 


mn (i3|n) 





wrK 


;dfi 



w 



D3tf' 



TO 






74 PARTICLES WITH SUFFIXES. 

Eem. — 1. In some cases typical forms only are given in the table ; in others, 
all that are in use. 2. While these particles have, in general, the suffixes of the 
noun, all in this table may also have 3 demonstrative CfotJ^: Deut. xxix. 14), 
and the union vowel frequently differs from that of the noun. 3. These particles 
all involve a verbal idea, and may include the copula (Where art thou ? Thou 
art not. Behold I am here, etc.). 4. Excepting *7l2?* each of these words has 
a cstr. form (\v*, pfc, -}£,«-#*). 

2. ^a^?3- nnMH>T> **Gt?* TI 5 ^ ?013> 

5^30? V3^3D- There are a few other adverbs which take some 

• t t • : 

of the suffixes of the noun. 



tK 1 then, 

T 

^ where (see § 11). 
PK 2 ( to De ) naught, not. 
Vl/S 3 not > except. 
H» !"tn 4 behold ! 
TliT 5 together. 



^P (to be) something, there is. 

13-7 6 alone (7 is a prefix). 

DDD 7 turn about. ^^D m - and - ac?v - 

circuit, roundabout. 
TO* repeat. TO CTO again, still. 

See vocab. § 28. 



1 Composed of the demon. | and ^ prosthetic. 2 Not p^. May be remembered 
as the opposite of t£p. 3 From a verb H7^ T meaning to waste away (to nothing). 
It comes from a form ri73, with *_ paragogic. It is used principally with the 
Inf. 4 Disting. flSH from prcm. rtSil- 5 R- akin to numeral IfTX = i 11 its unity, 
as one, i.e., together. 6 E. '1D= separate. Cf. ^H^. 7 Assoc, the meaning 
with the form of its letters,, especially Q. 

Exercise. — And the Canaanite (^S3J3) was then in the 
land. 9 Where art thou? And man 31 there-was-not to 
till 8 the ground. 31 And he was not (he, he-was-not). 
Not-to (To not) hear. 18 Beliold-I (am here). Behold-we 
(are) < servants 8 to (^) my lord. 2 That 2 there-is a God 2 
in (^) Israel. Thou-art. Ye-are. Is my father yet 
alive 11 . (Is 11 yet, etc.) ? I-alone. They-alone. His blood 26 
upon (pV) the altar 18 round about. What is man 31 that 
thou rememberest 18 him (Impf.), and the son 11 of man 
that thou visitest 15 him (3 demon.). Righteous 13 (art) 
thou, Jehovah, in (3) thy judging 30 (Inf.). And they 
(w.c.) will gather themselves 23 together (Ni.). 



PAETICLES WITH SUFFIXES. 75 

§39. PARTICLES WITH SUFFIXES. — PREPOSITIONS. 



1. 



b 


r« 


riK 


?' 1?: ? 


P 


b 


"■W 


T& 


T 


#9 


i? 


W 


sjrttj 


Tjiis 


sjeio 


t 


■s|r«s 


TO* 


W 


^W 


i 1 ? 


ins 


ins 


W33 

T 


^ 


Tb 

T 


T • 


nnx 

T 


nrtbi 

T T 


nsEi? 


T 


writ* 


wnfc 


ub| 


!)]Jj^jQ 


V T 


CDriK 


mnx 


v T 


crp 


1* 


19W 


I9W 


199 


19* 


«* 


T • 


ens 


en? 


c™ 


1* 


fW 


jns 


P? 


IDS 



Rem. — 1. The forms of ?£. in part, come from doubling (T£i£ = 7EE)- 
It is one result of a general effort to give more "body to these particles, as in 
)f22 (=2 and HE)- The latter is mostly used with suffixes; only in poetry 
before substantives (§ 12. r. 2). 2. The difference between J")X with . with suffixes, 
and J-|^. the sign of the definite accus., will be noticed. They are somewhat 
mixed in the books of Kings, Jer., and Ezek. Like the former. £" is treated, 
excepting a few forms ("E^ or 'Hi*". £*£"• '2%"); and like '»■), for the most 
part. '2- 3. The idiomatic phrase 22^1 * pTlfi — "^Tiat have I to do with 
thee ? 4. The prep. ^ with a pronominal suffix is often used (especially after verbs 
of motion) somewhat pleonastically. As denoting an intimate participation of 
the subject in the act. it is named by some grammarians the ethic dative. 
rh HEwVI fake heed (to yourself). 

2. 'bx, ds^k- na wns- ^ CD^- The tllree 

prepositions ^^, ^JJ, and ^^, having ended originally in ^__, 

assume this form with, pronominal suffixes. By some grammarians 
they are called plurals. In poetry their cstr. is used independently 
of suffixes. 

3 - nnx, 34 nrix- nnn vinn- pa v/yz- There are 

certain other prepositions which actually take the plural form with 



76 



DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 



suffixes, the last of the three named, however, only with plural 
suffixes. 



ttjtf 1 c. fire. ntStet* "firings" (sac- 
rifices by fire). 
7'nill 2 w. iron. 
72n 3 c. breath, Abel. 
D*!/!* 4 break, throw down. 

- T 

7^n 5 c - cord, region (measured). 



rtpin 6 /. wan. 

rbV g° up. S^ upon^ by, etc. fi^S 
/. burnt-offering. Ji^'J? Most High. 
?^D 7 above, (Jl^JfiJ) upwards. 
n^a*/- steps. 

nnii beneath. 



1 Discrim. from ty£, HEfat 2 Mn. " Barzillai " (^pHS), iron (man): 
2 Sam. xvii. 27. 3 Mn. "Abel" (7D<"I ^ Pause )- 4 En g- harass approaches it 
in sound and idea. 5 Discrim. from 7DH- 6 Gr. x <*>/"«? equiv. in sound and 
sense. ' Idea of r. may be associated with 7^, already used several times. 
The burnt- offering was so called from being wholly consumed {going up in fire 
and smoke). 

Exercise. — And I (w.c.) burnt 24 it (m. with fitf) with (3) 
fire. To her. With thee (/.). From us. From her. 
Thy heavens 10 which are over thy head 3 (shall be) copper, 33 
and the earth 9 which is under thee (shall be) iron. Where 
(§11.4) is Abel thy brother? 34 Two (W) lines. The 
king 13 of Israel (was) passing. (Q. Part.) 23 on the wall, and 
a woman cried 24 unto him (^K). And they (w.c.) shall 
break clown thy (/.) walls. An offering (made by fire) 
unto (^) Jehovah. Sacrifices 18 and burnt-offerings. Sheol 12 
from beneath is moved 36 (Perf./.) for thee. With (OS) 
me. With you. Like us. After him. 



40. DECREES OF COMPARISON. 



1- * ^XMfi n.RS 33H thou art wiser than Daniel. 
2 bl*15H H33 tlie el ' der of ner sons - 3,, 3ib^ 133 to ° heavy for 

t - T : • V • •• T 

me. The Hebrew has no special forms for indicating degrees in 
the comparison of Adjectives. The comparative degree is expressed 
by prefixing Ifo to the word with which the comparison is made; 1 
or, if the objects compared do not immediately succeed one another, 
by the use of the article. 2 1Q is also used to express the idea that a 
thing is too great or too little, or the like, for a specified purpose. 3 



DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 77 

2. ^bpO tlie yo^gest son; jjpjpg <])$ (or ^J3 jfcp) the 

youngest of his sons. 2 Q^itO the best of them; D^DS *1^2V 
servant of servants. 3m \' r \ ^V*"]^ to generations of generations; 
*7Xtt "IK^ 711*73 exceedingly great. The Hebrew has a variety 
of ways to express the idea of superlativeness : as by the use of the 
article with the adjective 1 ; or by a Genitive following the object 
compared (it may be a pronominal suffix) 2 ; or, a less definite super- 
lativeness, by a repetition of a word, or the use of an adverb. 3 



Ifiy* i dry up. ntTS'' t /• dry ground. 

•• T T T " 

J"pp cast, found. HTin /• l aw ? Torah. 



'1t?S 2 c. tongue. 



JTd'p * 6 hard, rough. flu^p c. bow. 
V*Cn_* 7 he wicked. JHtf'-j wicked. 
2?t2/l* (i) m- wickedness. 

rn>? »*• field. 

7^5 1? 8 m. spoil. 



"TO 9 (cstr. ^y\) m. middle, midst. 
Hariri 10 /■ abomination. 



7 T 

Tl£ * 3 measure. Pl^ft /• measure. 

TDF) continually. 
HS2I 4 l°°k about, watch, overlay. 
JPpro., H^p* 5 /-, n^j5 m. end. 

1 Mn. " Jabesh" Gilead= dry Gilead. 2 R. JltlV? = lick. Xote also shape of 

T T 

first letter. 3 Sansc. Mad, Eng. mete. 4 Mn. "Mizpeh" (nSlhE)i watch-tower. 
Idea of r. is cover, conceal (c/. |E^)- One conceals himself to watch, spy out. 
5 Letters yp = cut off. Of. ^p, ^Stp- 6 Easy to see how the word for 
bow, on account of its stiffness, rigidity, comes from this r. £*p = stubble. 
7 Mn. "rash," which in its original meaning, be in commotion, corresponds 
pretty well with ^"^H he loose, without firmness. Cf. Isa. Mi. 20, "troubled 
sea." 8 R. = draw out, away, akm to 7^U? (draw out by) question. 9 To be 
associated with Hip? both much used for midst. 10 Used more than 100 times 
in the Bible, often in the expression HlIT rQVlfi- 

T : - -: I 

Exercise. — His eldest 10 son. 11 More righteous 13 than 
(from) he. Is this your youngest 17 brother? 34 Is it too 
little (BJMp) for (from) you ? A day 10 in thy courts OStf) 
is better 10 than a thousand. 3 The most glorious song 26 
(song of songs). The earth 9 became dry. The law of 
mercy 29 (is) on 39 her tongue. (He) passes 23 (Part.) by 

us (^S) continually. At (7) the end of the days. He 
maketh wars 24 cease 16 unto 28 the end (HSp) of the earth; 
(the) bow he breaketh in pieces 14 (Qi.). An abomination 
unto (of) Jehovah (is) the way 12 of the wicked (sing.). 
Divide ye (p'Pff) the spoil of your enemies 30 with (DSJ) 
your brethren. In (2) the mount 9 from the midst of the 
fire. 39 



78 VERBS K'S. 

§41. WEAK VERBS.— VERBS X"S- 

1. The distinction between the Strong and Weak verbs, and the 
nomenclature of the latter, have already been noted (§ 14. 1. 2). 
Verbs having J^ as their first radical are properly gutturals. In 
certain of them, however, ^ is not so treated throughout, but as 
a quiescent letter, losing its power as a consonant, and becoming 
blended with the preceding vowel (§ 5). 

Impf. s. 3. to. b'DW pl- 3. to. 'ta^ 

3./. bsxn 3./. nAiita 

~ T : - 

2. to. bzxn 2. m. to«n 

2. /. *bsxr\ 2. /. rnbhtin 

• : I t : - 

i. c. S5& i.e. bzx: 

2. In the Impf. Q. of six verbs beginning with ^ this letter 
quiesces in 6, which is an obscured a (yaakhal = ydkhal = yokhal) . 
In the 1. pers. s. (rarely elsewhere) the radical letter ^ itself dis- 
appears. 

Rem. 1. — These verbs may be easily remembered by arranging them as 
follows: He said 0!£K)> he wished (j-Q&), to eat (b3K); he baked (HSX), 
he seized (tHX)? he perished (13&). ^ m 1H& does not always so quiesce. 

Rem. 2. — There are two other verbs beginning with ^ which occasionally 
follow this analogy : &1DK, three times, twice with a dropping of the ^ (FlDi^ 
F]D'H)> which might lead to a confounding of the word with some forms of Fp^ ; 
and 3HK love, in the 1. s. Impf. (2H&)- 



^5t1^ 1 m. granary, treasury. 
b^ 2 »»■ ram; pl. D vK tne mighty 
the foremost. 

bsx 3 eat. bsx (/• rtea) food 
SjjKp food. " 

nS^^'oake (HSK baker). 

T T, 

I71& 4 to. way, course. 



THX * be long, tarry. Tptf m. length. 

'"liS 5 to. cistern, pit. 

'"inS 6 choose. ""^rD* m - chosen one 

- T T 

(youth, etc.). 
rD3 7 weep. ^3* to. weeping. 
TO3 8 /• height, high place. 

T T 

S"p^ 9 add, (with other verbs) again. 

1 Mn. " Oats are" (there). 2 Mn. " Aijalon" (place of deer). 3 It will be 
remembered best as a &$"£ verb in connection with the sentence above. 4 To be 
associated with, and discriminated from, the next word (|"| marks the word 
meaning way, *7| that meaning be long). 5 Mn. "Bore," to which its r. is nearly 
equivalent. Of. *1K3. 6 Associate the three words of similar sound thus : 
0^153 nin333 *lH3 he chose the firstborn of the cattle. Note the order of 

•It : : • - t 



VERBS 3"B. 



79 



the consonants (ft, 3, p). 7 Mn. " Baca" (fcOS a dropping (weeping) balsam): 
Ps. lxxxiv. 7. 8 Mn. "Bema" (&vna) raised place. 9 Mn. and deriv. "Joseph" 
(FpV): Gen. xxx. 24, "the Lord add,"" etc. 

Exercise. — The treasury of the house 3 of Jehovah. 
And behold ! 38 a ram caught 27 (Ni. Part.) by (3) his horns 
(J™1P). Thou may est surely eat (eating thou mayest eat). 
Teach 18 me (Qi.) thy ways (pi. in fll)- Lengthen (Hi.) 
thy cords. 39 As to (*?) its (/.) length. We will cast 22 
him (Hi.) into (3) one 35 of the pits (pi. in fii). Choose 
ye (for you 39 ) to-day 10 whom pft'TlX) ye will serve. 8 
The people 9 (were) sacrificing 18 and burning incense 37 (both 
Qi. Parts.) in the high places. And (w.c.) said to them. 39 
And they (w.c.) took 27 him (ifiiX) anc ^ s l ew him. 24 And 
they (w.c.) said, let us not 15 perish 8 (Cohort.) for (3) this 
man's 9 life 32 (soul). 

§ 42. VERBS J'fi- 



Per/, s. 3. m tPM 

3. /. HM 

T : IT 

2. m fltfia 

T ; - T 

pi- 2. m nrp&ia 

Inf. cstr ri v?i 

Inf. aos ttftQ 

Imp. s. m tT3 

pi.f. ......... nr^ii 

T : - 

Impf s. 3. m t£j;p 

2. /. ^ an 

1- c tf|K 

i>?. 3. /. naftin 

T : - • 

Pari, acf ^J3 

Pari, pass t£haa 



ntfsa 

t : • 
T : - • 

Dritfaa 

" T • 
T • 

" T • 

^aan 

• : IT • 

natfian 

T : - T • 

tfar 

" T • 

regular 



ttfaa 



Hi. 

Win 

T • • 

T : - • 

t^an 
tthan 

najfth 
natfari 

T : •• - 

tf"a& 



Ho. 

nran 

T : i 

mtfin 

T : ~ •• 

nritra_n 

wanting 



natfan 



80 VERBS }"£. 

1. Verbs J" £ show but a few variations from the Strong verb ; 
none at all in the Qi. and Qu. Voices. When, in process of inflec- 
tion, the J would come at the end of a syllable and be pointed 
with a silent S e wa, it is assimilated to the following radical, the 
assimilation being indicated by a D. forte (Q. Impf., Ni. Perf. and 
Part., and in the Hi. and Ho. throughout). 

Rem. 1. — Assimilation does not take place, however, in verbs medial gut- 
tural, and in a few other eases, especially in Pause. 

Rem. 2. — A certain number of these verbs (like t$J3)j in addition to those 
medial guttural, have a in the Q. Impf., and some others have either a or 6. 

Rem. 3. — In the Ho. the original u appears (instead of o) in the sharpened 
syllable. 

2- t#3> TW% ntyi T12?3 (* thinned from a), etc. In the 
Q. of some y'Q verbs, this letter at the beginning of a syllable, when 
not supported by a full vowel, is dropped (Inf. cstr., Imp.). In the 
Inf. cstr. this shortened root is again made triliteral by the addition 
of 71? marking the feminine, so becoming a Segholate (of the i 
class), and inflected accordingly. 

3 - riHpj Pip* ^p ,,, • Tne verb llpb (except in Ni.) follows 
the analogy of the y'Q verbs. 

4- nm nm anm «m nn (=ron with the vowei 

t - ? : - t v - : - t •• : : • 

heightened and the weak consonant assimilated), *f)F\ etc. ■?£] 
(rT3n)> ^D- jri^j ?riri- The verb }£°|J assimilates also its final J 
before J") (Q. Perf., Inf. cstr.), and naturally before another J (Q. Perf., 
1. Pers. pi.). In the Imp. the final vowel is e, as also in the Impf. 
in harmony with the Inf. cstr. as ground-form. The Inf. cstr. is 
inflected like a Segholate noun. 



Q&3 * say, utter oracularly. 

^2 2 m- Negeb, the south. 

i 
2?^D 3 touch, smite, plague. ^3 m. 

stroke, plague. 

SVQ smite. HS^* /• a smiting. 

7jf3 4 inherit. JlSn3 /• inheritance. 

- t T -: l- 

^ni m - wady, (and its) brook. 

QJ-p NL repent, Qi. comfort. Mn. 

- T 

"Nahum" (t^n^)? consoler. 
2?t23 5 pla^j drive (tent-pin). 



HD3* 6 try, prove. 

TT53" pour out (a drink-offering). T[pjj 

(i) m. a drink-offering. 
^D3 5 pnll ou t (tent-pin), journey. 
2^3 8 (and 2^ Hithq.) be set, fixed, 

- T " T 

stand. rQ?J)§ /• pillar. 
^} 9 deliver. 

- T 

^liM preserve. 

- T 

?.TD 10 give, set, appoint, etc. 

1 Like *F£, used but once except as Part. (Dfcti)- 2 0ne of the divisions of 
Southern Palestine. 3 R. 3 J, in many words, has the idea of touching more or 



VERBS ""'a. 81 

less forcibly. Gf. "C^ and the following word here. 4 Following word is from 
a different r. Both may be better remembered by thinking of the wady as a 
possible boundary of an inheritance. 5 Gf. H123- Both words, with ^Q}, 
have to do with the tent (H103 t0 spread it ; ^*£1 drive its pins ; "£] pull them 
up). 6 Mn. and deriv. "Massah" (HDft), proving: Ex. xvii. 7. Discriminate 
from ££]. 7 Associate with "sack" (a dry Spanish wine). 8 Akin to nilC 
with its mn. fi^ Zion. 9 This word and the next (note radicals) include in idea 
much of what God now does for us. 10 Mn. "Xathan," he (God) has given 
(= Xathanael) . 

Exercise. — Utterance of Jehovah. And thou, take 19 
unto Cp) thee from all food. 41 And ye shall not touch it 
(13). 'And (w.c.) Jehovah smote Pharaoh (HSlBTl^) 
(with) great smitings. Bring near 14 (Hi.) the burnt-offering. 39 
And ye (w.c.) shall be smitten (Ni.) before (^JB 1 ?) your 
enemies. 30 For 2 thou shalt make this people 9 inherit the 
land 9 which I swore 25 (Ni.) to their fathers 8 to give to (*?) 
them. Comfort ye (Qi. pi.), comfort ye my people, saith 5 
(Impf.) your God. Where (§ 10. 4) he spread 30 his tent. 33 
He shall plant the tents. And (w.c.) Abram journeyed. 
And they (w.c.) will pour out (Hi.) drink-offerings to (*?) 
other 34 gods. Behold 38 I stand (Ni. Part.) by (b?) the 
fountain 3 of water. 3 And /delivered thee (Hi.) from the 
hand 3 of Saul (btttttf). To the keepers (Q. Part.) 15 of his 
covenant. 20 Give {pi-) to me the possession 27 of a burying- 
place 15 with (D2) you. My giving (Inf. cstr.) the inheri- 
tance of my fathers 8 to thee. 



§ 43. VERBS V 'S- 



Q- 

Per/, s. 3. m y&" 

- T 

8. /. regular 

2. m 

pi. 2. m 

Inf. cstr rDtZ? 

Inf. abs 2it^ 



Ni. 


Hi. 


Ho. 


striJ 


ywn 


atthn 


ratoti 


nn^in 


pdwi 

T : i 


rdifria 

t : - 


rotfein 

T ; - 


T : - 


brottia 


proton 


oratrin 


" T • 


win 


ywn 


wanting 


awn 


wanting 



32 






VERBS i 


'S. 










Q. 




m. 


Hi. 


tfo. 


Imp. s. m 


ntf cratf) tin; 


3 
p 
p 


/. .... 


• *sp 




IPT 


■qtojn 


'D^in 


pi. f. ... 






7 : - : 


T : - T ■ 


7 : " 


p 


Impf. s. 3. m. 


^ 




#T? 


" 7 • 


:rtfv 


^ot 


2./... 


• : i" 




i#T*l 


■fltfvi 


■mbta 


iptt^n 


1. c. 


• ^ITS 




#T* 


" 7 • 


rrtfia 


stf* 


pl.S.f.. 


T : - - 




t : - • 


7 : - 7 • 


njrinn 


7 : - 


Part. act. . . . 


2tt^ 






7 


wto 




Part. pass. . . 


T 










T 



1. Verbs *>"g are of three classes. The first two include those 
whose first radical was originally 1 ; the last are the proper Vg. 

2. In the first class of *"Q (or *j) verbs, the original *] appears as 
*i when initial (Q. Perf., Qi., Qu., and, partly, Hithq.), except in the 
Q. Impf. and related parts. In the latter case, (a) the first radical 
may be dropped, the stem vowel, originally i, becoming under the 
tone e (a with a guttural) ; while that of the preformative (? from 
a union of 1 with a) becomes an unchangeable e. The Inf. cstr. 
(like verbs J'g) taking the fern, ending £") assumes the form of a 
Segholate noun, which when inflected takes i under its first radical. 
Or (b) if the first radical be retained in the Impf., the stem vowel 
is a,- and ^ (become i), uniting with the i of the preformative forms i. 

Rem. 1. — There are but eight v '£ verbs which regularly drop their first 
radical in the Q. Impf. and related parts ($y*, HlT 5 "l^'S *]b* C]bn), 2iT "be 
dislocated, -pp, K^, D^)- 

Rem. 2. — There are but three of this class of verbs which retain * invariably 
in the Imp. (JIT 1 , $0"S H"!^)- There are others which appear in both forms 
(UTT, etc.). 

3. When in verbs originally y"£) the *j is not initial, it is treated 
as a consonant at the beginning of a syllable (Ni. Inf. cstr., Imp., 
Impf., and sometimes Hithq.) ; and as a vowel at the end of a 
syllable. As a vowel it either coalesces with a homogeneous vowel 
(Ho.) or is contracted with an (original) a to 6 (Ni. Perf. and 
Part., Hi.). 

Rem. 1. — In the Qi. and Qu. Voices 1 appears always as \ and these Voices 
are inflected regularly. The same is partly true of the Hithq. (c/. 2). 



VERBS "'£. 



83 



Rem. 2. — The lengthened form of the Imp. is frequent in these verbs. 
StI? or pnttf from 2"u *• 

T : " T . 

Rem. 3. — The verb T\)* has forms of its own in the Q. Impf. and related 
parts (T]^, T|b ; lj ^b (TDS)i *& \ TCfr, "TOS my going) ; but elsewhere 
"n^H i s used. 

Rem. 4. — The verb h^ forms its Q. Impf. irregularly (731\ etc. for ^l" 1 
from ^3V ; others suppose the form to belong to the Ho. Voice) ; also its Inf. 

cstr. rby 1 - 

4. pjl. Inf. cstr. fpi'- Im P- pSP and pS- Im P f - pSS^- 
The second class of verbs originally yg follow the analogy of 
y'£ verbs. The first stem letter, when coming at the end of a 
syllable with, silent S e wa, is assimilated to the next ; and when 
standing at the beginning of a syllable unsupported by a full vowel, 
is dropped. There is considerable variation, however, in their in- 
flection. Their forms may be generally distinguished from those of 
verbs J 7/ ^ by the fact that ^"£ verbs of this class have almost 
exclusively ^ as a middle radical. 

5. i£2^- Q. Inf. cstr. regular; Imp. wanting; Impf. ^{^ ; 
Part, regular. Hi. ^^H (HlTim l^STD; Infs - S^ft 

a©Ti; Im p- rwrn c^irn); impf.^D^; ?«■*■ n^o. 

The third class of verbs ^''Q, i.e., verbs whose first radical was 
originally \ have the following characteristics. In the Q. Impf. 
this *, which is never dropped, unites with the vowel of the pre- 
formative (i) and forms %. In the Hi. this radical unites with the 
original vowel of the preformative (a) and forms e, "which, being 
unchangeable appears in all the other forms of this Voice. There 
are no forms of the Xi. and Ho. Voices. There are but eight verbs 
in the class altogether, and all are more or less defective. 



|*>^ counsel. H^" 
i^"' 6 pour. 
"1^ T form, make. 

- 7 

*TT S go down. 



/. counsel. 



119 



possess, Hi. (sometimes) dis- 



2TT 1 know. n9*i /■ knowledge. 

^ 2 (and Tjbn) go, walk. 

■"ID" 13 instruct, chastise. IQIft m. 

- T T 

correction. 
I"" 1 * appoint, meet. JIT!? /• congre- 

- T T - 

gation (of Israel). H"!^ 1 »*• sea- 
son, festival, assembly. 

1 Cf. etSo., otta. 2 Imp. lb, "^S, TOb ^ very common, lb lb Get thee ! 
8 Connect the three v '£ verbs, 10\ W\ 1*>*- Read from the right. 4 One of 
the names of the Tabernacle was 1"i^ 7ff& For two others see §§ 6, 21. 
5 Discriminate from fern, of t*3? wood. 6 Assoc, with ^23 ( mn . "Sack"). 



possess. 



M i*Vn m - ne vr wine. 



84 



verbs m 



7 Allied r. ^HSC, ^ (nin. "Tsar"), meaning press, oppress. This means, too, 
press, impress, form. 8 Mn. "Jordan" Q'T"] 9 )! the descender). 9 Assoc, with 
other words in t^l, thus: t£?^n (hie sought), t£H3 (he drove out"), t£V"p (he 

- T ~T -T 

possessed) , and note progress of thought. 

Exercise. — Know (pi.). To know good 10 and evil (STl). 
And to walk with (DS) wicked men 9 (men of wicked- 
ness 40 ). Be instructed (Ni. Imp.), ye judges 30 of the 
earth. 9 There (Dtt?) hath he appointed it (/.). Speak 6 
(Qi.pl.) to ( vS-) all 2 the congregation of Israel. He 
counselled in those days. 10 Pour out for the people 9 that 
(w.c.) they may eat 41 (Impf.). The man 31 whom he had 
formed. He that formeth (Part.) the mountains. 9 When 
(2) he came down (Inf. cstr.) from the mount. And they 
(w.c.) possessed his land. 9 







§ 44. VERBS 1"2- 










Q. 


Ni. 

Dip; 


Hi. 

Q , p'"' 


Ho. 


Per/, s. 3. m. . . . 


... D p 


na 


Dpin 


3. /. . . . 


. . . ntip r 


nrub 

T " 


n*ip? 


n^pn 


napin 

T |: l 


2. m. ... 


... flOji 


T - 


nibip; 


niapn 


rifcpin 


pi. 2. m. 


• • • Efifcp 


Dfifc 


Dnitolpj 


onisrpn 


Dnapin 


Inf. cstr 


... Dip 




Dipn 


Q'PO 


Dpin 


Inf. abs 


. . • Dip 




Dipn 


op? 


wanting 


Imp. s. m 


. • • Dip 




Dipn 


°P? 


3 

p 


/• 


. . . wjb 




*p\pn 


^P* 


e-t- 
B' 


Pi- /• 


... map 




nibjari 


n:apn 

T : 1 " T 


OR 


Impf s. 3. m. . . . 


... Dip: 




nip: 


tfR 


Dpi" 


2./.... 


...^ipn 




•ttijbn 


TO 


^pin 


pi. 3. /. . . . 


• n r?w 




T : 1 


nojspn 

T : 1 • T 


rujbpin 


Part, act 


... Dp, 


D& 


Dip: 


DT?8 




Part, pass 


. • • Dip 








Dpifc 



VERBS TV. 85 

1. The irregularities in the inflection of verbs y*J consist mainly 
in the elision of the weak middle radical together with one of the 
vowels, usually the preceding. 

Rem. — 1. Q. Perf. was orig. qawam, aw being elided, and final a under the 
tone becoming a ; Inf. cstr. and Imp., orig. qwum, wu = u ; Impf., orig. yaqwum, 
a in an open syllable — a ; Part, act., orig. qawim, w being rejected and i ab- 
sorbed; Part, pass., orig. qawiim, a being rejected. 2. Perf. and Part, of 
intrans. verb were orig. maicith, the present form eliding w and retaining and 
heightening vowel. 3. Ni. Perf. and Part., orig. tuaqwam, which is contracted 
to n&qom, the final syllable appearing in all subsequent forms of this Voice, 
4. Hi. Perf. and Part, were orig. haqwam (thinned a in first, and, after Inf. cstr., i 
in second, syllable), miqwim (i in an open syllable = e). 5. The forms of the 
Imp. Hjftbi ri3ftpn are due to the vocal law that u and i cannot stand in a shut 

T.I T . I " T 

penultimate syllable even with the tone (§ 3. 4. r.). 6. Before the affixes be- 
ginning with the consonantal afformatives J"] and } (Perf. and Impf.), except in 
Q.,Ho. Perf., Hi. Impf., etc., an additional syllable is generally found (probably an- 
original vowel of the stem is used for the purpose),- which serves to open the 
stem syllable and protect its vowel. 7. The change of tone works a change in 
the vowel o of the Ni. Perf. in some parts to u. 8. The verb pftj has an- alter- 
native form in the Hi. Impf. and Imp. (iTS" 1 )- 

2. The endings ,*7 , \ ^ _, it will be noted, do not generally take 

T 

the tone in this verb, the contracted stem drawing it to itself. 

3- t2?l3> *ri2?3; tt?l3^ Intransitive verbs of this class whose 
middle vowel is o retain it throughout the Q. 

4. J$3 5 Inf - Xl3> Im P f - Kl3^- In the Inf • and related forms, 

7 T 

besides the ordinary form with u (changed to #) in the last syllable, 
there are some with a heightened to a, and then obscured to 6. 

5- tin\ DB*1> QS^j DD*Y The Jussive and Waw consecutive 

I t |t t- I" t I * t- 

forms of the Q. and Hi. should be especially noted. In one case we 
have o becoming o with the tone retracted ; in the other, e becoming e. 



K12 1 come in. KlDft* c - entrance. 

T 

HSOri * /• income, increase. 
]& If?) stay over night, ^p, tfyfy 

to. night. 
Dltt 3 die. nib (cstr. ffi£) to. death. 

V T 

DYlft* men (adults). 



pf^ rest, n'iT3 * w*. rest, pleasantness. 

Mn. "Noah" (fffi), 
D13 nee (? tne noose). 
2? 13 shake, wander. Cf nuo, nnto. 
6V|3 wave. HS13ri* 4 /- wave offering. 



1 Antithetic to K^ go out. 2 Note interchange of the liquids } and 7 in verb 

T T 

and noun. 3 To be associated with the following word, which is from an obso- 
lete sing. ]■)£• The roots flHtti llfc, nift* etc. = what is stretched out, 
DTlD as full grown men, Jlft as a dead man. 4 Assoc, words for offerings 
(burnt-offerings, 39 peace-offerings, 20 heave-offerings, 10 etc.). 



86 VERBS n T 

Exercise. — Jehovah shall keep 15 thy going forth 
CTiriKS) and thy coming in (Inf. c). The spirit (PTI^l) of 
Jehovah shall cause him to rest. Stay over night (/.) 
to-night (§ 9. e. 1). For 2 in the day 10 of thy eating 41 
(Inf. c.) from it (m.) dying (§ 15. 2) thou shalt die. And 
he (w.c.) shall die. The men and the women 9 and the 
children (f|D sing.). They flee (Part. pi.). And (w.c.) 
Judah (i"H1iT) was smitten 42 (Ni.) before (^B 1 ?) Israel, 
and they fled e very-man (tE^X) to his tent. 33 The daugh- 
ter 11 of Jerusalem hath shaken (Hi.) her head. 3 I will 
wave (Hi. Part.) my hand h over them. 39 Let him arise 19 
(Jussive). And he (w.c.) arose. Let him establish (Hi.). 
And he (w.c.) hath established his word 6 which he spoke 6 
(Qi.) over us. 39 Let them be ashamed. 17 



§ 45. VERBS y '2 AND THE INTENSIVE VOICES. 



Perf. s. 3. m. 



?? 


Inf. cstr. p2 


Imp. s. m. p3 


Impf. s. 3. m. p^* 1 


H33 

T T 


abs. rj3 


/. t? 


2./. iy6p\ 

• T 


run 

t ; - 




pi. m. W$ 


Part, act |2 

Part, pass ?!Q 



I. As in verbs *"Q, we find also in the present class ] not in- 
frequently changed to \ The vocalization being thus changed, 
there appears in the Q. some forms resembling those of the Hi. 
(Impf.); or of the Hi. apocopated (Inf. cstr., Imp.). In fact, they 
are regarded as such by some grammarians. These (Q.) forms are 

inflected like Q^, except that ^ takes the place of *). In the 

other Voices the inflection of these words conforms in all respects 
to that of the proper }"S verbs. 

Rem. 1. — The words of this sort most used are pQ (P3)' ?*|5 O h 3)> 

bin 6td, nw (d^»), nw art?)- 

Rem. 2. — It is often not possible to distinguish the Q. Impf. of these verbs 
from the Hi. Impf. except by the sense. 

Rem. 3. — It is probable thac in some of the verbs just cited, and certainly 
in some others, the original middle radical was actually \ 



AND THE INTENSIVE VOICES. 87 

2- P3> rTT3> rWS? etc - Sometimes 1 is found as a middle 
radical in the Q. Perf. It is then inflected like an apocopated Hi. 
(i.e., a Hi. with its first syllable wanting) . 

3. "B»p. 2 Perf. QOip (Dttip)i Inf. e. Q^ip ; Impf. 

btop) <D©lj3*); Par*, oaip^ (palps?)- b Dpf?p, Dpjpp- 

The intensive Voices (Qi., Qu., Hithq.) are not ordinarily used with 
verbs }'"$ ( n "J?). There are a few examples in *"$ verbs; 1 but 
only one of an y'JJ. The same effect has been secured by doubling 
the last radical and then inflecting as a strong verb with unchange- 
able vowels. 2 These Voices are accordingly to be named in harmony 
with their vocalization, Q6lel, Q6lal, Hithq.6lel (or on the basis of 
bS£> P6 c lel, P6'lal, Hithpdlel), respectively. More rarely both 
the first and last radical are repeated, forming so-called Qilqel, 
Qulqal (Pilpel, Pulpal) Voices. 3 



X'-Q 1 create. 

nbinS 2 /• virgin (=the separated). 

T : 

*"n3 sojourn. ^ \m. sojourner, stranger. 

T^ 3 (T13) circle about (in joy), rejoice. 

S^n 4 (v^H) circle about (in joy or 

pain), be in pain, wait. ^H ^ ( r01in( l 



by rolling), m. sand, ^p], cstr.^ft 

(strong by twisting) m. might, force 

(army). 
D v tT 5 (JOW) set, place. 
Wtf set, place. Mn. ' ' Setli ' ' ,(TW) '• 

Gen. iv. 25. 



i Gen. i. 1 ; D\ibtf K*13 ITttf 8*13. 2 Cf. ^3, and assoc. with it. 3 Mn. 
"Abigail" (7^3K) j father's joy. 4 To be assoc. with the preceding. 5 Com- 
bine with following as having the same general meaning. 

Exercise. — Sojourn (m. s.) in this land. 9 And for (7) 
the stranger who sojourneth (Part, with Art.) in the land. 
My soul 32 shall rejoice in Jehovah. We have been in pain. 
The virgin of Israel hath fallen. 22 And he (w c.) set 
(D*t?) his life 32 in his hand (IB?). All 2 (things) thou 
hast put (ITtt?) under 39 his feet. 32 My people 9 as (7) an 
enemy 30 riseth up 19 (Qolel Impf.). And I, behold I 38 
establish (Hi. Part, of Dip) my covenant 20 with (IIS) 
you. The tabernacle 21 was reared up (Ho.). 19 And he 
shall exalt himself (Hithqo .) 10 and make himself great 
(Hithq.). 10 



88 



VERBS 17"!?. 



§ 46. VERBS 5>"S. 



q. m. 

per/. 8. 3, » naao no to SDl 

T -: it - I- - T 

3./. nao rhp nsDi 

2.W-. niao nfe ntaoa 

T - T t~ T - S 

/«/• e«r ab aan 

in/. «&& aiao aijsn 

7wy>. *. w ° • • DD aD!7 

/ -. — *ab ^aarr 

*>*./ waa nraan 

t V V T V - • 

iinp/. «. 3. m ab* ab* Sp' ^ 

2./. *atiri ^sn ^asri 

p*. 3. /. nraon masn waan 

T .... - T . . T .. _ . 

Pari. act. . . Mb DDJ 

T T 

Pari, pass aiaD 



Hi. 


Ho. 


son 


DDlfi 


nabn 

T " " 


mbin 

T - 


niaan 

T • 1 


maoin 


SDH 

- T 


wanting 


son 


wanting 


... T 
^aon 


1 


nracn 

1 V * -S 


CR 


" T 


: sdf 




'•amn 


waan 


nraoin 



aoia 



aaia 



1. The chief irregularity in the inflection of verbs JJ /; JJ consists 
in doubling (by D. forte, where possible) the second radical as 
representative of both the second and third, which in this class of 
verbs are identical. On the other hand, the Perf. Q. of nearly all 
transitive verbs of this class, as well as those parts of other verbs 
in which the last two consonants are separated by an unchangeable 
vowel (Q. Inf. abs., Parts., and Qi., Qu., if used) are inflected 
regularly. 

2. The two consonants of the root, which are alike, being doubled, 
the vowel of the second (as in verbs Y'^) appears under the first 
(except in Hi., and Ni. Impf.) ; and the contracted stem takes the 
tone from the endings ff , \ * (except when it is thrown forward 

T 

after a Waw consecutive of the Perf.). 



Rem. 1. — The vowel of the stem in the Perf. Hi. is e> because i could not 
stand before the doubled consonant. 



verbs in?. 89 

Rem. 2. — The vowels of the preformatives when falling in open syllables are, 
of course, lengthened (Q. Impi, Ni. Perf., Part., Hi. and Ho. throughout), and 
an original a has in some cases been restored (Q. Impi, Ni. Peri). 

3. To make clear in pronunciation the doubling of the second 
radical, a helping vowel (Perf. 6, Impf. e) is used before the con- 
sonantal affirmatives J")> J, in four of the Voices. The difference 
from verbs yjj, which uses it only in the Q. Impf. and the M. and 
Hi. Perf., will be noted. 

Rem. — This rule with respect to the Ho. rests on an inference from the one 
example found in the Part. pi. f. (nlSDlft)- 

4. To show that a stem is *j'"$ in forms where there is no 
afformative, and consequently no D. forte in the second radical, a 
D. forte is sometimes put in the first radical, by way of compensa- 
tion (c/. alternative forms in Q. and Hi. Impfs.). 

5. 5D\ 3D*V DD* 1 ? 3D*!- r -^ ne unchanged Jussive forms, 

T T T - " T v 7- 

and those with Waw consecutive (Q. and Hh), as in verbs y'JJ, 
should here also be especially noted. 

6. QL, Qu. Perf. ^Q, 221 D 5 Infs. 2210, 221 D 5 Imp. 

221D ; impf. 2210} 22lD^ ; Parts. 22lD£, 331DI9- In 

the intensive stems, the inflection is either regular (D. forte in the 
middle radical, making contraction impossible), or an unchangeable 
6 is inserted after the first radical, and the inflection then proceeds 
regularly. In the latter case, the Voices would receive, on the basis 
of the verb 3 JO 3? the names Q6tet, Q6tat, and Hithqdtet (from 
^5J£, P6el, P6al, Hithpd'el). 

7. Nouns from verbs yjj and *"*} are represented by ft*\f2 
(cstr. nifi), J"P3 (cstr. f)^5) ; and those from verbs y /n $ by QX 

oax), & o^'am etc" 



PjK 1 also, yea, truly. 

Fjtf 2 m. nostril (du. D h 2^ face), 

breathing, anger. 
S^ll-l 3 m. (pebble) lot. 
rinn 4 De m dismay, trans, break, 

- T 

"■fiD 5 turn aside, remove. 



n^l 6 oe great, multiply, ^n 6 great, 

T T _ 

(/. n3*1) many. i"| m. multitude 
(last two from allied r. ii'H). 

s:n 7 be evii. ^n (/. nn) evil > 

- T ~ T T 

wicked. 

^)v£? 5 return. 



1 Discrim. from following. 2 Pull form and r. jrvj^ (hence D. forte in du.). 
Anger associated with (violent) breathing. 3 Mn. " Coral," which we may 
imagine to be the " pebble " or lot. 4 Mn. and deriv. " Hittite " (Tin) • They seem 
to have been redoubtable warriors. 5 Assoc, as follows : He turned aside OllD)> 
about ODD 38 )? returned Qlttf). 6 Mn. and deriv. "Rabbi 1 ' (^_, 'Paj8j3i). 



90 

or. ten, etc., §s 

principles or goal. 



VERBS T\"b. 



7 R. means be in commotion (ef. 3?t#*)), without fixed 



Exercise. —Also I in my dream. 3 In his nostrils. For 2 
in their anger they slew. (JHH) a man. And ye (w.c.) 
shall divide (Hithq. of ^TO 42 j the land 9 by p) lot. 
They were dismayed. Be not dismayed (Ni. Impf.). 
They have turned aside from the way. 12 And my mercy 29 
I will not remove (Hi.) from (from with OS) him. For 
great (/.)j° (was) the evil (/.) of the man. 31 Return (pi.) 
unto me (?X), and I will return (Cohort.) unto you. 







§47. VERBS n 


; ^. 








Q 


2Vi. 


Qi. 


£tt. 


Hi. 


Ho. 


Perf. s. 3. m. . 


... rbi 


nbaa 


rh) 


nfc 


nban 


rbn 


3./. . 


.. nnSa 


rinbaa 


nn^a 


nrfea 


nrfcan 


nnban 


2. m.. 


.. rr^a 


n^aa 


rr^a 

T • • 


rrtte 


rv^an 


rv^an 


pi. 2. m. . 


•■ bri^a 


EH^S 


on'*?? 


an^a 


tarp^lfl 


orphan 

v •• : T 


Inf. cstr 


• • niba 


nfen 


ni^a 


rrfea 


niSan 


niban 


Inf. abs 


.. riba 


rtboa 


n^a 


wanting 


nSan 


rfan 

" : T 


Imp. s. 2. m.. 


. . nba 


rfen 


n^a 


wanting 


nban 


wanting 


2./. . 


.. ^a 


^3H 


M 




^an 




pi. 2. f. . 


T v : 


na^an 

T V T • 


na^a 

T V _ 




nrSan 




Impf. s. 3. m. . 


••• rfap 


rhv 


rfe 


nfep 


rbv 


rbv 


2./. . 


. . . ^jn 


^an 


^an 


^^ 


^an 


^an 


1. c. . 


•■• nba** 


nba* 


n^ 


rfpas 


nbj* 


rfaiK 


pi. 3. /. . 


..rtWan 

T v : • 


na^ari 

T V T • 


na^an 

T v - : 


na^an 

T V \ . 


na^an 

T v : - 


na^an 

T v : t 


Part, act 


.. n^a 


nbi3 


n!?ap 




n^ae 




Part. pass. . . 


... ^3 

T 






rfaiti 




nbaa 

v : T 



verbs r\"b. 



91 



1. l rb) = *bl or I^J; Part- l^ss. 2 *frj. Verbs j-pb are 
properly V /l ^ (or *f/)> tne nna l H being simply the sign and 
accompaniment of the preceding long vowel 1 (§ 1. 4). The third 
radical (^), which is usually dropped when it does not coalesce with 
the preceding vowel, appears in the Part, pass., 2 before ft} of the 

Imp. and Impf., and occasionally elsewhere before afformatives 
beginning with vowels. Most of the verbs of this class were 
originally ^"^ ; but *] is found in place of ^ in a few forms. 

2. By attention to the following comparatively uniform prin- 
ciples the forms of this verb may be easily fixed in the memory.. 
(1) The ending of the Perf . 3. s. in all Voices is ft ; while the old. 

T 

ending ath (ayath becoming e thah ; in p., athali) has been restored 
before it in the feminine. (2) The original ^ reappears in 1. and 2. 
Pers. of the Perf., always coalescing, however, with the preceding 
vowel, becoming uniformly l (e is also found) in the active Voices, 
and £ in the passive. (3) Before the afformatives \ * , ft , 

T 

as well ^ as its representative ft, with their vowels, generally 
(always with pronominal suffixes) disappear. (4) The Inf. cstrs. 
end in ft} ; the abs. in ft (or *\) excepting the Hi., Ho., and gen- 
erally Qi., which end in ft . (o) The ground-form of the Imp. 

ends in ft ; of the Impf. and Parts, (excepting Q. Part, pass.) in 

ft . (6) Before the fern, ending ft} (Imp., Impf.) the radical ^ 

orthographically reappears (cf. § 2. r. 1). 

Rem. 1. — The Hithq. Voice follows, as usual, the analogy of the Qi. 

Rem. 2. — The ordinary form of the Impf. is used for the Cohortative, except 
in three instances, where the ending Jl_ is used for j-|_ : Ps. lxxvii. 4 ; cxix. 
117 ; Isa. xli. 23. 



1 turn, overturn. 
2Hi m. gold. R.= shine. Cf. "Zif" 

("ft), the (blooming) Hebrew month 

(May-June). 
!"D> 2 respond, answer, sing. ?3>" »*• 

T T ITT 

cloud (as responding from the skies) . 



p!F because of (in response to). j^Jjjp 
(always with 7) hi order that, be- 
cause of. ry£ (= 713") c - thne (as 
appointed, fitting). Hn> now. 
H>*] 3 (have an eye upon) pasture 
(flock), seek. 2H GTH) friend. 



1 Mil. "M e huppakh" (Qu. Part.), one of the accents (§ 7) whose form is an 
overturned trumpet (<). 2 Disting. from H3«? afflict. 3 Cf. J"]X"| and disting. 
from £>*V 



Exercise. — For 2 (there) shall be turned (Ni.) to thee 
( vS with/.) the abundance 9 of the sea. 37 Instead 39 of 



92 



VERBS ,TV. 



copper 33 (Art.) I will bring (in) 44 gold, and instead of 
iron 39 (Art.) I will bring (in) silver. 12 And (w.c.) my 
righteousness 13 shall answer for (3) me. His brethren 34 
were not able 9 to answer him (DlK). Incline 30 (Hi.), 
Lord, thine ear, 32 answer me. And (w.c.) the woman 
answered and said. 5 Should (fl) a multitude 46 of words 
not be answered (Ni.) ? Jehovah is my shepherd (Part.). 
And Dawidli went 43 (Part.) to feed the flock 2 of his father. 8 
And the appearance 30 of the glory 11 of Jehovah (was) like 
a devouring 41 (Part./. Segholate form) fire. r 



39 



48. VERBS n"b (Continued). 



Qi. Imp. . 


• ft% 


apoc. bl 


Qi. impf . . . r\bi\ 


apoc. bT 


Hi. Imp. . 


•nS:n, 


" bin or bir\ 


Hi. impf... rbi\ 


" bS- OT ^J 


Q. Impf. . 


• rf??s 


" *?F " ^?- 


Q 5f]n^ 


" )D$ ■ 


Q. Impf. . 


• . rb:\ 


" h$" bT 


Q.impf.... r\$rr, 


" *n\*n s l 


Ni. Impf. . 


..rrS-p, 

V 7 • 


T • 







1. It is a peculiarity of ^"; verbs that in their Jussive and Waw 

consecutive forms they generally reject the final Jl . In some of 

the Voices the Imp. also is shortened by the dropping of |"| . When 

this apocopation occurs, changes take place, in some cases, in the 
remaining vowels, as shown in the table. 

Eem. 1. — In the Qi. Imp., the apocopation takes place without further change, 
except the necessary disappearance of D. forte. In the Hi. Imp., the word 
remains in its monosyllabic form or takes a helping S e ghol with the middle 
radical, under whose influence the a of the preformative frequently becomes e 
(cf. treatment of Segholate nouns). 

Eem. 2. — In the Qrlmpf., after the apocopation the word may remain in its 
monosyllabic form either with or without the heightening of its vowel, or it may 
take a helping S e ghol. In the M. and Qi. Impf., the apocopation takes place 
without further change, except the omission of D. forte in the latter. In the 
Hi. Impf., a helping vowel may be taken, which works the same change as in 
the Hi. Imp. 

Eem. 3. — If the first radical be a guttural, the apocopated form of the Q. and 



verbs rrh* 93 

Hi. are the same. The verb HSO heightens the vowel of its preformative under 
the tone when apocopated in the Impf., and with Waw consecutive in the 
3. s. m. takes a. 

2. JTJT 3 apoc. ^HV= ''IT 5 with Waw ifll'J ; with Waw con- 
secutive ^TV The verb [TiT when apocopated in the Impf., 

• : - t t 

assumes the forms given, and H^H follows the same general analogy 

T T 

here and throughout. 

Rem. — The Inf. cstr. of H*n is fTTH 5 the Imp. JTrj- ^v"ith prefixed letters, 
the first radical has S e wa, and the prefixed letter i (JTJT), excepting ) with the 
Imp. (JTm) an( l K with the Impf . (HTf^)- The vowel of the prefixed letter 
with unapocopated forms takes Methegh (§ 3. 6). 

3. Hiring a P° c - TlEpV> TOpT^ contracted, ^fit^ 
The much used verb ^H^ presents some peculiarities. The final 
root letter is *] (instead of *i), and this radical appears in the un- 
apocopated form because this verb in the reflexive intensive Voice 
doubles, exceptionally, its last radical. When apocopated in the 3. 
s. m., the *\ left over becomes *J, after the analogy of Segholate nouns 
of this form. The contracted pi. form is only found once (K e thibh) : 
Gen. xxvii. 29. 



HlDi 1 strike, smite. |72£*/- stroke, 

T T T ~ 

wound. 
pfci}' 2 m - valley. 
Ht?" 3 do, make. TtSJVt^ ™- work. 

T T v -: I- 

("RS 4 redeem (by payment) , set free. 



i™!33 5 turn (face), prepare. ?£ lest 



T 7 



D^S ( s - HjS unused) face ; (with 
V 5 ) *j£& before, *j£^ before me, etc. 
HJS * /• corner. ^JS * inner. 
Hntl* 6 Hithq. worship, bow one's self. 



1 Suggests "knock." This verb as doubly weak, liable to apocopation, and 
much used, requires special attention. Perf. Hi. n3!"N Impf. H3" 1 ; apoc. forms 
TJH, 1p, 1[|1 etc. Similarly flip J. 2 Syn. of HVps' 3 Syn. of ^3, 1X\ b$B- 
4 Syn. of 7X5. 5 Idea of r. is turn, hence the various meanings (corner = a 

- T 

turn ; face, what is turned ; the inner place, where the face, presence is). Mn. 
"Peniel" (b^S): Gen. xxxii. 31. 6 Cf. fttfj\ R. HtT = t>e low. 

Exercise. — And he (w.c.) saw. 30 And (w.c.) God said, 
let (there) be light. 8 They bowed themselves to (*?) me. 
And he (w.c.) bowed himself to the earth (i7_ locative). 
And they (w.c.) bowed themselves to (^) him. Multitudes, 
multitudes 9 (pi.) in the valley. Smite (Hi.) now 3 this 
people CH3 on.). And he (w.c.) smote (Hi.) all 2 the city. 34 
And he (w.c.) did evil 46 (Art.) in the eyes 3 of Jehovah. 



94 



VERBS N'b. 



And he (w.c.) turned and went. 43 Before me. Before 
them. Before us. Incline 30 (Hi.) thine ear 32 and hear 18 
the words 6 of the wise. 3 

Rem. — Apocopated forms of the Imp. and Impf . are to be used where pos- 
sible in this Exercise. 



§ 49. VERBS K'b- 



Q. 



P %{'m. KM} vbti 

T : IT T : IT 

2.m. nwta n*6& 

T T T T " T 

2 P m. Dnaaua DrwSa 



M. Qz\ #w. Hi. Ho. 

xim ^& leoa icattan aattan 

T : • " • T -, • : • T : -. 

naattaa rmatta hRSfta niraton nuattan 

T : : • T : • T : •. T • : ■ t : : -. 

naaittaa ntkfc n«i^ nxian mi&n 

T - : • T •• • T " *, T - : • T •• : •- 

Dnaattaa Dnaatta onKaua Dmatfcn taniettan 



Inf. cstr. 
Inf. abs. 






" T • 






wanting 
wanting 



rattan aat&n 

• : - t : ; 

&£&!! wanting 



pl.f. 



XM2 



*at&n 

" T • 

• : it • 

nawtan 



na«to 



wanting ^iCJpn wanting 

ronton 



Jwp/. s. 3. m. tf^ 

2./. ^afan 

1. c Ki£&K 

T : v 



Pari, aci. 
Pari. pass. 



Kacb 

Kia:& 



>sa^ 

" T • 

•waton 

• : IT • 
•• T V 

naaatan 

T v T " 



VMS] 

naRstan 



^^3 K^fctt 



ijattafi 

T ■. -: 

naai&n 

T v ■. : 



wwy Karar tttta; 
naKsten nawtoan 



waoata 



Ka:££ 



1. The peculiarities in the inflection of verbs ^"^ arise from two 
principal causes : (1) the fact that the letter ^ is treated either as 
a guttural (consonant), or a quiescent (vowel) letter, according to 
its position in the syllable (§ 5. 4) ; and (2) that it follows in some 
of its forms the analogy of verbs H"^* 



VERBS X"b. 



95 



2. In all forms ending in ^, the vowels remain the same as in 
the Strong verbs, except that when short (a everywhere) they are 
lengthened immediately before it. 

Rem. — The Q. Imp. and Impf. take a (a lengthened a) in the final syllable, 
after the analogy of verbs whose third stem letter is a guttural (§ 25). 

3. In like manner, in all other forms where ^ ends a syllable 
before afformatives beginning with consonants, it qniesces with the 
preceding vowel : in the Q. Perf. with Pathah (becoming a) ; in all 
the other Perfects with Cere, and in all the Imperfects with S e gh6l, 
following in the last two particulars verbs H"^. Before afforma- 
tives beginning with a vowel, ^ is detached, and stands as a con- 
sonant (guttural) before them. 

Rem. 1. — Intransitive verbs, it will be noted, have no peculiarities here not 
shared by the transitive. 

Rem. 2. — The Hithq. Voice follows the analogy of the Qi., as in the Strong 
verb. 

Rem. 3. — Verbs K"7 are not infrequently inflected in other forms than those 
named, like verbs JT'7, and vice versa, even to the extent of their exchanging 
final letters. 



^H 1 praise, boast, n'pHil /• praise. 
^H 2 bore, wound, profane, begin. 

^H wounded (to death). n^Plil t 
beginning. 
K3^ (Pi- nifcOS) host ' warfare. Mn. 
"Sabaoth" ("Lord of Sabaoth"). 



Rtt¥ 3 1 thirst. K£]£ f m. thirst, 

- T T T 

^■EVu* 4 m - trumpet. 

ni\r 5 (pi- n^rc) m. (single) ox. 

DftD 6 De complete, finished, perfect. 
Q^l* m. perfectness. D^D (and 

• T 

Dn) perfect, upright. 



1 Mn. and deriv. "Hallelujah" (rT^^!"!)- 2 Discrim. from preceding, and 
c f- ^in cease. 3 Associate with fc^ft, having the same root letters, and 
X^ (thirst, go forth, find). 4 R. = shine ; metaphor, shine in tone, so be 
clear. Cf. Eng. clarionet. 5 An individual of the ox (*lp£) species, as HtT* 
is one of the sheep or goat Q^2£) species. 6 Mn. "Thummim" (Q\^ri), which 
is associated with the " Urim " (from *TiX) = Light and Perfection. 



Exercise. — Give me to drink 26 ^= cause me to drink), 
I pray, 3 a little (ft SO) water 3 ; for 2 I am thirsty. And 
they (w.c.) said 5 to (^) him: We have found 14 water. 
The man 31 is not able (Impf. ; cf. § 43. 3. r. .4) to find out 
the work 48 which is done 48 (Ni.) beneath 39 the sun. 32 
For all 2 the priests 12 who were found (Ni. Part. jA. with 
Art.) sanctified themselves 6 (Hithq.). And he (w.c.) blew 25 
a (3) trumpet. Whose ox (the ox of whom 11 ) have I 



96 VEEBS K'6. 

taken. 19 The words 6 of Job (31*K) are finished (Q.Perf.). 
(As for) God (^KH) his way 12 is perfect. They went 
forth 5 from the ark (HDpH). When p) I went forth 
(Inf. DSy for DKi). And (w.c.) Cain (p.p) went forth 
(K2T) from before 48 Jehovah. Jehovah brought forth (Hi.) 
Israel. Bring out Qj>Z.) the children 11 of Israel. 






PARADIGMS, EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION, 
AND LIST OF WORDS. 



98 



THE STRONG VERB. 



THE STRONG 



Qal. 



Perf. s. 3. to 7>ftp 

3. /. rhzp 

2. in nStbp 

T : - It 

2. /. nb&p 

i. c Tfr&p 

JpZ. 3. c !)StpjP T 

2. to Dnbtpp 

2. /. fnbtpp 

1. c B^bj5 

/»/. csfr bbjp 

/w/. a6s bitop 

7wj9. s. 2. to 7bp 

2./. ^tDp 

pZ. 2. m 6tOp 

2. /. njbtip 

Imp/, s. 3. to Sb|T 

3. /. Sbpn 

2. to bbpn 

2. /. ^tppfl 

1. c S'tOp« 

i>Z. 3. to 6tpp1 

3./. njStipri 

2. to 6tppn 

2./. njStipn 

i. c bti$) 

Part, act htip 

Part, pass SltDp 



IDS 

" T 

mas 

t : it 

mis 

t : - t 

: - t 

: it 

E?13? 
jrfpa 

: - T 

13? 
mas 

T 

T?9 

TO? 

nriaa 

t : - : 

13?'' 
13?? 
13?? 
'1??? 
13?« 

widen 

t : - : • 

naan 
roiaan 



re 



njnpj? T 



: llT 






1^1? 

nbep 

Tibtbp 
fctsp 
Dfib&p? DnStsp 



Xiqtal. 

rtepa 

nStip; 

T^p? 

6&M 



^pl 



bffi 



bton, btow btsD, bto 



^1 



W?! 



is- 

^?! 

^p? 

^? 

: I IT- 
T : - It • 



^p 



Pi**; 1 






tepn ibrspn 



i??' PR 






^P? 



THE STRONG VERB. 

VERB. Cf. §§ 14-25. 

Quttal. Hitkqattel. Hiqffl. 

rbep rfospm nb-cpn 

T : I \ T.I-:- T • I : • 

nWp rfokpm nbtopn 

T : - 1 -, t : - I - : • t : - 1 : • 

rfrtsjj *&$&$} ri^afjn 

TfcBj? '•jpibiBiann vtaopi 

^fij? ^eprin 6nbpn 

DFftteg Dnbepnn Q F^8i?5 

wanting ^©pAH ^tPj?D " 

wanting ^SpTlH ^pH 

bepn bapnn ^ippe 

^Bpri '^ajann ^topri 

bap* ^SPW ^apK 

njbipn nj^nn n&PpE 

rnbAjjij nahepriri ^^pri 

S&pn& ^PpB 



99 



Hoqtal. 

bt:pn 
nbtopn 

T : I: T 

nbtipn 

t : - |: T 

fi^Bpri 
Dfi^epri 

wanting 
wanting 



btopn 

" I: T 

^tppri 

^ep* 



fttopri 



ronton 

T : - I: T 



njS-ipn 



T I: 7 



100 



THE WEAK VERB 1"!?. 

THE WEAK VERB 1*8 



Perf. s.S.m Dp HD 

8./. ...... rap nrwb 

2. m n&p nr\6 

2./. rap ra 

i. c. ...... Tifcp ^ra 

1)2. 3. c 5ttj5 Vl£ 

2. w orap ara 

2./. jrap jra 

i. c u&jb ura 

In/ cs£r Op 

/»/. «6s Dip 

Zmp. s. w. Dip 

/• ^p 

!>*•»» ^p 

/• nibp 

imp/, s.s.m Dip;, Dp; 

3. /. Dipri 

2- m Dlpn 

2. /. wjirj 

1. c D^pK 

i>Z. 3. m !)Op; 

3. /. nr&ipri 

2. m Itolpri 

2. /. nraipri 

1. c Q!|p3 

Imp/. wiY^ to.c DD'1 

Itt- 

Par£. ac£ Dp Tp 

Part, pass Dip " 



m. 


Hi. 


Ho. 


Dip; 


Q'pn 


Dpin 


raipj 

T J T 


n^^pJi 


.rapin 

T 1 : I 


rtiipa 


ni6 h pn 


rapin 


map? 


nizrpn 


rapin 


Tii&pj 


Tii£rpn 


^rapm 


iaijb} 


^n 


i&prr 


DTltelp? 


Dni^pn 


Drapin 


10^1?? 


]$PW. 


W5W 


WI&pJ 


ui&'prj 


uispin 


Dipn 


^ 


Dprt 


Dipn 


ESS? 


wanting 


Dipn 


ap* 


wanting 


^ipn 


"W50 




ifeipn 


^7 




njajsn 


naibpn 

T : 1- T 




Dipi 


BW 


op; Dpp 


Dipn 


BPJ3? 


. Dpifi 


Dipn 


ffj3l3 


ppin 


^ipn 


^ 


^pin 


P_1pK 


ova$ 


dpi* 


ifcip 1 ! 


vsfc 


rapr- 


cip&pro 


main 

T : 1 •■ r 


nj&jiw 


ifcipri 


^jiq 


i&pin 


cnraipro 


natoftn 

T : 1" T 


naajiin 


Dip? 


*T?J 


Dpi: 




^p:i 




Dips 


tfpft 





DR«S 








THE WEAK 


VERB V'L\ 


101 


(or VJJ) . See §§ 


44, 45. 






Q. 




Dfcip 


Qolal. 


1? 


r* 


D01p 


rui 

T T 


T 


JlJtolf? 


na&ip 

T -. Il 


run 

T : ~ 


nira 

T 


rifciip 


rifciiip 


ft?5 


nira 


fttpaip 


fi&Wp 


wi 


Tiira 


viipiip 


^fc&ip 


T 


iri 


to&ip 


ttaoip 


cujja 


drflra 


artobip 


v : - 1 1 


IW 


i^i 


IW91R 


IWWj? 


m 


wirs 


tt&iip 


tt&iip 


r* 




Dfcip 


wanting 


p 




wanting 


wanting 


pa 




dfcip 


wanting 


•gij3 




Wf? 




iri 




towp 




wanting 




njfc&ip 




p?:> p: 




Dpip^ 


^P: 


rws 




Dtjipn 


Dttipn 


rw 




DDipri 


D&ipn 


Tin 

• T 




^Dipn 


"fc&ipn 


r=* 




pbipM 


Q91p» 


• T 




*&5¥E 


^i?. 


nrran 

TV • : 




njwbipri 


njwbipri 


win 

• T 




ttStolpfl 


tofcipri 


nrrnn 

tv • : 




rowbipri 


naafiipri 


r?? 




EJ&lpJ 


C381p? 


ph 








i? 




&&1P9 




113 






D&lpfi 



102 



THE WEAK VERB »"». 

THE WEAK VERB »"9. See § 46. 





Q. 




iVi. 


Hi. 


Ho. 


Qotet. 


Qotat. 


Perf. s. 
3. to. 


SD, 


^ 


- T 


3pn 


nprt 


ddid 


DpiD 


3./. 


H3D 

T - 




T ~ T 


T " " 


rtarbin 


nppip 


T -: I 


2. to. 


T 




riibp? 


nisDn 

T • -: 


niaoin 

T _ 1 


nniiD 

T : _ 


raiiD 

T : - 


2./- 


ntop 




ntop? 


ntopn 


ntoD^in 

- i 


rippiD 


nppio 


1. c. 


riibp 




Tiiip? 


?nibpn 


Tiibpin 


?rippiD 


?rippiD 


pi. 3. c. 


top 




tob: 

- T 


tehr\ 


tobn 


topip 


topip 


2. to. 


ontop 




ontop; Dntopri Dnispin 


Dribsip 


Dfippip 


2./- 


jnisp 




jntop? jntopn ;ntop*,n 


jrtopip 


jrippip 


1. c. 


^130 




M13DJ 


utopn 


W13D1I1 


uppiD 


uppiD 


Inf. cstr. 


nb 




3pn 


SDH 

" T 


wanting 


DDID 


wanting 


Inf. abs. 


T 




men 


3pn 


wanting 


DDID 


DpiD 


Imp. s. to 


Db 




sen 


son 


wanting 


DpiD 


wanting 


/• 


tob 




tobn 


^6n 

• " T 




'2pip 




JOZ. TO 


tob 




isbn 


*&6ri 




topip 




/• 


nrio 

T V •. 




PDtoDfi 

T V - • 

>! 3p? 


T v • -: 

» no? 


Dp?,? 


T : " 

3piD? 




3. TO. 


dd: 


sb?, ^ 


DpiD? 


3./. 


nbn 

T 


nbn 


Dpn 


son 

" T 


Dpin 


Dpiori 


. Dpion 


2. TO. 


nbri 


Dbn 


npn 


non 

" T 


npw 


npiori 


DpiDfi 


2./. 


tobn 

T 


topri 


topri 


'?bn 


tobin 


?pDipri 


topipri 


1. c. 


2bK 

T 


3ba 


3pK 


DDK 

" T 


ddik 


DpiDK 


npiDK 


^>Z. 3. to. 


tob? 

T 


top? 


top: 


tob? 


top?,? 


topip? 


topip? 


3. /. nvion 

T v •, : 


ntobn 

t : 


njtopri 


nrbcn 

T v • : 


TV - 1 


T : " • t : - i : 


2. TO. 


tobn 

T 


topri 


topri 


tobn 


town 


topipn 


topipn 


2. /. nrion 

T v V : 


ritobri 

T : 


T V - ■ 


nrbon 

T v • : 


nrboin 

TV-- 1 


ntoiiDn rraiten 

T : " : - : - 


1. c. 


sbJ 

T 


2b? 


3P3 


DDJ 

" T 


SDH 


3piDi 


DpiD?. 


/TOP/. Mil ^ Q JL 






DD*1 

V T - 








Pari. ac£. 


Mb 


■$ 


Dp; 


MIP 




DDiDp 




Part past 


T 








T 




DDiDb 

t : 



EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION. 103 



EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION. 

"?$ pjuj 3x-dh i 3 ji"ian 2 x , ,n :ni,T ''aiK ss. 
taia \n8 nnx nanis is:? vp t'Kin tfnp s ? tjwjn 
-"•jx tKrrJK tnarr cri^K 4 >6 jniir nnx s'hjc 

... . -. T .. ... T . T _ y . _ 

intf* is #* : 5 pxm D"fi#n iDsrHw s.*. 

T • * | V T T I • - T - TT 7 

:naan rvtfx-i nasn ntfnn nixn nssn nexn 

T : T • " V V 7 I V - 7 7 7 |V V " 7 

m :bnan na-tan :mn rtonn ttfin m §">• 

T - 7 : • - V - | 7 |V 7 7 

'D^o'n tnhn w^n xb™ nti nka aan tf"K rbn 

• 7 - V 7 - • 7 7 : 7 7 • t: 

XD3 :ntfin 9 naian pxn : 3 nra -on itfx rann 

... _ 7 _ j „ 7 T v _ T ... _. .. T 

namn "a r^xtf ranjn ntf-ntfx :$-tn res :an 

7 : • ". |V 7 7 - 7 V -: 7 7 • - 7 

m nn«n rsix m pis'? t-tftix-no :anx 'a § n. 

7 - |~ |7 V 7 7 v: ,7 v - 

ia-na na'in !-irs6s tna-ax fa-ax tab-ax 3 it'$? 
rrra npx tbujino nri^a :nxin na-iain :rix 
txirrna H#T n $ * n ^n nna^ri na 
xnp jri^s taibna trraa-na : ,3 as> ma s x § 12. 

T | 7 7 : - - ~. ,- • - - ....... 

14 bx ^a r-ixa :^B3B :ns i ? t :d1" nix 8 ? bM^s 
nt'nb rmtb nas tnirra "ia forfeite "?na 

j ... _ . T . ... ... T r . . ,.. T 

j^x-ito^ "t^ks t^oss nnx atf-i^x ba^na 



1 The predicate of a sentence may be a substantive or adjective, as well as 
a verb, and no copula is necessary to connect them with the subject. 2 It. 
3 Proper name. 4 not (no). 5 "] = and. 6 Sabbath. 7 See Ql\ 8 Sing. K1PIP! ; 
butp?. as here. 9 Fern, of 3ltfi- 10 g° lci - n which I. 12 What manner of house, 
13 From what people. 14 God. 15 § 5. 4. r. 1. 16 According as. 

r 



104 EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION. 

103 tnoraa tnonas jbivi ntfin nxann nos 

: t : - t : • - t - |- t - 

tnpx ^ t'JBX 

:b#o tpnoi jtbo jb^vto naii 3pn §13. 
t s p?i ar6 nx^TjO *♦ nirrs :rn*no : 2 B$o----irx 
:xr kvtj tDsn-]oi : 5, bnb tfsaio t 4 ^iii a'Mb^: 
j 3-1^0 ttf'iporrjo :njoi njo rarnito fixo 
:a\*f?x nox -i^x bs nionrrnx 7 i3tf xbi § 14- 

- t v -: -: ,- v - t : 

jbna ^np t nb-ra nxo biJ-s it^rra moxi 

t t |t t :|T : -t r • t ,• : ,t : 

tB^on o-in nnix ran^o max rnliiprr-iox 

• - - : t T : - 7 • - : • t : |T v v | - - - 

j-^Ki 11 frsn »i,Tsos nxi txif mrr ntfx n^np 

t - t t : - -: •■ : •• 7 v -: •■ | t 

I2 rai Bits pa tanuoa atf" nxo "rfiti hwto 

I •• I " • - : • : : |- : 7 : 7 : • 

-nx -132 lo axnx :a^ -torntfx jxaox^i : I3 !n 

- 7 7 : - 7 - 7 v - : 77 : 7 

jfd j vt rnan't na-n : ,13-11 iirn rbtsn 

7 : - t • : - t :i7 7:,- | _ t 

^03 trix-rrinotf :rrn t^xn-nx no# §15. 
: ,6 Bi«3 xr 5 tf-n :amax-nx nap "fi&fc vditiwa 

- 7 : 7 7 : - v : J ,7 77 -77 1 • 

tD» l T"^x"s#iiT , nbH3 rrnin -otib :ni,T ftlii 

77 ■••-•. : v.- |V v 7 - : • 7 : • 

: nxo noan "3 : mn bttfbrrno t djmttik npsi 

: 7 : !7 • v - 7 7 - 77 v I : • 

:nxi ahs 
niy-iT : i8 l33 bipo nrix} txjto xb xni sie. 
•by tpxrrnx I9 i3?i3ri anxi nsaa ainsn-bM 
*l¥p » 21 H3n3p-tn nirx pixn-ls r'ri'postf bosn 
■Hasp 22 1xi ifrrtbxfl rjscp': no*? t^p ^x bna 

1 Like a stone. 2 Whence. § 10. 4. 3 Bread and wine. 4 Note connective. 
5 (given up) to, for. 6 Egypt. 7 had not torn. 8 Preacher. 9 in pause. § 6. 4. r. 
10 p.n. n Fern. 12 Not to be translated. 13 Evil. u Dtl? with J-J_ locative, 

T T 

usually rendered "thither"; here, "there." 15 6 become o by loss of 
tone. 16 5 = while it is. 17 to. 18 3 = over, with ?*$fa. 19 describe. 20 con- 
tracted ^tTK- § 10- 3. R. 21 § 10. 4. 22 § 15< 4< 



EXERCISES EN TRANSLATION. 105 

13 jspnsnw l B9& \ppX3/n3^ bs$ nss.T^M 
b'ttzn Pitrs-cs 2 irp£ -pt?n •pt;r} rria bx: 

rm.T Fjispn-Px njs 
xPi ^30 ns trikn rtaa tibsb <to *6i §17. 

: t 7 r I ••• 7 7 7 : |7 -: ,- -. ,t : 

ix ?bp 131 : 5 B'r:xrr 4 b2? rnasn nasn ta^n 

I I 7 77 • 7 -: ,- - 7 -: ,7 - : • 77 

-Qi&n-Ps ttfirrrvi n:3 nrx itf-wro tbiti 

7 : • - 7 77 • - 77 v -; • T i' 7 

rnj'tbp tibv : rips; mjg nbpn-nx'] :khi bimn 
Wag pn^rnai rPpr am t'n^tjpj nns* tropin 

JTiTKS 1323 7H33 DS>3 .THI ttthJfi iT."n §18. 

I 7 it v v - ) •• - 77 77: 7 : • 77: 

: 9 !?!23Ti §io^-DK : bK-i^^s-nK s b^v f3p»i 
^3£1 tpTfr m,T ns?;3' t^K-top »£# tnnaia nps 

tins rai 8 3pr nsn r'ax-ns nnspsi :nr» 

77 - v I -: t - - : • - -7 v - : I : v : 

wtotf' :nirrP nrau : n Dbn 3-iprrPa :-or^>3 

: : • 7 ,- 7 : :• -. -J: ■ - 7-7 

ntttPi 

: |7 -• 

tnfos jpjs jmaa tsroxi -isb h nnpP §w. 

7 •• 7 : ,7 : v ,7 v •• • : |- 7 

kP tdPi :pto ut -iis-is -ui ix p» nnpp nniasri 
oipfsn :n?na Bflnppi tcip-nx hsPi map 1 : 

P33T2? fsr^Bn 333*3 PPffl t^lKtt? B3>-333> IPX 

• : • J v v - - : - 77: 7 7 - |7 v -; 

n^a E -i»K«i tKinn Dipas 33#*i :nM^ :n33# 

tnsiisn - ^ 3pp •figg-^ 
:m T 3? tmaj :3jr trips'] ^ ma nnps? §20. 
-nib t K nn-i3' 1 :rnsn m3m6i :msn :nm3Ji 

v v : I : ,7 • v 7 7 •• 7 • 1 : •■ t • 7 : : • : 



1 Compound Prep. 2 over us. 3 The vowels of certain familiar words will 
sometimes be left to be supplied by the pupil. 4 upon. 5 See u?*X- 6 m P- 
7 A superfluous H- 8 P-n. 9 § 15. 2 ; 5. 2. io My (father). n hither. ' 12 § 18. 3. 
13 Older ending. 



106 EXEECISES IN TEANSLATION. 

-ba n#p t ni 6xsn 2 ^aaa xb) arnao? vrpv naa: 
tTsaa tnana *6] r\bbp :m,T mna rnoinn 
\n$a pi mrr ps tpofn no$n tTsaa 
t'Kire ain^n nosh m$ ps xinn aipon snp'i 

:aiin xn rnb no&n 
♦,aa#o nanoa p^i tnrrriK n?#rr 5 js §21. 
atr ami : 09.771$ tfnpn. tnaooj xpi nnnoii 
7 ^ns no tfraan-nx antfi :nan itrss rnns 

-: t . v - v - - : •/ • ••• -: ,- - v 

jpnaiirnoi nanrno : 8 na 8 -ian»# oi s a nano 
nnai tnaion-n?? neap "d*$; 9 nsa*^ t'pnx nasi 
V'tbp^ pxa p^ns t^ ano? xb) tn^an-n^ pan 
: ,2, ri?>p nontax tnVx-naa laparrna mail ass 

: -&t rfaa naj 

•■ - : t t : t t 

maajv ^ntf-ns :m,T-nx nsipn-nttfs na § 22. 
t^bpn tna^xi qnf n tT^.n tmbfo tna^n 
:»ijb tddk nnon tTinn^n nntfo na^n 

-t •:- -:- :-:t | t : : •:- 

n^atir :naon-nx anpn nsn-ns 'fin* anpm 
nan nsran nanoa pbv taiT onpa 15 noa :na-in 
inM-itf?^. trrfrp nan-n^s aian nann nao 
-n$ nb^n tnro rtn^a tna^rrna na] §23. 
-\$$ t masjn osn-nxi ro^tf aanai noso tjasn 
Kxo-*6 rmrMi :mm-nx lairn frrvn nasn 

t - 1 • : - v.- ,v : v : - 1 | : - •••••: 

t&]nnri p^ pni tsrnn i7 #s3n-n$ Tinasni nji 

1 p.n. 2 ^ = for (of price). 3 wall. 4 to thyself. Note retraction of tone 
in preceding word. § 20. 1. R. 2. 5 lest. 6 Adv. accus. 7 my lord. 8 in which. 
§ 10. 4. 9 seven. 10 see Ci\ n be rewarded. 12 from my iniquity. 13 in p. 
14 my face. 15 § 12. 1. 16 Adj., whole, perfect. 17 soul, person. 



EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION. 107 

-s?a# fK^o Wfti tfiKS 2 a:nn pin*i tnura 
ttf'wrnK frnw m naf? roam nn» 

• t v | v : — : v t t t -: : t - 
t t t : I - : t - v t : - it : 

rp^in'n ibrjp: xbnpn-bs nx Tj-on tbxtin 

^•pt? ^"Spf-ty^ nX {^33 DH13KTIK 6 TJ13 mm 

:nrrn» :fd ntf" nn» "i#k p-ixrrnK rnpSK 

t - : v t •• t - v — . I v t t v t | : : v 

11 *:tb true 10 D3nx «hJK tJ-ia ra^nsn nntsn 

• : • v • v : v -T-: • t • -: , - -: |T • 

fS n~\ti>b tbiir^ip p$]$\ ra'np-nK mrr nn# 

t I2 n^Tin rhab Tianp tDn'Hsaty: xb §25. 
^nttF istps'i :d^o isps'i :T3?n av3 ns^'i 
rmsatfi pss^s nbarrrr Dmaxi : 12 -nv 3 iT33 

• : - ,t : I - : • • | v v - • : v : - - : ,- • t •• : 

-nx is??'! qsttfaTnx rwa'i t^xn b|3#? xb '•s 
insa^x rbsas vpfnb wsh ;p5x-nxi n$a 

tax-nat?"; apn ja t^an 
on^n Ttf nsia nnb nnx :on ana *3 §26. 

- • V " T - " * T 

B xba inn ta^isam anton b'3 i a ntibtfb -irx 

•• t t t • - : • t - : • v -: 

a-rpa jsttn tanarjn-|a :ni»n i ?a matf© ta^pio 

: 0^133 jrnxs tmsatf to-ai-ian-nx B nrp!? 

:niabo rnnix trvhis tnibip tnnips tnisia^ 

tana^n -ifc truttm :naia ta^k" 

• t - - - T • T : 

1 in p. 2 famine. 3 prophet. 4 wash. 5 the Jews. 6 frequently __l for _ 
here. 7 Philistines. 8 young man. 9 pi. 10 you. n before. 12 p.n. 13 against 
the house of. 14 (long) live ! 15 ^ = by. 16 letter. 17 to. 18 Verbs denoting 
fulness or want are followed by an accus. without a Prep. 19 of the garden of 
Eden. 20 Only in Ps. cxxxvi. 7. 



108 EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION. 

tf^ tn'spai one H x * fi, Wl "?53? §27 - 
man truibxi noipi 2 na ; mmsi tnnx 'o^acr 

-:t tt: t:|-t ttt:~|T t - • t 

nnsn mpik jitpik nnxa nh* :11ns :nman 

- t: |7 " • ••" ,v v: ,v -; t t : • - 

:mht?n m T 5apr 8i ?? ninsmnx tfnxa mnx. tn^nxa 
am xaa) xm ra^rna ns»3 -itfK anxtfsn 

... . . . - 1 . -: : • ■••■■-: ■ t : ■ - 

Kinn aipama^ xnp'i m a^mx nana tmm 
nips : 4 maa ns" aim tnitrixn oness :ama 

- 1 •• : t . •• : : it : •. -: ,- • t: • - : ,- 

nxa xua) nnxs mis :man 

: 7 : • t : t : v | v v - 

Tiparj ta^mim? pm? aax tmia^ §28. 
tf'x r^pa satf rnipm Tfixo "ibtf'i t'-wmsa 
ryp tia'^-ns-isa^. pm'irimp tamninm :an 
{cmajjmtfx-rbs immrrhax tnna'^a mrrnx 

- it ■• t - : • t : • : 

Pa t'tbni -as: xrbtiiz ^aa iniaba mix mm 
arms nxinnx taaTiinatf trrhstfsn ninstfan 
Wnp a\mx etx :p m^x mxarrnai ♦.nap 

t-apaa naaa |i»yns 
ta^aia bixtf 8 ajp im^a^ia -iaih nw §29. 
mm Kip "or m nman-nx aiyjfc :nma,-i ma 

7 1 7 • 7 ••• t • -: v -: |- 1 • : - • : 

:nnx a\mx x^o {Q^^n-QS r^smai :satf 

7- •: ••:- • •: t 7: -7 

n^nbx jinxi jasmin mxap raps: fi_? ns:r nxia 
layrxm mam : ^nmai ♦♦mia^a maa :npb? 

pw mb aj'w 

7 •• v ••• • 7 -: 

jttW mi^m mna man t.nt'xnpa nm §30. 

- . ... _ . T 1 ... T T 



1 PL, generally refers to blood shed criminally. 2 C 1 sea (seaward = west- 
ward). 3 On, upon. 4 Egypt. 5 in p. 6 Defectively written. Many verbs, as 
here, require a Prep, with the word with which they are construed. 7 See 
ttfKI- 8 also - 9 P- n - 



EXEECISES IN TEAXSLATION. 109 

fiiCi :-iaa Tii-ip 1 ? v*VP trnin dti 1 ?***? roi 

-by ttay^rjB? es'^ 1 tnjo i^r^VP '''T^. 
Tpaaua *rr,a- tir ba-bx nar^a :cr6 ntsa tinaa 

I v - : • • : - T T " V T T |- V V .. - T . 

tttha ia^ terras 2, 3ab -tasb lis iba 1 :abisa 
baa ip^ntfa'?'! ^iqa : obis'? "?ja# mrr 
oina nnK :na sat^ t^x inxaa tDanatfia 

:mrp nb'sb 
npa ^air^a naan 3 nm aba t'-iae-'nnp §31. 
•bp tmrv nan x'sra torr^tM n«isa :vttix 

• I - : t - v •• - : - : - : - t 

pxn ab-ns rais na-m -ds? 4 ^^ :dik ^a-ba 

I ••• v t •• v it t t -: •• • T - •• : 

aciai iDibtf -11753 'rupia ta^anan ^a iaa-ftfaa 

7, na^n t^bari nrr^aa jnstn 6 m T inH rwa-na 
Ttijt tf-iri rirra jp] taa^ia-ia tnjo bw'arrnis 
:nnaa nrats naaa naaa :aana-t ua^i :m«n 

j*!}?* 1 ?? "rttes ba 
ra nax-ba pnika taib^ y&tpB n&aa •'bn s 32 - 
-na-m txarr ntfx sarrba nas Kb aman *pba 

- : - 7 v: ,v v - : : •• 7 - 7 • t - | v v : 

vniiaab $M$) jbiptSHpa-bi* 9 KiaK"i5? tain v-ip 
nmaa-nx ,*naa ibx-i'^ naa tvprrba mbtfi 

I : 17 : v 7 : • : | 7 •. 7 7 : - it : 

niKan jaw ttfihns} byi ^aa tmj -i#s iTp-na 

I •• • •• • : • - 7 7 - v I t 7 : 

tpnipnai tjnari rnaa-nx aaa? ra*ia 
•bs bnkn-na fcna s i truth psi nsaitf nit §33. 

v 7 v : • - v I • - : " " I v 

tTftas tfai nafc? rfab>t t^aa u =-|bK tjatfan 

1 p.n. 2 before. 3 spirit. 4 Note the idiom. 5 extending. 6 law. T Note 
contraction. 8 See ^VS- 9 I came. 10 matter. u pieces, understood, as often 
the case with words commonly used in measurements. 12 Kine. It is of com. 
gender, except in pi. 



110 EXEEOISES IN TRANSLATION. 

-nx tiTW vires tanibi -pan tiann 't^s inpb 
:b*nt^ ■•» niM tnnijjj w rnbaa antfnrba 

•• : "-:r t v : •• : t v t t : \ : t 

masn npn-baa tb$ bs>s-n£ tn^b natprrbs 
'rahm tro nas-n^K inbjjs :asan rharfk 

: it : t - t v -: t •• : _ _ _ T . _ _. 

-bs? vntpri% jabisrn? inaboa Kaa ranTiianns 
ns>»t> "Kattf-nabs rin^K nnt> rai^ nv Tihbn 
tT»n ^nw inns! :n»btt> ytzw-nx 
rnas nab trpx wotth nTtK"rtM£> nroo § 34. 
tvbo) jnbfn t^inci n.nas Krnaini ;xin tito? 
ji^K bnnrab :n&x *]bs trnrba-nx nab?i 
ra$-n$ cftSajs^ : a^pna rnjgp aia tpKn anpa 
6 nn :abi n-rba nxn mir jint^a pani iasrnio 
#n6 nnns nnia tnii tannx B^nbx :nnba 

• t ■ -: |- 7 t v • •• -: t t - 

1*01061 ninx ibtfai txrrsx a^nnx^nx taib*! 1 

t t 1 : t : ,t : • -: -: ,- ••• t 

mn no-nx nTi^nb mm 
rmsxa sonx tanw :nio •na> nn»j ^ §35. 
s )a nmrs? tnrtf njb# o :nsan n&atf nsotr; 
aio jnixs> tntf^bx dwi d , i^? ansaa : 3, an 
nbx mn 8 ibxi ttrin nftsmn^b nsonxi ontos 

I v v t t • : ••■ t t •• : - : t t : - : ■ : v 

tnwn mtso nbsn a*^ ntftb taw 
ins p^bj nabs :nbtpn mnst?* "Kyiia §36. 
_l, 3 y^n ^l,^| jy^pj ^j^ 13^5 nsn t 10, nn : ns 
m^p-nx aan^pa }aTO*rrnx inao ^xmi" 1 
xb oix tnnna nna^b niann-bs» naa'n :aa:rix 

1 every man. 2 tffteir bread, understood. 3 day by day. 4 See Ht^- 5 P-n. 
6 with. 7 Note construction. 8 if. 9 From fc^\ Note final vowel. 10 Num- 
erous verbs are followed by a cognate accus. 



EXERCISES IK TRANSLATION. Ill 

Tixr ttvrb v \ a^ 1 ixbfci T»n piani ta^pnbu 

tt t | • -t: :it- -t : ' : - : 

mm nns trom nax a^an rnra pPaf nP 

: it : ~: it t : t t - . . _ T . j . ( . . - . 

H'TT-'TPX aapa$>a JiPp^P njp?nt\p :pipa^n 
aia :pxrPaa irr^pa xP ta^n aifrsp §37. 
aaa :apiax anap' p^x nssptpp raisin"! -tarn 
asn ftvb varbD :dts9»i n* spa nrab pa 
ttpzrbpy nxa '.^Bap-px ?p;b d^ish tnjB 
lisn ra wrb* bpa'i :ptfruP bpra rrn xP 

t I •• •• : - - : ■ I t : • - t 

ta^aa uas^p tirapnx bxp' - ^ npspi xypnzt pai 
xbw Pai-ba trnibpn nap'i nnxPaxi Tpsramn 

L ■ tr " 

^2,1 rpan-pPa i»x tnjo aipaa mir vi §ss. 
pin tmrra araxa aarx taaanpa ^rx p» 
ans> tf bttf n»a ppa^ ix :*ti isnisn arnax ptrx 

• t t v • : - t t r v : - -; v -; 

px s a niira ^np-pK raPa ipn^ tjppiri pasa 
ma 1 ? anxp wn aia-xb tsiriba 

- : t t it v: I v : • 

ppxa irn bpxp ?n taapx aa^px Tiba §39. 

- - : t t - t ,t I •• v : • ■•••-: • : • 

ptrx-Pa pim ^pia^aa 6, -ias «t# -lira nsaa 

... -. T t - : - [• : • t • - _ : ••• • 

ttPx px njpx wtix-px pptfa p#rax t.te-tf; 
H# nnn j# rafrptf 'Papa ^x #x rua? 
jrfirpf? anpp ptfx n$xn rn tias anana atis 

■|: - v • t v • • : - : t 

Pxp jna t^piain iapn :Ppp rriax t^x ppx 
nax mtt» tfan tnbkw xP nxam nPix? tpbs 

t - •• : v •• t t : - t t 7 _ : i~ 7 I : ••• 

nfcfctf-s txaab pibsa tftf ta^an nai nPsaba 



1 Make thee skilful in understanding. 2 p.n. 3 in p. 4 Note change of 5 (o) 
in a sharpened syllable. 5 Jw/. csfr. of fi^fi. 6 Note use of strengthened form 
of Q'JJ (with 1st Pers. sing. andpZ.). 7 Adverbial expression for heretofore* 



112 EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION. 

♦i^Lqp^ naV j^hs ns-itn :nnx ^a< ipa 
tnj^jpo naanaa ins aann pnxjan sj^ tj> 
mppp -i©$ a s ?an to tK\-T 13^5 ainp 
b*rtw •'jaa tf^ psi tnana-ba-ja naK 2 -ins §40. 
-ran trnaa nag a^sa rspitf^ nnn nsaa =na 
-iv) psn nspe tv^T! ni^p n^lrjs tbvibx. ^ 
"?iK aia *6 r^j*? 3>sn ni^a na*^ n$p {pari nap 
mil JDM^t? 'tfyj wrr J*n^ n'>'n|,n a# pnasa 
rosin onrah nai :•?•?# 4 irna xbaj :tbj5H Kin 
^2 nrisp :atr gia a;nsty sap-ay ^ina trnrp 
■nxi D»rm« Titos rbanan tf*o tfa" pmin 

.... T - ... T T ....__ .. T . T ( 

*35K :s?t!n TiBte? nasin njsch usan tn^avi 

it -v-t: ~ ~: i : - t tt t t - - 

'ijs-^s ^m ntTBo r^pa^ mini rnttfp t^x ni^tf 

... _ - . . . J . _ . T . ... j T J . _ .. _ T 

V T _ 

nax a^an 8 n3nn ^j-is nax nixa tr^x^ §41. 
-i#k aauarrba :nnaip nax D^tfbtfi nam 

v -: t : • - t t t j 1 t - • : t : t 

jas &$ oab rvp^rf. arte -iax'1 tsa^v^s aa#i 
Ta^-nsi "rnVms vbs> nran fiaat^-bs? nnx 

) ••• t : v : J v t t t : - ,t : : • - - - 

Tjanb nnati?a bass ta^psi aap s n'6bp *p%n 

iapn p^x "ipik^i itify nas na nsa& ibaxn 16 

bax-ba taitss inaix-nx ^ mrr nns s ta^Bxn nf 

t t , v I : - : • t 

tnnb naxi tbsw -itfx baxa-baa tostei I0 aynn 

... ... t t : •• t 1" v -: t -: |- t • t : - •■ - : 

:D , a"' r^w xn'vb nnx r^xiTba-nx ntfo nap*i 
sotf jdi»h n aab nna tmn lian-^x ink la^tfn 

- t - v t - : i - v - - : - 

1 Affliction = ^ in p. 2 Cursed. 3 p.n. 4 See p. 9, foot-note. 5 He made. 

• t: 

6 hard (tidings). 7 face, surface of. 8 the ark. 9 hold (on). 10 R. of rQ^ln« 
" § 39. 1. e. 4. 



EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION. 113 

:ni»aa anap^ ariais asn Tis t^aa bip mrr 
an^nan tnnaxj nnaxn ifHaxri nax 1 natf 

nb&a' 1 ^a 

• T • T 

maii t'Hiir ^nx-oxi tsbnos -pxp'nfcsi §*2- 

t : v v: t ~: i : - t : • | t t t : 

jetx f]^k a^au ban "la^ mrp }rm tgy tnssT 
ibnr xb bx-itir< ^a "rjinai :nbiiJ nsaa ^i mm 
jcoana nan^ ;am>i tan? tbnin-nati^s tnbm 
ap^ ax»i jnnao sjbj 5 apsm tsa^ xbn fix sbin 
p]aa vfy^tj jbteti tf?&3 t^?SR :^ai m^s ^ei maya 
nafc? vb msi taSisS e n min fa rtn narx 
-nx na; n*rbxn tajjo 7 mnx a#a sa*i ntfsj 
rtfaj : 8 na"£ map -i#x niaamnx xaa^i tarnax 

tia 93$ tfs 
x 1 ? "pix rpan nxan pins'? a^n xb axi §43. 
nsn :s't tnsnn tsm tnsrn :rnnn abanb baix 

: -7 --t -•• .__ T: _ TT ... T . . 

tpnx ^aafcj nam nrmn :nv n«T :mnxi 

I v v " : 1 : it • • - •• t ■ v 7 1" - : r : 

ixn^i :nrai naiai naan naan bxi lo ™p nax 

: 1 • - t • 7 7:7 : • - : •• |: ■.••••: 

nis bbpb spx *6 tmax :mah :nai3 n ,s px n#ia 
inaba tampan nnx nan ^nnan tnanxmnx 

..... j _ _ .... r ...... .... 7 T -. |T 

ixn mm nmnn nab tnann lan tamnx tfinnn 

: 1"- 7 : - t-:|T- : 7 : 7 : ,- : : : ' 

:ns» X3 •sjjwk "an tmsn nnnm bs-i't?' 1 "ja-na 

7 " 7 I " T |- • : 7 •• |7 •• | 7 • - " : 7 

: nnm t wt xnn rs> -iyn t mtfxn-n§ ja& ps!i 
TTin 5 *pin ! tmnin trrjl m trbx n^an rrna 

1 make. 2 Note vowels. 3 § 3. 4. foot-note, 4 ^fl. 5 p.n. 6 § 10. 1. r. 4. 
7 Note H locative with cs£?\ 8 HJ3tb • • • ^IttJ^ usually whither, here where. 

T T v -: 

9 croucheth. 10 Buy. 



114 EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION. 

trPain tnnv-b tn$y$ p snx nos inoipyo 
fin? n^3!5 ispn trna-nx nppp 'fjprn. :tfiTfi 

nrio-Pnk pro nna to»rt 

... , | - : • - ... 7 - 

to-)? :nopn :nop r^p 'u^ecn wrix ns^ §44. 

nop :crnP& ascJoP Dips :21m :d-i'i :mrn 

t I t : • - I : - v-- T7- 

nnsi nfco asoa ntfis :ri3K - Ps PJ?p#in nipp 
• . . Niapppp trno 'n^r x^i n;n; -oi "a tpjb ptfi 
rusnnn r^oi'p Kino :ks nfcD-Ps p p t^npiai 
Mtfi iPi *ai :nP ,L ? t^P tfs triKBrrb »tfi 

- 7 : | 7 : 7 t:t • t : •• t - : tt 

tnoini ;no»i tno«i :nb*i :nio :no : morning 
-a:n in 1 rpr -itfxs :pK,Tp3 ntop'tf nni :ttp».ti 
nnsntnin'' ifVDTiOo ♦nJpoP pno 6 rpjni : 5 ppo:? 
8 snj 'neuri ppq n#8 nv? ww; sn'ii tori nppn 
mn-'P npis> ansnpni jssh ^nn-fKi iDJ :m,TP 

nirg 9 nn 
:nxj 10 npoty irnns tnjiosa asip; pa §45. 
;pn :pis tjiaj rrjo? ^jk -ij tan-ax atf-nan^x. 
tnina inotp Vts fi»$ ^3 r'pisnn xP ^j nsa 
nit? bn ; i tanpa 'rn 1 aP tti«s nnP^ i3 a:rnbn 

••• 7 - • : I • : ■ t • • | • t : lT - t t 

-by -wx Pins tPTrPx Ptio aPi to^o; nsatf 
ton-a a^o&a intf tbxP^ nPina Dip ta'n-nsft 
xro^ t ji"ixp anbx v&w tTpn-ws npp nt'n-Px 
tnins^o ixxz ato'i tpbo "lip-no^ tni.TP niaa 

T : • I - V T - I V V T 7 ■ 7 



1 Note change of vowel from *>— to _, to — ; also the idiom. 2 ^jfcO- 3 in p. 
4 lives and shall not see. 5 p.n. 6 them, to be understood. 7 offered an offering. 
8 gold. 9 odor. 10 For PH^t? with tone retracted. n consider. 12 ^Jf- 13 also. 
14 D. forte conjunctive. 



EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION. 115 

2 nixnP "Tron inn *6 bixtfn Tsj aisn-xb 
■otsBtf rams mpmnx nts spanmn :nn& 

• •• : t • t : - vl v t t J : it : | v v - t . : - : - - 

n-v <bv) ttnn nT frvrp ran nani dti^k 

T _ 

na'^ apr br lay tvap n*rb* aitfa § 4 e. 
fn*"^ aitf-ns t n>?? nb-n^ ar ijj? : nsntin 
:Pnia ib" 1 ?! Tia*?-?? tninik iTBK-n§ beni :•?]&» 
no'i non idtdh j.ttidji :sno mo mir nxTa 

- t - ■■ t t ■ -: t t : t •• : • : 

ana n^b'i inn t'T-nxp firstf' 1 nnno"! nD"i 

. .._ _ T ... j. i ...... , ..... .. T . 

o^na ipsa anxn nan nan t^rva xiaa nnjan 
nwsa "on-ix 4 nan tmrp ra rvi tsnnb tnnn^ 

T : • t : - - ..... _ .. T . | : |T • 

tfrai aPia nPa m.T tnrarrs nab mm rr^an 

v t t j ••• v I v •• • •• : t t : • •• • : 

nas^ *6i na ,_ xP ntra :mm ^na m*im iab 
msrnnin n-a-its tinna roan lastfo-bs §47. 

I • - 1 :t:t:-t t : ■ t 

nnsi rpns Tiba ^w ^npa rppii am 'anxa 

7 - : I ■ : • •• •••: : • :| 7 : | v - t 7 t ■•:.-,•■ 

nx annas-Pa mm K/<an p?6p :ttnxn-n#x a#n 
ns jTjaap-as ntfi nn^n nttfa jai tr 1 ?? nan-ntfx 
etx maxn pp-ns mis ann tniaan na :n2?a? 
tDvibx nb irnin npa jasa asnpn rinsn-^ 
t'lVii.T 8 nao - ^ :pnn Tip mr'8 nania :mrto 
maa&n r^atfmar amis'? m?s> mntfmo niasn 
:rn«n mann nrn-Pa nasEhn lanan 



1 K e thibh. 2 to see. 3 i.e., moved exceedingly. 4 much (adverbial). 5 ^ 
changed for euphonic reasons after ). 6 in p. 7 Note the idiom = said among 

T 

themselves, to one another. 8 in vain. 



116 EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION. 

Diaia tpv ^31 nsio bnx-nx ps>n aa^i §*s. 
-nx n^n ;?]i,n-bx ipiaa p-rrn :rj«» 'nil n\bx 
niaa nan :irvii£ n^x-ba nx fttf ram a-ansi 

... T . | . . . ... _. T .. 7 _ _ . . _ 

:n3-1x *)3 *\r\) t injo 1*0 i^x-nx l^n^ : ar^o 
:po?ta n^an-itfx. :"?pT pa nbxi niaon io 
nx tinirnx il wi :nt?? tpi^a maa tinftgj? 
nop nxn Kb th* n^soi iis^ xb mir bs>s 
jsob bm^x jai :iipn ^bb uiai ub nrn$ 
3 23& miss ttfxnb idm xm mi.t 111 iss :inna 

7 • : t : it • I v v - 

a^pnai-nx jn*i ititrytf? vyfr t^bs-ns nino'f 
KrnTjn {M5>ia3i mnhtfa ixa ro^sn nrai iina 

t t |- • t : : • : •••-:,-:■ • • : - • - - | : 

:'DiTBin awn xiia mrr :nsnn- 5, obi^xa vb 

...... . - T .. T T )T . . ... _. ( _ T 

i3ix nama Mts3 t.iiaj tilix Dtf-Bi :p«m :niaj 

: t t • i- t • v ■ t: ,T t v- •• : : 

wiin rpx 1101 ios taxi ;axv:an tntan fb 
tfinorrjB txM-10 ■'o; nioi ^p mrr 
ms ninn-ox ta'o inptpn Tjxit? xor-ax §49. 
taiD-^a iixrrnx dA xi!i rab x-vn6 n?np 
xi'i r1x-nxi3 •«!# bx :ait: "a n#xn xnni mxt 1 

T .._ _ .. t :• - - •• __^ t • |T v •• - v : • 

t|B»i :niaion 9531 jail :na]0 nw p»i tnrp 
nab baix-xb : s^a-bi? nasi [12 x#3 1,163 bx -, o 
sm's xto :nxi-nx nxfl :x&3 taanx nxto 
,iii,t K bbn ranpa' "bbn *fr :xoaa niox 8 nn»i : 
noannbnn : I2 anb aixn u 1nn-o mi :,iin^i.n 



1 HS^I- 2 Adv. accus. 3 Fulness. 4 bow down. 5 on whose account. 
6 Sing. The old ending ay being contracted to e before an afformative beginning 
with a consonant. 7 poetic, and so without the art. 8 Question without an 
inter, particle. 9 wounded. 10 polluted. n began. 12 to multiply OHI)- 



EXERCISES IX TRANSLATION. 117 

irfenn T»n nrbaa mrrnx na-oK jmT run* 

t • : • t •• - : v t ": |T -: - :■• 

-bit, pas-na 'bbn nx rrr^i aav nasKi :*sa 

-••-:,- •• t : - t t v : v : • : 

wan nsi abisb Tptf n^nKi nna era bbnrm 

| : • v T 7 : | : • -;--:,- 7 t ..... 

:tfBj na^a na^an mrr mm tcn^a a^n 
mrr as rrnn B"»n :ks3 B^aras? rem- iatf 
nas Kin "a :a-ab a^a pa ^naa \ti t^C^K 
tnana ,-rm ins 1 ? nnx ,th trfffi urn) n'-n j'vn 

7 7: •• : |V 77 7 - •• v: v: . 7 7 • v - 

trnaj Kbi n™ :tti :^an 7^ :obi^ "m ^sk 1 ! 
-na ibni ib§ prnatea nat^i t^riw *6 mrr ^8 
hshk inntfr :rra-nx rtowfai 3 iS3b Kip: :p»n 

7 :- - : •- 7 • v 7 -: : • : riff t| : ■ | 

anaP nra nbss "."n raab nPa ta^ars sa«? 

: • v - : • : - • 7 : 77 ■ 7 : - v 

mrr :Darrn» ibb-P;? nKtn npinn naTnK 

: lias nisau 

7 • 7 : 

1 the perfect (man). 2 in p. 3 Note dropping of Jf ( m Pent.). 

Note. — A few words in the preceding exercises have been used, by oversight, 
in advance of their occurrence in the vocabularies. In such cases the following 
alphabetical list of words should be consulted. The word 7—3? m the sense of 
"bottle," and >^'^ iceek (pi. ril^Ou?)* there used, are not to be found in the 
vocabularies ; while £^ save is found only in the following one. Further, while 
the words Kfc^, D^S? Cl7t!?» appear in the following alphabetical list twice, 
$1PN fcO£> S*13> /H3, and Hl^ na ve been unintentionally omitted, and 
7fc< God, 7J< to, ChV oe strong, H£ ;"£ maiden, have been unnecessarily 

- T T : - 

inserted. 



118 



WORDS OF THE VOCABULARIES. 



WORDS 


OF THE VOCABULARIES (Alphabetically arranged). 


na 8 


bx 


^38 


IIS? 22 


I<T 8 


"br\ 2 


^38 


bx 


^1? 37 


bnii 22 


nan 38 


Dibn 3 


nnK 34 

T T 


svbx 2 


nans 12 


rmaa 22 ; 

T : 


W 7 


bbri™ 


Iran* 


nibx 2 


K13** 


135 22 

_ T 


in 9 


bbn 49 


I? 1 ? 23 


*}bx s 

dk 34 

nx 2 


lin 41 


15? 22 


Din 39 

- T 


iw 1 


;m 2 
Ti$ 2 


#is 17 
inn 41 

T 


bii| 10 
Si/ 10 


n3t 18 

_ T 

nni 18 


#an 35 

T T 


nana 31 


r\%x u 
n&k 34 


iro 41 

nr? 14 
rv3 3 


nbiis 14 


nnt 47 

lit 18 

- T 


n^rj 27 

ipn 29 


t T ": 

br\x u 
mk 34 

T T 

is 2 

iaiK 41 

Tik 8 

UK 8 

^38 

nns 35 

T V 


nmx 23 

]&X™ 

iaa 5 


lis 45 
biia 46 

nS| 14 
bij 3 

^? 3 

#i| 16 


i3j 18 
p£f* 

m 11 


Ten 29 
ph 2 

npn 2 


- T 

nipa 5 
riaa 23 

rpx 2 * 


HD3 41 

lbs 32 
nibs 32 

T : 

■Tibs 38 

nbai 41 

T T 


1W 

^?6 39 

bin 15 ' 23 

#in 9 

T T 

#nn 9 
bin 45 


3in 8 

_ T 

3in 8 
nsin 8 

T : T 

^n 5 


^ 46 

nsa 41 

T T 


15 n 

njs 11 

2,12 25 


P?T 2 

irn 6 

i3i 6 


bin 45 

nam 89 

pn 2 

njn 30 

ntn 30 

jiin 30 


nnn 46 
nsti 18 
nits 18 


nina 34 
mm* 34 

n-jna 27 


^ 8 

jiik 12 
nik 41 


nsps 25 


T T 

#3i 37 


rotp 18 

linia 21 

"into 21 

" T 


ink' 34 
"ins: 34 
Ji"in« 34 
nnna 34 


^12 

T]k 41 


#ps 37 
ki£ 45 

nis 25 


mi 28 
nbf 2 

Dl 26 

rrJi 43 


pin 23 
pjn 23 
atari 5 
«pn 5 


^to 10 
Dito 10 

3ita 10 

apt? 21 

aftti 21 


^ 38 " 


H*? 9 


rp]5 25 


TH U 


mm 5 

T ~ 


naptp 21 


^ftgft) 


tftj«> 


ms 20 


^T! 12 


TT 11 


i*r v 


^41 
J^38 


n#** 39 


T-? 6 


#11 15 


•TO 11 


n#3! 40 


n&« 9 

t#k 10 


nana 6 

- T 


S3?f 39 
tH 11 


n;n u 


T 8 * 


^9 


nx 2 ' 


1#2 31 

T T 


bsn 9 


^n 45 


.TT 3 


j • t -: 


nx 2 


ra?i 17 . 


^•^: 


D5n 3 


yyu 


12K 41 

- T 


ian 25 


ni 11 


bbr\ i9 


a ?0 3 


Di^ 10 


bzx n 


in' 19 

- T 


nbira 46 


man 9 


niin 3 


Q?r° 


hx* 


TO 19 


bxi 5 ' 

- T 


jiin 9 


rBn 1 

T T 


iniT" 

T : ~ 



WORDS OF THE VOCABULARIES. 



119 



nrr 3 

- T 

p«l37 

te; 9 

n'r 32 

- T 

# s 

Q^37 

-T 

JP! 47 

jr^43 

•^33 

pi; 43 

^43 

**T 7 

HKT 17 

^43 

ttf'-yl 43 

^138 
Dt?^ 14 

TIM 11 

Mi 21 

- T 

"133 4 

T : • 

rte 34 



«D3 4 

T T 



Tap 20 

- T 

rns? 20 

ana 24 

B15 24 

ma 20 
St^ 22 
rnra 4 

^b cdS) 23 

T " 

trnS 22 I 
t#pS 22 
|6 44 
Dhb 24 

- T 

D D^ 24 

*rbS 18 



■saS v. rua 

pt!?b 40 

nto 2 
nwb 86 

b^b 41 
ainb 44 
b^b 10 
naib 42 
tfK;b 16 
nanb 6 



^9 40 

nsib 43 

arib 5 

n&ib 14 

nh u 

nib 44 

rmfo 18 

niojb 27 
^hb 34 
n^TO 34 
rr©S £ 

T • 

Q^3 

nib 48 

^? 17 
a 1 ?? 17 
nbnbb 24 

^b- 

^f?£ 13 

nirfcb 18 

rDbbb 18 

t t : - 

jb 13 ' 

nmb 27 
naDb 12 

T : • 

bpb 39 
nS^i 39 

T : - 
T -: i- 

J?b 47 
aitb 14 
niib* 



nri&b 42 

Dlpb 19 

n?pJp 30 
»ib» 

n^-ia 80 
DiHib" 10 
nM^a 86 

nt^a 25 
!T#b 25 
D|trb 19 

bttfb 15 
bttfb 15 

T T 

njtfb* 

nnatrb 28 

bpttfb 37 
nrite 26 

DTib" 44 
kj 3 ' 

DKJ 42 
KDJ 29 
Mj» 

biS 17 

T T 

^?i 17 
rf-bJ 17 

T T : 

n !?5? 17 

- T 

*m 29 

M 42 

OT 42 
^j 42 



• T 

TQ 32 

ITD* 4 

DU 44 

bm 42 

- T 

^n;_ 42 

cm' 42 
riOTP 3 
ntp5 3 ° 
3?ti: 42 

DiTJ* 4 

n ?r 8 

no: 42 



ot 42 

nn^ 33 
baj 22 

t^ai 82 
nib" 42 
ni5 33 

_ T 

n^i 83 
b^j 42 

atrj 29 
W 2 

DDD 88 
MD 38 

DID 26 
IID 46 
Hip 28 

n^D 37 

^D 3 



nan 12 

" T 

"iriD 21 

^oc 21 
W 8 

- T 

ni^ 23 

- T 
^ 23 

n^ 28 ' 

^28 

^ 28 

TO 43 

TO 38 
TO 88 

aSi^ 33 

p£ 29 
-1(^34 

ni^ 8 

-it^ 23 
"i$ 23 

r^ 3 

n9^ 39 
nS'^ 39 
ji^p 39 

or' 

n? 9 

ib? 5 

Sbi 9 

mbV 

P^?? 48 
TO 47 

,TO 29 



120 



WORDS OF THE VOCABULARIES. 



ani 9 

T T 

nr 7 ' 

nnr 7 
rna 48 

na 3 

na 36 
nna 36 

- T 

aba l& 

ntp'^a 16 

n ?V 8 ' 
a^a 48 

is 48 " 

a^a 48 

naa 33 
bra 33 

" T 

rrrpa 15 
a^pa 15 
nana) 9 
rna 9 T 

'ia 9 
p.? 20 

tn'a* 

una 20 
^^a 25 



r^a 25 
nna 21 

nna 21 

j*& 2 

ana 49 

niVaa 48 

pni u 

npnat 18 

ni¥ 28 

«ii 49 

Kisi 49 

p^i 24 

nai 40 

jiai 16 

ja^ 16 

maa 27 

^iS hit) 26 

ma 26 * 

nni 26 

pp 8 

nap 15 

^ap 15 
tfrfp 8 

aV 13 






Stop 14 

I^p 17 

ntpp 37 
mtip 37 

nbbp 19 
nip 80 

Hip 30 

n^p 40 
n^p 36 






! V 



h 

*np 4 

*op 4 
anp 18 

anp 18 



n;ip 4 
nfep 40 

n*n 30 
tt?*n 3 
jiWi 3 

an 46 
ah 46 
roan 85 
iaK 35 ' 

n ?T 6 

biT 2 
bri 32 

an 10 
an 10 



ann 36 
arh 86 

aim. 36 
jrrn 36 

an" 28 

aan 36 
arn 86 

n 47 
rrcn 47 

:?rj 46 
ri on) 46 
aaV T 

T T 

^atr 25 
ni'f 
dt^ 45 

n^'tr 3 
nnia 1 ?? 8 

n^ 2 
na& 31 

P'^ 4 - . 
it? nw 3 

Si^tp 12 

bxti 12 

l^b 21 

natr 27 

n(a#' 27 
^attf 25 

satr 25 



T : • 

natf 14 

"iati? 14 
nattf 16 
natr 16 

- T 

Ttf 2 
Tlttf 2 

ari 46 

naiti? 49 

nitr 49 

nntf 48 

ton^ 24 

nntb 24 

_ T 

rro 24 

aatf 19 

na# 21 

aa& 19 

aat? 19 

pi' 21 

ai^ 22 

^ibttf 35 



^bw 22 

T T 

DibtT' 20 

abttf 20 

- T 

aSti? 20 

n6^ 20 
n:mtf 18 

aw 10 



nptr 35 



uw 32 
I# v 

nitf 31 

^¥ 31 
a^itr 31 

njtfr 33 

nna^ 28 

T : • 

toat^ 30 
b&h 17 

" T 

nbatf 17 
npttf 28 

It t 

topt^ 2 * 
Sptr 37 

t^-itr 32 

n^ 24 
ti?^ 35 
nn^ 26 
ni«n 34 

T-: I" 

rwari 44 
niiari 14 

T : 

nnin 8 

T 

na?in 40 

nnin 40 
n^nn 49 

t • : 

nmh 39 

triTn 43 

an 49 

TOn 40 

a^n 49 

aDJi 49 

nain 44 

t?ari 2 

^pn 25 

n^fin 10 



ABSTRACT OF NOTES TO VOCABULARIES. 



121 



ABSTRACT OF NOTES TO VOCABULARIES. 



2. O-r. with. coot, cholera. Coke, 
whole, my oath. zone, an initial 
hissing letter. Sadday. topaz. 

3. g. a j. n- "■ y &■ d- 9- fi- 

l -|. *£?. Camel (etymological mean- 
ing) . Hokhmak. hal-lncination. 
y e oar. joy supports. 

4. Car. case. K e thibh. Q e re. Raphe. 
Rephaim. sack (article of dress). 

5. Emir. gaol. hate. "piTl and 

PDttf. yachts. 1&-- 

6. Baruch. Deborah. Qadhes. 

8. Abba. Abaddon, ore. Horeb. 
Obed. — . 

9. Hum. Hor. £Hp and flfl- 
deriv. of Qj^- Moil. Erebus. 
Ephraim (berry, pear). Qoheleth. 

10. Migclol. Tobias. Yom. Abram. 
Shem. 

11. Derivatives of HjH- JTil and 
H^H- Hamor. Ichabod. 7 and Jf^- 

12. Aaron. Ariel, behemoth. t(d)rack. 
Kohen. Meaning of FpD ? Sheol. 

13. Melchizedek. Kafyos. 

14. pn and p^. pD and p. Go- 
liath. Sabbath O^)- K^ 1 and 

xxk a- 

15. Midrash. T1H and 77p[- ma r- 
shal. HpS ( r - meaning), cover. 
*■)£# and ^Dtr. 

16. Sansc. gras (Eng. grass) . ^Qlft 
and ttf^lifc- ID7D ( r - meaning). 
seguro (secure). ?£2£ (r. meaning 
and derivative) . pp (r. meaning and 
deriv.). ttfp (i&iU). Sabbath. 

17. Ishbosheth. cane (?p and f). 
wary C^ 1 ]). Millo. Nabal. Joktan. 
Shephelah. 



§ 18. rnj and nDD- Zechariah. 
Talmud, corban. Ishniael. 

§ 19. Rob and robe OIQ). ""PS and 
PlpS- ToAetOct kou/x. Qal. ^2*C? 
and DDttf- 

§ 20. rnS and mn- nab. ns^ 
and 'Hip. mercator. Perez. Phari- 
see. Salaam. 'ffttlJ and consonants 
of smite. 

§21. ^HD and KttlD- DDD (r. 
meaning). ^fiD^S and "mystery." 
Pathah. sounding like a hoof -beat. 
rDtt? and *]U?n- Shekinah. 

§ 22. 3^. SttfS and ^SJ. lavish. 
Siloam (John ix. 7). Jl^u? and *77tl?- 

§ 23. Ebenezer. Asaph, amen. Heze- 
kiah. ^5^n and ^Y$. laving. Hebrew. 

rare n»b gpb- ™. 2). 

§24. p^t (mimetic). Carmel. Beth- 
lehem. fT£? (r. meaning and deriv.) . 

toptr and t:n:r- rntffc and *o9. 

§ 25. Beersheba. beka. PHD an( ^ 
*"C"Q- Messiah. 71-070). Pasha, "^Otl? 
and ^ttf- Tekoa. 

§ 26. EH and DHK- Marah. Tyre. 
Tsar. Sarah, heading of a number 
of Psalms (TwO- Hpttf and Hfiti? 
(Rabshakeh) . 

§ 27. Ahaz. Mahanaim. ri^H ( r - 
meaning), minhah. Xer. Zipporah. 
Shear-jashub. Tishbeh. 

§ 28. David, door. Succoth. add. 
Zion (ppSfc and H^). reeve, H&vtf 
(r. meaning and derivatives) . 

§ 29. nTDH ( r - meaning and deriva- 
tives). &OJ and tonj (Nebat). ^ 
(r. meaning and deriv.). |"|D3 and 
Ktft. awa. Anna (a.d. 1730-1710). 



122 



ABSTRACT OF XOTES TO VOCABULARIES. 



§ 30. Word used 280 times as Part. 
(enemy), syn. of ^D3 and HK"l 
(seer), nata-re. cane 2 (c/. § 17). 
all the letters weak and the first 
"vibrating" (see). Jehosaphat. 

§ 31. DIK and J-IOTK. npD (idea of r. 
and its derivatives). *V£?D (noun and 
verb). |5 (idea of r. and word for 
wing) . JrV£? (idea of r. and word for 
lip). Mishna (change, year, etc.). 

§ 32. uariv. *122 (firstborn) and *lpd- 
yeledh. Nazirite. ^ (idea of r. and 
deriv.). Gethsemane. Beth-shemesh. 
ft^lttf and ttfHp. 

§ 33. Oholiab. Jearim. Necho and 
Seth. gnar or snarl (young man). 
H^fc- Nipfral (r. and its meaning). 
Trao-xa. QVS- share. 

§ 34. Ebionite. flX- Acheron. Amine 
{mamma). T\)*D (idea of r. and its 
deriv.). *"p^ or *")3J (idea of r.). 

§ 36. n£ (idea of r. and its deriv.). 
yp(ibid. See §16). triandbn 
CH)- Rehob. H^l (idea of r. and its 
deriv.). Rechabite. Maschil. ^ptl? 
and Q^. 

§ 37. ID (idea of r. and its deriv.). 
backshish, dibs, p (1 for i). yam. 
Benjamin. f[7D and ^[St^- JH'HSC 
and JTp' 1 ^. Keturah. Shekel. 

§ 38. tX (demon. |, etc.). ^ (Icha- 
bod, § 11). ptf and pp. negative 

from rto- n:n and run- nna 

and )1ft\ n^b and HD (see § 37). 
E (DDD) form of letter suggests 
meaning. 
§39. ntfKandfltflt tfrtandttftt 
Barzillai. Abel, harass. 7^n and 



h^Ti- x&y-a- hl$ (idea of r. and 
deriv.). 
§ 40. Jabesh (Gilead). ivyfo (r. 
meaning and form of first letter). 
Mad (mete). Mizpeh. JTp. J-?^p 
and nitp (idea of r. and deriv. See 
§ 16). TOp and ntf p (idea of r.). 
rash. bH® and bx*\V- HID and 

mp- mrp rom 

§ 41. Oats are. Aijalon. n^^ and 

nna- bore, ^nn, n^n and ^ps. 

Baca. Bema (/%ia). Joseph. 

§ 42. ^K and QSO- Negeb. M (r. 
meaning and deriv.). 7fD and 
bm- Nahum. n^3, SfcJandSDJ- 
Massah. sack (*p3- See § 43). 
22) and niiC (Zion). ^ and 
n^i- Nathan. 

§ 43. 6?5« (oi5a). Get thee (point 

*\b *]b)- TOa bn«- nare and 

nit^. sack (pour). ^^ and -)Jp. 

Jordan. ^^1 with "f, ^, or ^ prefixed. 

§ 44. «H and ^\ J^ and ^. 

filft and DVlft- words for offerings 

cnsun, etc.). 

§ 45. nSirO and SnS. Abigail. ^ 

and bV- E*W and rPttf- 
§ 46. Fltf and )T|K. coral. Hittite. 

turn aside (about, return). Rabbi. 

^^ (idea of r. and deriv.). 
§ 47. M e huppakh. J-ft2 and tTW ( see 

§ 29). ,-|9n, HKI and ^. 
§ 48. Knock. Peniel. fitl? (idea of 

r. and deriv.). 
§ 49. Hallelujah. bbft and bbft- 

^ttSC and K2£fc- Sabaoth. ^Slttf 

(idea of r.). '-flttf and rfttf- Thum- 



ADDITIONAL EXERCISES IX TRANSLATION 123 



APPENDIX I. 



ADDITIONAL EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION. 

*zbz mm :?pax nhas^sn :-pv nbn bz® mm §§14-25.- 

• : T T : I v - : v I " T I v v - t : T T T T : 

Sfflg nas n^an ab :*pto spa ^a niaar rnb^a "12? nife Ma 
-js :^d? nt-r ntfa ttft*ri nna ttoj^bri xb tfypg tof#i niaqA 
tWTjj max nai niaaa mm nin na icaia twatfai ^j^ 
■'am ra p naia B^to vnrs tn^a nn nisr :ve»u bmtr 

- T : : it I •• I v v •• • - T : IT • • : - : ■ 

npn- w& D5 rr ab aim ins on? tea :n'i nl at-irba :thS 

It : it T -T : -t : it -t - - v v t • t : 

n'lisc n^nsii T :dt)Vj^&AK7 i^rrn :a^t> njrj tstfi pint natf :ia 
:nann ^-m na& ira jrsn *jn T i; rwasniato Dianana JQjyn 
bifcrraa : 5 ptrira ^n&arrba :rts iS mm attfm ab ana-ntra 

: - I v : : : • - It : - t t i- : - 

nn#a 6 >pr ta ta-tfpia pai <m tpidj atom '•rurhjj jr :di»iTB3 
: 4 jtD^3 n$? tnvr-Dic kSb; tsstdi par*? "fc-n* : ^I1^ 
nana "tt tuna *?s aah aim nfta fOStplcj J Kin mnba saaa 
a$£ *a Disab^iyna boarrba : 7 :imnBa JirrSab psavna 
aSi stfn ni> tabnn 9 ci ? 3 pmnppji nap tt^an :rw D'bra 8 prta 
t^na filT&toi :rro tra mi rp #* *i^S tffln dvti lo a^v? :d^ 
tr^pa rMa t^Tiana ebis nana nw ntf; 'ria ■sprn §§ 26-40. 
tamn-na fnaa awnai rnb^rna n vpJn Pribss baa :nmi? 
■jrts :nta aS ^mpa-nai : 4 Df?a-na sp#$ nat? nrnn^jr jia ■•tg-jn 
nuta r;n orriia cr^tth M n< misiS ratr nf a ra m-to "a nn&a 

I -.- v • t •••■.■•- • t - v T I : • • T : ■ t : - t • t : - t 

*rrVtffl nnnaraia rbva :parrSa nat? mm Sba :ata na'i 

a The sections (of the Grammar) named are simply more especially illustrated 
than others. 

1 Disting. from }*£H. 2 Qi. Inf. with fern, termination. 3 gray hair. 4 p.n. 
5 oppression. 6 break forth. 7 Here sacrifice, usually feast. Art. omitted in 
poetry. 8 bosom. 9 during the (same) day. 10 Xote the idiom. u § 44. 1. k. 8. 
12 prisoners. 13 Otherwise !p|t from *y\]. u idiomatic, set on fire. 



124 ADDITIONAL EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION. 

nsitf tnabitfn a^naa vps pV? nar*6 :pK| na^aab ttfaa 
; arm nn~b? *wi Qi s 5 vbai tc?S1 ♦ t^SW bnn&ba : pis ji : Tsn 
Mas nw pbn maa ^-bs ^n man itw *np: tratr-nmaa 
^arrch *b ttfig pari trnb-OKba ^bb-narj ta^nan nipbria 

aim :nbar its mrr ran :ia wba *ittto :Tpasb nann Kian 

....,_ - : • t : 1 v - •• t ■ : - | v t : • T • : T 

t^nir nianri tth* xnn^aa baan :b*n'w *jsnpa ann tana annn 
■•Bb anb :nba bipi jnn Sip Tia#n taa^niatfiia Tiiatfna *6 
OT *T£ n;n nw nan J^ban ns^ ja :a?ia 3 abrTnpan :*pn 
rmni nnri mrrma pn« tcnTr n#btf iniaatri t^bri 4 np; 
pr :aab mb-bs ntfnn rriana-n* wtfa : ^nattfa attrrba 
tcrana a'obnb aia-^aa? «b t^nasba-na na^ab ^na nm na 
ianbaa anbsa n^a njn bsarrna ^nbsb nbaa nrroa pitfj 
:a s n-ba a^abn D^narrba twarrKb : 5 abnr rnsfcrb* aba s i 

7 - v • : i • t : - t I - : • T \ -: - T : v " T • - 

rrjha : 6 bK-rra nra ann ^bar naa-sba baa nptra aibtn pni 
•nw :naa raaa riais :n»a is na :ama anr :n:fr innp 
^aan tan ^^ntfp-ns ;Dfi^ ip^j rbs ijhjri :bbtf pbrr wmrj 
-«b nanaa rnn^ai ^ba mrr :p^ wa nnai i-w bbana 
■spra map :vnpn uaa tarrba ban nitpai ajp ar :bav naae 
ibnga nnats :pah man nnsb rDanaa-bRi Q??5b v;np ranbaa 
amn bis :^narn abir nana :pn man : Tpaa *fjp xmir\ h nai 
tfitpyirn :n*]V rrna '?? on snagi narram d^sk ipiA part] 
:nrnn *sb naiin antr nban :«yH nnn nna :a*iarrba-n« 
jn tvnba't? apr vnp?i :nSirS n'^n 8 n\s: :n'atr k sS jnacn nap 
:a^an tSs n ^aau? ^t^a : io nr^ bra tra j»w t^\s ••rw m'ot 

■ - I v t : 17 -.- -: i- - ■• - - • • T • • T T " 

mtem ft toinn ^s-br nOT xrhbpb\ mvb ;naau? nana mnx 

■.■•.■:•: : ■■ : | v t t I : • : t - : T t : - : • t -: i - 

: 593 *mn jiaab TiK : it? npaa 
r^ br^a nr :nat? lan :na^n ,sb ainn naabx-ba §§41-49. 

I • T --•: •• ■ T : T I-: t:tt:- t 

abn 12 nat rnk : Tibxa pa-rrm : nA-^ba" a^t^n ^1 toa^a 

T t - t | v v • t it •• I • t t i- r : |v t - - : • t : ■ t : ■ 

1 nt^n net - 2 Here melteth. 3 cstr. of a^n- 4 brightness. 5 p.n. 6 Tvith. 
7 Note half-open syllable by special exception. 8 where. 9 defectively written. 
10 i.e., Elijah. n astonished, nsnally desolate. 12 ail (Part. cstr.). 



ADDITIONAL EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION. 125 

nxy. Wfij at:\s D^ri-D« : D^a DTisbi nhi« mir pra : tf ari 
♦TO^ ^38 C^J :1 ^ npri tthjt ttttft nab \m "spterta :vni 
DTiba j^i tf&fcn mta vm nvr nana •tttfa :pn mnrta 7*; 

I - : - v v - - : ■ • : - : I • T T : ■■ : • It t : t t 

tmrp \ft maai jn :bbtf phm rte* trb&ri ira ^h tang nn 
tffejfer '¥na tpi ;a£v ^ pra s^-pS 1 ? ^1?™ fjioi ^ n?s 

nan : tria.K nsnn lanTrbs iDjrfcr: ^aa jinn :nxa ^pb nrn 
: njjij ■wj. *rjjT anti : b*n^b baa rrrm : in?a&-na rtrja 
spate tmrrtx Sa-ur bir nsr *6i wh* jtfjb "ray? -nxnn 
:nsn^ nsr xrmh mm mo :p Tifcrba 6^n :»srW? rmstfi 

... . - ... t •• I • I • - T • •• | v •• : T : v i •/ : 

:^bn rutf mfw :rnjbn f^^-ja nia-viam-^ twi bistrbs; 
WP*i :ni£in nn^ m?^ :w a^nbsa nWx jab-ntF irtfto 

-tt: •:• T • T ......... 

13313 :^nrna ntt* wtti imn ^ann-^aa : nbma njntfn mm 
mi aaria Sabaa ^a3K irrjitfp aab mnin TiWp nm-br a*:n 
:aab fea *3a*i :^a nsSa nnaa : 4 aba i^Sa3-a3i rtfia raaato 

T • T T I v _ : 7 T t • : T : • T •• : : • - : v : - 

m tnir-ian nto tmaisia iTa pin :nbi^ natrb lb trc*i titerr 

• ■ t •:- ••- T : 7:1": T : T : • T ■ 

: 6 mm hrhi twzrvb drvb :nn& 5 anb *ujrrbK tnnsa m? 
ttrfrroa ^3-^pct :nn&n *6 inann : Dribs bia asb nna mn 

- : t • I i • : - v T • T : v T T T - " v: 

^na^n? :na* ^nnnn ntrs D^arrtba nan&a 7 irrrtr n&a 
rpan :amb« nasnn ana?i_ rnirna ^di^ in?. : 8 ^mb \mi tobis 
naj :nap:n iaaasai tnina; a^ir; arwt ribbtf nasn^rf^rriK 
: n ^3jiri« Du'a jDnhap-nKDnacnji ^j^-Dp.v^^^^atna^ 
tiiva :wton a>a n^Ha :rtna ana :i3anp rrm nSa 

|t t v : T t ...... . - . . 7 :It :• : I- 

:mr;3a te k^ ^a naiS aiD jniia tiv^a iivS :amaa naivn^ 

T : ■ T • • v v - : - t : t 7 : I - : • 

TO ^a-«a: i2 ^?i'' vb :ama pwi nns n*n^ ^4^ ^» 
n^.i. :san-Sj< a\san ^pnanaK ^3a nsn ^nna-n^ :s^i St§ 
rfp :n^i ^:rn^ R^aa ■•aan : nsnnri nt % a niiD 9 .i rnt^sio nn« 
nnx ^ :m«a2f flbij mirb wsp ifep :to; n^a :niiT \nip 

1 p.n. 2 lion. 3 7 before. 4 73. 5 defectively written. 6 To (the Lord). 
7 How often they rebelled against. 8 Note use of "J. 9 Made himself strange. 
10 sevenfold. § 35. 6. e. n pH3- 12 Note the idiom. 



126 



ADDITIONAL EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION. 



05b Tpnni. x&rhvb win tp^pri : Trips ^apa tnig 
*5?13 nnr 2 ps :dwi d?S [rr ^ bis tpnmxc^b tnrna 
tnyip *6 nSir xtsMrrhs nb^v nratn nna fi s 2 i*oi npS 
n!?nrn 3 an^ 3 n^n %d naii :« ston ncn biitettn w &fi"^ 

mbn 



VOCABULARY. 



^HX (breathe after) love. pQHK* 

- T t -: l- 

a loving, love. Mimetic. 
^18* foolish, fool. nS^*/. folly, 

godlessness. Mn. "Evil." 
V\k (cstr. |ij<) to. travail, nothingness. 

p^ is from same r. jlS to. strength. 
DIN /• sign. Discrim. from J1K sign 

of accus. which takes suffixes (Vlft)- 
^K surely, only, yet. 
fibx* /• oath. R. syn. of 1^. 
FftfobXf- widow. Suggests "almoner." 
n$ * he strong, of good courage. Mn. 

" Amoz," (p£8) father of Isaiah. 
*|DK bind. 
SS^*/. finger. 

b^iH (cstr. b^k) m - side ; Prep, beside. 
V"]& to. cedar. Discrim. from V 1 "]^- 
nH« curse. Syn. nS«, SSp. 

- T TT -It 

DtTK* trespass. DtZ?^* to. trespass 

•• T T T 

offering, guilt. 
•HttfK* CP?. cs£r. of *)!&&) Sail! 

Happy ! 
jm^t * w. she-ass. Syn. ^fi&ft. 

7rI3* be troubled, in consternation. 

- T 

J"! .3 * despise ; intrans. be despicable. 

T T 

tt3 plunder, strip. 13 to. booty. 



JUS try, prove. Of. nH3- 

H^3 trust, confide. H£3 to. trust. 

JtD3 /• belly. R. M = empty. 
v^jySl uselessness. Mn. "Belial." 
v?3* mix, confound. 
^73 swallow up. 

- T 

7^3 lord, husband, Baal. 

*")>2 burn, extirpate. 

*|St3* cut off, separate. 1¥3£* c. 

~ T T : • 

fortress. (Idea ?) 
J1K3 to. majesty, pride. From HIS- 

Qr: 13, etc. 

ns5* be high. nb3 Mgh. r, aa, 

- T - T 

13 = be rounded up, gibbous. 
^ to. people, nation (rounded together). 
OT valley. R. H13 (rounded out). 
D^b^ll* TO- icl ols (r. ^^3 roll), stocks. 
Q3 also (both — and) . R. EftJ = bind. 
?H* c. garden. 
?S2 to. vine (crooked; Fp = DJ)- 

|73 * to. threshing-floor. 
Dtril* (i) to. shower. 

OT* to. grain. R. Jl^H multiply. 
T Deriv. yj t fish ; J^V (fish-god) 
"Dagon." 



1 thicket. 



Pi- 



p.n. 



VOCABULARY. 



127 



p^* feeble, poor. R. hhl languish. 
Mn. and deriv. "Delilah," the lan- 
guishing. 

JUn* meditate, "imagine." 

T T 

i'nJl murder, kill. 

- T 

mi"!* conceive. Disting. mm* 

T T T T 

2))* flow. Part. 3f, J-Qt- 

T T T 

nil he strange. Part. *1t- 
i - T 

]-pt (csfr\ n\t) w - olive. 

nbt* sing, etc. ^iftttt m. psalm. 

Mimetic. 

nil Play the harlot, be idolatrous. 

T T 

mitt shine forth (of sun), sprout. 
n*1tD w*- dawn, east. R. = scatter. 

^t sow. pi*1t c - arm. ^t »». seed. 
Associate ideas together. R. akin 
to preceding and following. 

p*nt* scatter, (espec.) sprinkle. 

jn or an (r. ^rr) »»• fea st. 

n)in * gircl. Note last two radicals and 

- T 

form of first. 

milk (sweet). Assoc, with 



3bn- 



T T 

next. 

Jpn ^t. Mn. "Helbon" (ft 
celebrated for its wine : Ezek.xxvii.18. 

*"pn* change, exchange. Mn. "Caliph," 
vicar of Mohammed. 

rSn* draw out, off (clothing, etc.), 
deliver. 

p^n clivide, apportion. pSfl «*•» 
np/Il * /• portion, smoothness, flat- 
tery, np/llto*/- divisions, classes. 
Mn. " Hilkiah" = Jehovah's portion. 

n^Pl /• heat, rage. R. Qm akin to 
D^n- Mn. "Ham." 

7^n* P^y, spare. Cf. a,ua\6s. 

- T 

DDn m - violence, wrong. R. (Qn) = 

be hot. 
pn incline, be gracious to. Cf. nift 

?n w. grace, favor. 03F| * in vain, 



gratis. nSnD t /• favor, supplication. 

T ■ : 

Mn. n3n mother of Samuel. 

nDn* tind refuge in, trust. R. = 
hasten (to). 

ripn De pleased with. V£fJ * »»• de- 
light. Mn. " Hephzibah ": 2 Ki. xxi. 1. 

Vpl (i) m. arrow, ^n half . R.= divide. 

"I^n w*« court, hedge. R. allied to last. 

mill* tremble. Syn. tJH* etc. 

[-nil be hot, angry. jinil* heat, 
anger. R. ^Jf suggests char. 

D^lH devote, destroy. Din m - curse, 
set apart (to destruction). Cf. 
' ' Harem. ' ' 

mn reproach, despise. nB*in /• 

tZ?nn* engrave, plough. t£?nn* m - 

- T T T 

engraver, artisan. 
trnn* De silent, dumb. 

- T 

Dt^n desire, impute, reckon. rDtl^nfc 

- T v v -: I - 

thought, purpose. 
tnn * J om - Part, father-in-law. ^PT t 
m. bridegroom. 

fl^StS * /■ seal, seal ring, ring. 

PtD* m - dew. R. akin to p"] hang 
(stream) down. 

|DfcD* secrete (Moses — body of Egyp- 
tian) . 

F|tO w*. little one. R. 5"|StD = trip, spring. 

DHID not yet, before (gen. with Impf. 
and Inf.). Mn. term. 

mitfl* pluck, tear, mitO* m. fresh 
leaf, prey, food. 

2JJP * be weary, labor (to weariness) . 
SfT* give; only Imp. ^Jl, H^rf- 
SlT * wait. Akin to h^fl- 

- T 

n^" 1 adjudicate, correct. R. = stamp 

- T 

level. 
p7 h * complain, howl, yell. 
W* (Hi.) give suck. Cf pJ9 be long- 

I "T I ~ T 

necked. Mn. "Anak." 



128 



VOCABULARY. 



13* 1 * found, sit together. 113 f w*. 

secret, mutual counsel. 
13* 1 * beautiful. Mn. and deriv. 

" Joppa" (Jaffa). 
Ip 1 * precious. Syn. 133- 
j-j^i * TO- moon. E. akin to 11K wander. 
fll 1 1 m. month. Syn. tiHH- 
il^l* 1 /• curtain (from its motion). 
Vy * f. side, loin. 
,131'' */■ side, loin. 
J^ t sleep. HJtg t /. sleep. 
2^P save. 2^* (i) to. salvation. 

121^ h , 121t^1 *'&«*. Mn. " Joshua," 

- : T : 

"Jesus." 
1t£T* be upright. 1^ upright. Mn. 

- T r T 

" Jasher." 
DlJT* m - orphan. 

T , 

1]-p remain over, 1£p (i) to. what 
is left, string of how. R. — stretch 
out. 

13 thus, so = 13 (133). 

1^3* contain, sustain. R. akin to 

bb*2 6s). 

J13 place, prepare. Mn. "Jachin" 
(pp''), pillar of the temple: 1 Ki. 
vii. 21. 

313 t deceive, lie. 213 * liar. Mn. 
"Cozbi" OSp). 

13 to. strength. R. akin to ft^- 

3^3 * he ashamed, ,13^3 * /• shame. 

~ t t • : 

?3 thus (upright, place, base). 

233* (and 213) bow. Mn." Canaan," 

- T 

i.e. lowland. 
7^33 «*■ fool- B- = heavy, stupid. 
323 vex r provoke. 323 1 to. vexation. 

n^ri^ * (rtfriS) /• tunic, shirt, x<™^. 
t^rO /• shoulder. R. press. Cf. 313. 

3*6 to. people. Syn. 32, 1jj. 

nib * (r. join) borrow, (Hi.) lend. Mn. 

""Levi" (lb). , 



Pfi ?.* ( r - shine) to. tablet. (7/. \x>xvos. 
pll* (r. stammer) mock, scorn. 
tOpb * glean. (7/. f\pb ; ppS lick up. 
13*i6 */■ chamber, cell (of temple). 

131&$3* anything (whatever), from 

hfltkh neck, spot. 
[Kfc * (Qi.) refuse. 
3K3 despise, reject. Syn. of last. 
13^13 * ( r - pi rule) /. province. 
11ft'(Qi.) hasten. 11)3* (1113 

/.) quickly. 
3?]3*move, totter. Mn. "mote." 
11)3* cut off (foreskin), circumcise. 
Sl3* (Sll3) (what is) before, over 

against. 
n^ift * ( r - flSX distort) to. wonder. 
113* wipe out, destroy. 

T T 

p!3* (r. divide) m. kind, species. 
1&63 (r- 1*6 send) to. angel, mes- 
senger. 
13*6)3 /• business. 
,11)3 * /. word (poetic). 

T * 

ibi* »». salt. 

,13)3* count, apportion, prepare, (7/". 

T T 

next. 
23)3* withhold. Cf. r. |3 (divide) 

elsewhere. 
1^3/3 * ( r - bS3 elevate) highway. 
t02)3 little, short. 
^2)3 * act treacherously, sin. 12ft * 

- T 

m. sin. 
,112)3 * (r. 112 De dee P) /• cave - c f- 

T T : - T 

1*12 * blind. 
113 revolt. Mn. "Mmrod" (1133). 
113* ( r - akm to last) rebel. 
1313* (r. 131) /• deception. 

jrj^3 * commit adultery. 

VK3* despise. Syn. 3Kft- 

113 * wander. ,113 * separation, un- 

- T T • 

cleanness. 



VOCABULARY 



129 



PHD drive away. 

- T 

nnJ* lead, direct. 

T T 

^n3 wady, valley (with a brook). 
wTD * m - serpent. 

T T 

*1^3 be strange ; Hi. recognize. ""D3,* 

- T T " 

''""ISD* foreigner. 
DP3* pierce, bore. HDpi t female. 
HpD bie innocent, ''pi * innocent. 

It t |t 

DP3 avenge. 

I-T 

i'^i overtake. 

_ T 

ptl?i* kiss, arm (put on weapons), obey. 
M"fo* tear down (altars, houses, etc.). 
Pi13 * tear away, out, down, etc. 

I - T 

yh& m- (deft) rock. Cf. ^fl^. 
nSb* c. (fine) flour (as well bolted, 

D^D * m - eunucli, officer. 

• T 

DV* ( r - IOT ^e thick) c. cloud. Syn. »$. 
*OT* m. (/. ribjy) calf (r. = roll), 

so called as frolicsome. 
*"H^ * m. flock. R. = order, set in rows. 
EV^ * cover. )FY^ to. bird. 
li* ( r - fi> bow) /. she-goat. 
TO t be strong. ^ * /., ft m. flM * 

- T - T 

i)i. strength, 
bl > * m - yoke. 
D^> t be strong. DliC3? * strong. 

- T | T 

DSK?/- bone (selfsame). 
TO?* restrain. JTT»t (Dlfc) 

- T T T -: rv-: 

holy day. 
D*1^* gi ye security, exchange. 
rnT>> /. plain, " Arabah." 

t T -: 

ITH > * f- nakedness. 

T 5 V , 

TH^ put in order. TH2* w. prepa- 
ration, appraisal. 
7T$* (foreskin) uncircumcised. 

Fpft* (r. separate) to. neck (back side). 
Dui?!?* m - herb, plant. 
Ptl?^* oppress. 

I - T 



Jli^S/- corner. R. open, yawn. Deriv. 

hi 

OTS scatter. 

SOS De wonderful. 

P7£ smooth over, set right, intercede. 

- T 

R. separate. 
PD2 * (i) vi- (hewn) image. 
I"H3* sprout, bloom. 

- T 

""H2 break, make void. R. ^|£ divide. 
tStTS * strip, put off. 

- T 

iinS* entice. V)S simple (ton). 

c}. una. 

HliC * hunt, fish, mi St 12 1 /• fortress, 
etc. ^it game, provision. 

S^* to. shadow. Mn. "Zillah" (H^). 

n?^! prosper. 

2?i*/- side, rib. 

nb^ * sprout, ni^i t = Messiah : 
Zech. hi. 8. 

Hip (r. be stretched) wait, hope. lp f 

-It It 

to. line. Jllpn*/- hope. 

tI : • 

"T'p (r. encircle) to. wall. 

*ttpt (r. be red) be jealous. .IMP* 

tI T T :| • 

/. jealousy. 

Hi? ^ horn ' 

^*1P rend (the garment), tear away. 
SttfP * attend. R. stiffen, point (the 

- It 

ear, etc.). 

TD^l * He down, crouch. 

j™[11 c. breath, spirit. 

Wl * shout, n^l^ri /• shout, hurrah. 

Vip run. Suggests in sound and (dis- 
tantly in) sense roots. 

prit ^ empty, p^t «<#., p*-]t 
«^'-> DP^lt adv. vain, without 

I T " 

cause. Mn. " Raca " : Matt. v. 22. 
Qn*H ( r - ^ e so ff) show mercy. Qin^ t 

merciful. QrH* m - womb. CTfcprH 

mercy. 
n* 1 *! to. savor, odor. Cf. nil of same r. 



130 



VOCABULARY. 



pi rejoice, shout. ,151* /• ibid. 

Mil "Amon" (pIK)- 
ttf§1* tremble, quake. ttf^l 1 m. 

earthquake. 
HiHI be pleased with. |1!l£1 m - ac " 

ceptance. 
nSKI km - R - PI = touch : ^1 the 

earth, in running ; ,1^1 adhere to 

- T 

one 5 H^l an d PSE1 touch hard, 
kill, crush. 
r^l* break, crush. 

H\?* c - one sheep. Related to JtfSC 

as 11t& is t° 1p3- 
ID'tT t serve for hire. 1^"£?* wages, 

- T T T 

hire. 
n^S'^t /. robe, garment ; or rf?£\P* 

t : - T : • 

^Kftll? (K inserted) m. the left side 

(as the )"Hftt# was worn there). 
1^'tT hairy ; goat. 
12'IP* w. hair. 
ni'^"tr* /• barley (as bearded). 



tDDt£J c. rod, sceptre, tribe. 

Klt# (r- perish) m. vanity. Suggests 

: T 

show. 
I^itl?* w . gatekeeper. C/". 1"*J^- 
int^* W. morning (gray). R. over- 
spread. 
DDtS? * m - shoulder. Mn. " Shechem." 
IDttft drink (oneself full). 12$ t 

- T T " 

m. strong drink. 
OE2t£J (r. be stiff) be waste, astonished. 
nbtH? * /• astonishment, waste. 

T T : 

IptZ? w- falsehood ; «cZu. falsely. 

b^n* (r. SD 1 Sow) /. world (in- 
habited) . 
Dlnn * m - tn e (great) Deep. Mimetic. 
rhn* l^ng (impale). Of. S^H, bbl- 

biM* (= t ?iam = bia, n«) «*«. 

over against, yesterday. See ^ft. 
Pl^fl wander. 
PlIK&fi (mkarO /• beauty, glory. 



ifT&Pl /• desire. 

T : V 

^D 1 confer, found. 

- T 

ItOft m - ram - 



113 separate. 
tl^T'S c. concubine. 
US separate. 



LIST OF SYNONYMS. 



131 



APPENDIX II. 



(A).— LIST OF SYNONYMS. 1 



i. T3R, bzi, bvs. 

2. pq& arm, nik nna, ran, 

TT "I TT ~T I " T 

V pn& bsa, "s^d tjj, ar^i 
irtoj, ono, nto 
i'tttt'ttftt twit na|, nat, 

dti& ; pfeifc nap:- 

5. n^TIt pfe bias, San (rare- 
ly), nana rriiT, rirnia,' na>, 

T. : T , TT - T • : TT 

rrfi&, ban. 

... T .. .. 

6. bnk rra, nu ban n;n, 
attft p9, naa, jatr. 

7. tyffl bbT} (sometimes), ^D?, 

ba;, Tya." 
T 8. rife d0k> Kan, by6, ft?, 

|v T ~T tt -- It 

rtfa, r;n, rcn. 
& nWnp'i T n;, nn#- 
10. nix, nai&, nana, aba 

11. li^nr; (answer),' r^i^. 

12. nna/asa. 

13. infe pin (Hi.), &an. 

14. Mt n£ *pn, iuto 

15. *r fe 'waa, rc?, (*&. rita it?- 

16. pfe Sfe '^nba, *fr. ' 

17. Sa«, nsa, *p&, anS cqo. 
4 i8. *m bx, a s nbs, niba, njrr. 



19. nSsi,nns*,^na Rarely), SSp. 

20. *£>& nana, npa, rrp, b}$ 
na, nittf. " 

T 2i. |QM, Tan, nt?;, pro; an- 

22. n?k nta, nan, n&, dkl 
n^hap/ms (<?/• n"). T 

23. irjpR, Dpb, p ap, bnp, nip 

(rarely). 

24. nD$ nm nn_2£ (last two 

rarely), nttfj> 

25. nna/^ni rho& 

26. n& Taa- 

27. ^nk, p]oj. 

28. nrx, Dtfa (c/. 8), nai stpn 
(c/. 8), rw& jspi. nfe 'janp, 
nap, and'aS^/nam nanr! 

29. pnk, man- 

30. naa, ma, KSia, p£- 

31. n:a',ata,nn£, namanpik 

- T t t t t t : • I v v 

32. m #ob« n?n?, rterc 

(na^)Vpt?. 

33. Sna, spa, pbn, na», nns, 

-T l-Tl-T TT "T 

nna 

34. Sna, nnn, nnn, wr, nna, 

"T "T -T "T ~T 

tin, #?i. 
35- aia, nna, ^nn, ■sjbrr, k£, 

tv> Dip, 255, aw aab, ma, naV, 

bjn, nS^, pn, artf- '(These verbs 



1 The term is here used with some latitude ; the object being to associate 
together as many of the words used in this Grammar, having a kindred meaning, 
as possible. Nouns and adjectives as well as verbs, are taken, if necessary, as 
representing roots and, generally, but one representative of a root is used, 
unless it be as expressing a different shade of meaning. 



132 



LIST OF SYNONYMS. 



of motion are put together for con- 
venience.) 

36. #13, nja, rpn nbs- 

37. nn, jrpjp, bbt. 

38. im n^n, nbS nsi 

39. jn^nDa/ribi'^i. 

40. ntps, |©K (Hi.), npn, Sit 

41. jia, Drn- 

42. pi Dprt,' ^T' bsti?. 

43. nas, ros, nyna, nn, Dina. 

44. nii£ aoi chn, n^, bss, 

TT TT - T -T -T 

nw 
T 45. ^a, natp, nsp. 

- t t It - It 

46. nypa, k;i, bnb, pas, nbatp. 

47. t&pa, trhn, bn (spy out; 

I- T " T " T 

c/,35). 

48. ntD (^.22), ^Sa, nsnatf. 

49. *ftn, ni3?- 

so. ni/ naa, nbina. nbs, 
ni^jj nnatf ■ ' 
si". jiki on, afctt- 

52. bxi, 163, nna- 

53. niia, 6ro narfpa ^*t 

54. naj, jrjgK, ptn, Sir- 

55. ^3, D?, Dfe6- 

56. nbiB, nnatft rottf. 

57. ^a, $n jn, nat>. 

I- T - T 

58. bas, rbs (Qi-)» obttf (Q 1 -)- 

- T T T - T 

59. tf-u t^T(Hi.), rrp T . 

60. D^i .TT (rarely), T£a. 

V V T T T T 

61. P2% *|T} (c/. 14). 

62. nnn, rria, ph, njaa, 

rrjin". 

63. nH sni nnatfa. 

64. Sn, pm ^V ' 

65. ban, pa; (q/"- T 8), iqtt, nn 

D3H, Dpn- 

T • J T " 



66. bbn (c/. 7), Tpa, ^at, rrp. 

_ T |-T -T TT 

67. pan, rh- 

68. n.> s£a bbri, tnti, nap. 
ma, ma (Hi.) T , nna, bttp, tonfe 

(<•/• 28), nntft Dttttf- T See L 

69. cnn, ^an, ^tp (# n), pnj, 
pnj, p_a, T nna T (c/.33), ^_p, ^3^. 

7 T o. n4 ^i»\ ^ni bro (V 46). 
71. ^n, nu (c/. ej, -155. 

72. pSJ (p^), SS> ffjg- 

73. nnt, snt pa, tna. T 

74. snj, v©5- 

75. pni pi;, ijpj, pn, •sjatf . 

76. ban, lp, rnpfi (# 40). 

77. :n, "nsia, hnm rnys- 

78. *rn nba, to, rnto bbtr 
(c/. 58), obn. T 

79. tih'ri/rrr- 

80. bm, nai nbn, bn; (c/.4o>, 
53% bas, naV/ i4 T )I n (V. 8). 

si. nan Th vp. 

82. nth, km. 

83. pin rrrj- 

84. D T 6n, ptn (cf. 82), «^g. 
• 85. jrjSn, trnn, njtf. 

86. pSn, totfa. 

87. nan, w,Tin. 022, n^ns, 

^ ,.-1. „ -, ... 

88. Smj3n,nDn,3itD,Dn5,2nn. 

See 2. 

89. Dan, pw, nnt^- 

90. nhi, m: (Q., t nl), trnp. 

•• t It t "It 

See 21. 

91. *p, nS ; . (cf. 38). 

92. n;, *]?■ ' 



03. 



sn^_, jnj. 



94. }«, tt^i^p, npt^. 

95. nrr, he;, nn; (Hi.) 
(Qi.), dpi nj^npsT 

96. ir gtih). bin (# so). 



nab 



LIST OF SYNONYMS. 



188 



97. 


d\ Dinn- 




98. 


ntT 


(Ql), 1^- 




99. 


re» 


np; (m.> 




100. 


TS 


nnan, nn? 


• nnxan- 


101. 


5V, 


t:Sa aoba), 


- T " T 


"TOf, 1E& 






102. 


nn;- 


"IIW?- 




103. 


DD2 


, frn- 




104. 
105. 


p3, 




l&S, ffip 


(Hi.). 








106. 


rb, 


'ir, Dir;- see si. 


107. 


I* * 




108. 


nD3 


' !©?' "TB? 


(c/. 52), 


nsD (of 6),' 

T 1 


nno, T ja* T 

- T 1 " T 




109. 


arjj 


, trnn (c/. 


4i), nao 

- T 


(of 22) 








110. 

D3tf. 


no? 


' Sffy *n 


$1 nam 

T - 


ill. 


ab, 


T : 


*!>• 


112. 
113. 


nib, 


npa, nns, 


"3* 



n4. nW, ^ttfri, ani- 

115. n^S, T]pb. See 13. 

116. JKfc, jnb, DKtt, 53a, WW- 

See 30. ' " T r " T " T ( " T 

in. n*:aa, bnsa, lira, nn^a, 

T : • T : • T t : 

maa. 
us. trn^a, nana, rm- 

T : • T : • T T 

no. bia, nji. 

i2o. nsia 6,n&>, tfnpa, jm&. 

121. nata, D^a, nam ^aa. 

122. niata, Ttfr s ee m. 

123. rnta, Dip, *er;a (with 

ttfl&tf). 

124. nm toa& rug- 

125. nba, aattfa- 

126. nixSa.nt^a-nnn-.S^- 

127. Dya, j&p." 



128. s^a, nnn. 

T T Ti T 



i29. n:pa, pan (of. 67), ma 

( ,/.ioo).- l: - ' T 

130. Tia. nna, mo (# 35). 

131. too, "spa. 

132. rjxi njjT tftfra- 

133. M:,mn (<•/• 82), na^nsn- 

-TTT TT TT 

134. m:, anp- 

135. nu fcptf . 

136. nnj, toia, m nrn- 

137. nbm, nm bnia, pbn. 

See 33. T "' 

138. ritei nStr. 

T T - T 

139. rm nr, d^b. 

140. Kjjjft 0/ 51), *|B3 (c/. 52), 
L T T " T 

nna- 
i4i. n:a, njfj- 
142. sSp, p^ ^ 

143. Sf fji ' 

144. nas,nn#. 

145. mf, nna, nnsre, bnp- 

T " " T T -: T I T 

147. tyfe, nia^. 

148. ci?. -rui. 

149. fe pn (Hithq.), bw&, 

.- T I - T - T 

nsnn, B?an. 
T i5o. nna, nna, na^- 
i5i. nna (?f~), nbn, nna, 

I T T V V - T 

152. X2X, b'h (of. 53). 

T T 

153. sS$, bm nan:- 

154. «5p,-in^ T (c/.24). 

155. nnp (c/ui), jtpic^.ii), 



156. rrnj?,^. 

157. pan, aattf- 

158. On' (c/. 51), KfrJ (<"/• 51, 
VO;. See 43. 

159. ann, prr- 

160. aan, ttfna- 
i6i. ri. Via, am 



162. san, nan- 

T T T T 



134 



WORDS TO BE DISTINGUISHED. 



163. 93^, xhft. 

104. *p&, npa (c/. n). 

165. natib, |n 

166. nn^, 5&3, battf (# 46). 

167. J-pttf' J-C^ (sometimes), D^tf. 

168. D^tf, Dp (c/. 105). 



169. ^tt, SSJ (Hi.). 

no. np#, nn#. 

It T T T 

171. nnin, n^priri. see 66. 

172. nSnn, main. 

T • : 

173. ^pfi (tent-pin, trumpet), 251 
*]3J, iiaj, ^W. See 68, 69. 



(5). — WORDS TO BE DISTINGUISHED. 



a**, 35: naK, nas: naa, hjk, 
nasi': |3& jik : ji* («*.), jix (mo: 
niV, niV: 'itk. ^: nns, nnis: 
^ ^n: pit p£: Sk, ygx nba, 
nSs : dk, d^ : h &** (dsd, ^V: 
nai, maa, nss : ^dk; ar$ : ^idk, 
ntV: na&. n?i:: ran«/nanr: 
jm pnn& fnrij* : n& pnW : 
mfcipfc: ^n«, ^n? : ^K.t&x: 
nm ntbs: n*iL mfnm nris* 

n»a, 'n?a: ns, n-s: T Kia/i3: 
Tijosa rtis). npa: pa, ;a: 
nas, sps: nba cvfea), sba: 
SSa, b?a: nna, ■spis. 

•'la, k?i: -^' T? i;?- T 

Dn, DTI. 

ban, Sari : im ,th : nSn, 

-.. V V V T T T T I - T 

\hr\ : bbn, bbn, y?jj : man, nan : 
I3> T ID ♦ nan. nan : T rnn, nnn : 
Dnn, tfnn- 

nt, ntT: 'nit. nias: nai, na'^: 
it, nat,%: nnt, nt. pnt- 

T T T "T -Tl-T 

tznn, tinp: tnri tzhp: bn 
te: Sin, ba, bip: main, rrtoip: 

rrjo- n ?0' n ?? : n ^0' ^?? : « n J0' 

533, njp, wpj; fan! fan (p is): 
pir fp: T nm najg: ann, anp: 
rm «np, n^p> yip : ann, ma : 

t t tI t tI t -It ••• •• ••• ■•■ 

am atfp- 

rfr. n;j rrT. tt: di s , d; 
(piurlis d^% dw : T b^% ptr: 
id;, n#;: T *CP T - n*n ci some 

forms) J |-pP, TV! 9ttK nttf^ 

- "T I "T "T ~T 



na, na; pis, Dip: naa,nap. 
lib, )b cib). 

nrtto, ire, nab; im tow: 
nn&, raaV nm hbd: »Sd, 

T T T ~ ■.. - T • " T 

n^p: nbb, ^6: jd, pa: nj& 
53b : b$b (prep.), byb (subs.) ♦ 
rbvfc (n locative), rfcsa : Km 
K^b : nam, njpto- 

^j, t]3«: baa, baa: nba?, 
nbaa : nw, ot : htt, iau : nm, 

T " : - " ~T -T TT 

naa, ripj : Sm, Sm : am, Dpa : 

TT ItT _ T _ T l-T 

htOJ, 5D3 : HD3, 5D3, K^. 

TT -T TT ~T TT 

rbb, yba, ^Sac: nSo, rf?tt, 

TV - V T " - T - T 

T]b^: ^D, ma'tr. 

nr (prep.), t; («^o: t?, m: 
,Tn? (is), nn^ nr): mr, nut: 
115, napj: fe Sen: ^ c~&«o, 
^ T w : nr3, to : ni& (p)» 

• T T T T T T " I " 

n&? (pr)- 

nns, npa : nna, rrna : tna, 
trnafnni, nna" 

kd¥, na^ : nnx» ^^ : n ?¥ j 
ja2; T ^i2, rp_tt?. T 

n«i, .np, ^n: nn, ^n: 
ana aan : T n^n, pn : asn nan. 

- T "T ""I " TT TT 

^r, na^, satr: nm 2i: 

«3t?, naj : b£w, bpb : n«^, T n';t& : 
nnfe, np^ : T ton^ toptj? T : nntr, 
nat^t aa^, aat^ : natfc ^tr. 
n\nn, nbnn: nnin, nnin: 

t • : t • : T T 

Tian, own- 



I 



